Home

Content Client User Manual

1. Title The name of the object Type The object type of the object Version The current three digit version number of the object Special Attributes Special attributes are all metadata that do not belong to the standard metadata For detailed information on special attributes refer to chapter 14 Working with Special Attributes References The links between different objects are called references You can only add references to objects that have a content component References are used primarily for the following purposes m integrating the content of another file e g a graphics file m linking to another file or HTML page 46 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Links between different objects make it possible to establish branched reference structures There are two different forms of references that can be used to integrate an object in the reference structure m references to the object the object is the destination of the references m references to other objects the object is the source of the references When editing an object you can directly insert hyperlinks These hyper links are automatically inserted as references in the metadata when the object is checked in An object s references are modified accordingly if you move the object to a different location within the website All references that refer to resources outside the current website e g toa page in the WWW or a file in the file syste
2. Starting the wizard 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the Navigation area mark the topic to which you want to add the relator 350 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client 3 Choose Object New gt from object type or click the appropriate icon p Icon for adding an object on the basis of the object type Specifying title file and object type In the first dialog box you specify the file which is to be added to the Livelink system and the name of the new Livelink document Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer Specify a title for the object and select the desired object type If the object is to be created from an existing file also specify this file You may also assign a workflow to the object Title Jadvanced Training File D Temp AdvancedTraining ppt Browse Workflow lt none gt CGI script Compound object Form instance Livelink relator Ss Other PowerPoint file lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 107 Specifying title file and object type Content Client User Manual 351 Chapter 11 m Title Enter the name for the document in Livelink The Content client uses this name as the relator s title The title is used to identify the relator and is displayed both in the header and in the navigation area Entering a title is mandatory Note Titles must not be more than 255 characters long Also you sho
3. Content Client User Manual 197 Chapter 6 Setting the Delayed Release Option for an Object Objective You want to specify a publication date for an object You do not want the object to be published in the Production view directly after its release by Quality Assurance i e it is not to be published until the date specified Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object for which you want to set a delayed release date 3 Choose View Metadata 4 Enter the desired publication date in the Delayed release field on the General tab Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the date The time can be set manually 5 To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object After having been released by Quality Assurance the object has the status delayed release which is marked by the icon When the publication date is reached the object is published in the Production view 198 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Notes on changing and deleting the publication date m You can change or delete the publication date of an object that has not yet been relea
4. A group of objects located directly below each other is selected by marking the highest and the lowest object while at the same time pressing the SHIFT key Displaying Objects In the Content client there are different display options for the object you selected in the navigation area m displaying the object content see the following section displaying the object preview see section Displaying the Object Preview on page 89 displaying the object preview on the basis of a dynamic deployment system see section Object Preview on the Basis of a Dynamic Deployment System on page 90 displaying the object content in the editor see section Displaying the Object Content in the Editor on page 92 displaying the assigned workflow see section Displaying Informa tion on the Workflow on page 92 88 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Displaying the Object Content The View menu provides two modes for displaying the content of an indi vidual object Content WYSIWYG In this mode you can view the content in the right window pane as it is displayed in the browser You will only see the actual content of the object i e the information from the template is not adopted and the WCM tags are not replaced Zoom functions are provided for a convenient use of this view Notes When viewing objects that have dynamic content or use JavaScript errors may occur in this mode that
5. Body tag when combining object and template Object body element Template body element Page body element lt body bgcolor FF0000 gt lt body vlink FF0000 gt lt body vlink FF0000 gt lt body bgcolor FF0000 gt lt body gt lt body bgcolor FF0000 gt This chapter explains it is explained how to use templates in Livelink WCM Server It is described how to 398 Livelink WCM Server Working with Templates add templates in the Content client see the following section edit and delete templates in the Content client see section Editing and Deleting Templates starting on page 400 work with cascading templates see section Cascading Templates starting on page 401 Adding Templates Objective You want to add a template for WCM objects Prerequisites m You have the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which you want to add the template m You are assigned the functional area that is linked with the object type of the new template To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the topic to which you want to add the template Note You can add templates anywhere you like in the navigation tree The clearest approach is to add the templates to the topic that contains the objects that are to be based on the template Content C
6. Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object whose type you want to change Choose View Metadata Inthe Type field on the General tab select the new object type for the object Click the OK button To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Integrating Metadata in a Page You can integrate any of the object s metadata in a document or in a template by means of WCM tags The WCM tags for the metadata are available in the Metadata dialog box They are displayed as tooltips when you move the mouse over the names of metadata items 200 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects The following code sample illustrates how an object s expiration date is integrated in a page by means of the appropriate WCM tag As a result the HTML page will always display the current expiration date setting lt body gt lt P gt Document valid until VIPDATE_EXPIRE lt p gt lt body gt For detailed information on using WCM tags refer to chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags Maintaining References For general information on references refer to section References starting on page 46 Valid references are an important precondition for successfully using a website For this reason maintaining references is one of the most impor tant tasks when managing a website The references of a
7. P Icon for undoing the action Check out 4 Confirm the security prompts that follow This automatically restores the original state of the object 5 To check out the object yourself choose Edit gt Check out Content Client User Manual 173 Chapter 6 Checking In an Object After editing the object content check in the object The object then has the status changed and can be submitted to Quality Assurance The process of checking in depends on how you configured the Content client Note We recommend that you not change the deployment system between checking an object out and in Changing the deployment system causes problems with objects that contain references to other objects Prerequisites m The object has the status checked out m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object m You are assigned the functional area which is linked with the object type of the object To check your functional areas choose Tools gt Login info Checking in with Download applet 1 Save your changes and close the editor 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you edited 3 Choose Edit gt Check in or click the appropriate icon a Icon for checking in an object When the object is checked in the file is automatically read from your local working directory and transferred to the server At the same time the system checks whether the file checked in
8. Template structure E FAQ 5 amp Press Release D Press Release 1 Press Release 2 D Press Release 3 S Ge Product Transformation BR InternetSite Fig 22 The Template structure view Content Client User Manual 83 Chapter 3 If a template has been assigned to other objects the template node is displayed as or Click or to show the objects using this template Thus if you want to change a template you can see at a glance which objects would be affected by this change In the Configuration dialog box you can determine how the nodes look and specify the maximum number of objects to be displayed below a template The Object list view Choose View Object list to open the object list The object list displays all objects directly subordinate to a topic For each object the object type OID title version and status are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the criterion in this column For example clicking on the Title column sorts the list by title in ascending alphabetical order To reverse the sort order click the header row again This way you can clearly arrange long lists G Topic InternetSite en Type OID Title Version Status Careers 1 0 0 Company Info 1 0 0 General Templates 1 0 0 Home 1 0 0 News 1 0 0 Site Map 1 0 0 Support 1 0 0 workflows 1 0 0 Fig 23 The
9. The following values are possible for the format parameter m relative Relative paths are used in the URLs m absolute Absolute paths are used in the URLs m server relative Relative references without specification of protocol and base URL are used in the URLs context relative Relative references without specification of protocol base URL and web application name are used in the URLs This setting can only be used if an application name has been configured for the deployment system The following table provides examples for using the format parameter with the data type Object URL 444 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Table 42 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Object URL Parameterized WCM tag Output VIPURL format relative NewProducts htm VIPURL format absolute http wcemserver company example wcm products NewProducts htm VIPURL format server relative wem products NewProducts htm VIPURL format context relative products NewProducts htm Values of the format parameter for floating point numbers Note The following description is limited to the most important values For detailed information on the format description and the formatting options for the data type Floating point number refer to http java sun com j2se 1 4 2 docs api java text DecimalFormat html and http java sun com do
10. Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object The other steps correspond to the procedure for adding objects by means of the function New from object type See m Specifying Basic Properties on page 137 Defining Object Responsibilities on page 140 m Entering a Remark on page 146 Content Client User Manual 157 Chapter 5 Importing Objects from a ZIP File You can integrate objects from a ZIP file in the WCM system Notes Inthe WCM system each directory in the ZIP file becomes an object of type Topic This must be considered when creating the ZIP file During the import content can be added to objects of type Topic For this purpose save the content as a file in the directory that the WCM system uses for creating the topic The name of this file must exactly correspond to the name specified in the settings of the object type under Index file Ask your WCM administrator for the exact name m If the ZIP file contains files with special characters e g German umlauts in the file name problems may occur during the import In this case use a JAR file instead of a ZIP file You can use the Jar tool supplied with the Java 2 SDK to create this file Required rights and functional areas You need the following rights and functional areas to add objects by means of the wizard m theaccess rights Read
11. all Data Sheet 8 0 0 Write text Data Sheet 9 0 0 Write text Press Release 4 0 0 Write text Fig 29 Filters in the My worklist view After selecting a filter all objects that are assigned to the selected work flow or that are in the selected activity are displayed Select the entry all to display all objects that are in an activity you are assigned to My work list objects with workflow activity all l Type o1 Title a Path status 21 New Products jen Company Info Products E 62 Press Release 1 fen News g 63 Product Features fen Company Info Products E 20 Product Overview fen Company Info Products Fig 30 The My worklist view The objects are displayed in an object list For each object the object type OID title path to the root object and status are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the criterion in the column Another click reverses the sort order You can mark an object in the list in order to edit it Content Client User Manual 99 Chapter 3 The Search view Note The search functionality is only available if you are assigned to the functional area Search and if at least one Search server is installed in your WCM system In the Configuration dialog box you can determine which Search server is to be used for searching Moreover an internal collection must exis
12. e g Search Term Example In section Creating a Custom Filter on page 377 a filter was defined which finds objects that contain the expression Products in their title You can generalize this filter in such a way that it finds objects whose title contains a freely definable expression To do so replace the comparison value Products with the filter variable Search Term When using this filter you will see an input field for the filter variable in the navigation area Enter the desired search term in this field 382 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Search beginning with topic InternetSite 42 Search expression in title T Apply action to all objects Objects found 1 Please specify values for the variable s contained in the filter Search Term Products OK Fig 120 Entering the value for the filter variable Start searching by clicking the OK button The search results are displayed on the Filter result tab On the Filter variables tab you can start a new search Search beginning with topic InternetSite Search expression in title z 2 B T Apply action to all objects Objects found 1 Filter result Filter variables Please specify values for the variable s contained in the filter Search Term Product Overview Fig 121 Searching with a new search expression Editing Custom Filters In contrast
13. Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the desired date The time can be set manually When the object reaches the expiration date in the Edit view a message is automatically sent to the address specified in the E mail Edit field m Delayed release Specify the publication date with time for the object This determines when the object after having been released by Quality Assurance will be available for the end users in the Production view Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the date The time can be set manually Suggested file name Enter a name for the page which is generated from the WCM object In many cases the WCM system considers this suggestion Direct release You can only select this check box if the functional area Direct release has been assigned to you If you select this check box the object does not have to be submitted to Quality Assurance it can be released directly by the responsible editor The object must only be submitted to Quality Assurance for initial release Content Client User Manual 139 Chapter 5 Do one of the following Toconfirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object Defining Object Responsibilities In this dialog box you define the object responsibilities Y
14. Content Client User Manual 59 Chapter 2 m Remove the user jstein from the role Trainee In that case his access rights would be determined entirely by his membership in the group Marketing Because of this group membership without the role specific restriction he would however have not only the right to change metadata but also the right to delete objects m Change the access settings for the role Trainee so that changing metadata is not explicitly forbidden This however would apply to all trainees not just to jstein m Give the user jstein explicit permission to change metadata User specific permission of this kind overrules the prohibition resulting from assignment to the role The explicit permission for the user overrides the explicit prohibition for the role priority rule 2 Current Change Change Change Move and Read Read opject Delete Create Release metadata rights copy Production v v x v x v x x v Access rights Change Change change Moe Read Type Name 4 Read object Delete Create Release Metadata rights and Production copy User Admin v v v v v v v v v Group Marketing v v v v v v Role Tramee v x x x x v User jstein d v v Fig 14 Interpreting group role and user specific access rights Note This example is merely intended to illustrate the effects of the various priority rules it is not designed to
15. JSP page JSP template Master JSP template Result on The code of all three JSP objects is converted into static code A complete statification is performed on The code of the JSP template and the master JSP template is converted into static code The code of the JSP page however is not statified local The code of the JSP template is converted into static code The code of the master JSP template and the JSP page is however not statified A local statification is performed Note The head element is also stati fied in this case Content Client User Manual 417 Chapter 14 JSP JSP Master JSP Result page template template on local The code of all three JSP objects is converted into static code The value on for the JSP page overwrites the value local for the JSP template Thus the master JSP template is also statified Variables defined in a JSP template can only be used by objects that have the same statification status as the JSP template For the object to be able to use the variable from the JSP template one of following conditions must be met in the case of a not completely statified template cascade m the code of both the JSP template and the object must be statified neither the code of the JSP template nor the code of the object may be statified Statification of Form Instances Statification of form instances is always
16. Q O x A AD Osn Peres ma O E a Address Kitp womserver company example wem vipdynjInbernetSke_InSibe 200 1_p_0 htm Website Internetsite InternetSite OID 1 re o a EN Ei Replace Bac Forward Refresh New WCM tags Check out Chi ckin Edit content Willkommen Unde Show content MPE Links Sha Sane Welcome Submit Release Direct release E Bienvenue seg Referencing objects Referenced objects log Select object Start Content dient v Inke Edting Fig 86 InSite Editing Calling Functions in InSite Editing In InSite Editing you use the toolbar or the context menu to access the individual editing functions Click the right mouse button to open the context menu The menu items and icons are dynamically modified to suit the current context Functions that you cannot use for the current object are deactivated dimmed 296 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Notes Clicking the Back button of your browser might lead to JavaScript errors For this reason you should use the toolbar of InSite Editing or the Select object function on the context menu for navigating InSite Editing and the Content client are not synchronized Thus changes made by means of InSite Editing do not become automati cally visible in a Content client that is open at the same time To update the view in the client choose View Refresh or press F5 m I
17. Release is required The task range of the QA staff includes monitoring the quality standards defined by the company m checking new or modified objects monitoring content and layout of the published objects Content Client User Manual 37 Chapter 2 m checking for up to dateness and taking appropriate action if the expi ration date of an object is reached m checking the reference structure of the website monitoring the published pages for consistency of content compiling a list of the necessary changes when objects are rejected Structure of a WCM Object Each WCM object consists of certain components representing the different data of the object content optional see the following section template optional see section Template starting on page 41 metadata see section Metadata starting on page 42 m references optional see section References starting on page 46 m access rights see section Access Rights starting on page 50 All data of a WCM object is stored in an external relational database 38 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Content of the object Template ra Content 3 ac a back home forward References Access rights Metadata Fig 5 Structure of a WCM Object Content The content is the most important component of a WCM object For an HTML page it is the body element of the HTML page for a graphic it is the image file for a
18. Simple text input field Formatted text Returns the HTML content of the attribute Only the content of the body element is returned If there is no body element the entire text is generated to the page Links contained in the text are not managed automatically Integrated HTML editor 436 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Data type Format used Input element Integer Large integer Returns the integer itself The value range is defined as follows 2147483647 lt integer lt 2147483647 Returns the large integer itself The value range is defined as follows Simple text input field Simple text input field 9223372036854775808 lt large integer lt 9223372036854775807 List Returns a comma separated list of Simple text input the entries in the order they were field entered In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not generated to the page Livelink ID Returns the ID of the object in the Separate dialog Livelink system box for selecting a Livelink system and a Livelink object Set Returns an alphabetically sorted Simple text input comma separated list of the entries Double entries are removed In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not generated to the page field Content Client User Manual 437 Chapter 15 Data type Format used Input element Set of e mail Returns an
19. The filter Parameter on page 451 To configure a thumbnail view for the logos use the thumbnails param eter If the thumbnails parameter has the value on thumbnails are auto matically displayed for graphic objects The WCM tag for integrating the logo looks as follows VIPLOGO edit begin filter topic 4 and oty_name GIF thumbnails on default on lt img src VIPLOGO align middle gt VIPLOGO edit end Step 3 Start InSite Editing Start InSite Editing See section Starting InSite Editing on page 295 Content Client User Manual 333 Chapter 10 Step 4 Edit partner object 1 Go to the partner object that you want to modify here the profile of the partner Kryptonite Power GmbH All fragments of the partner object that you may change and for which InSite Editing is enabled are highlighted by a red frame Kryptonite Power Partner Kryptonite Power GmbH i RBRYPTONITE Get energized with Kryptonite Power Kryptonite Power is a European agency specialized in Contact Interactive Communication and Result Hunting Strategy We supply all the skills and services necessary Moncweg 122 Hamburg technological strategic and creative to fully enahle our clients on the Intemet Title Kryptonite Power OID 79 Aenean varius pece vel enim In consequat Phasellus Type Assembled object tellus tincidunt ut sollicitudin eu mattis id pace Done Status released amet erat
20. You may copy dependent objects However the copies will not be updated when the source object is reconverted Instead new dependent objects will be generated Moving the source object When a source object is moved the dependent objects are not moved When the source object is reconverted new dependent objects are gener ated The old dependent objects are deleted Moving dependent objects You may move dependent objects When the source object is converted again however the moved objects are deleted and new converted objects are generated at the location in the navigation tree where the source object is located Metadata of the source object The dependent objects of the source object inherit its metadata the first time the source object is converted After the first conversion any changes to the metadata of the source object are no longer inherited by the dependent objects This means that the metadata of the source object and the dependent objects must be maintained separately References of the dependent objects It is possible to change the references of the dependent objects You can add references to the dependent objects or references from the depen dent objects to other objects and make changes to the references between the dependent objects However with the exception of the start 236 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects page of the source object all changes get lost when the source object is reconverted T
21. or Delete that you perform on the source object are automatically performed on all dependent objects This does not apply to the dependent objects that already have the desired status Reconverting the source object You can change the source file For the changes to become valid for the dependent objects of the source object the source object must be converted again Convert function This has the following effects on the individual objects The object status and the version number of the source object remain unchanged The old start page is replaced by the regenerated start page The object gets the status changed the version number is incremented m The following applies to the other old dependent objects m Objects with a major version number lower than 1 are immedi ately deleted in the WCM system Objects with a version number that is higher or equal to 1 get the status deleted They are displayed in addition to the regener ated dependent objects that have the status changed and the version number 0 0 1 As soon as the source object is released the old objects will be irretrievably deleted Content Client User Manual 235 Chapter 6 Copying the source object When a source object is copied the dependent objects are not copied To generate dependent objects for the copy of the source object convert the copy Convert function Copying dependent objects
22. Livelink WCM Server Content Client User Manual This manual describes how to use the Content client for editing contents of websites which are managed with Livelink WCM Server It provides information on the following topics e introduction to handling and configuring the Content client e adding editing and deleting objects e staging and workflow in the WCM system e working with InSite Editing and Content Assembly e managing websites with the Content client OPEN TEXT Mindt Working Together TO RP OC R A T IGN Copyright 2006 by Open Text Corporation The copyright to these materials and any accompanying software is owned without reservation by Open Text Corporation These materials and any accompanying software may not be copied in whole or part without the express written permission of Open Text Corporation Open Text Corporation is the owner of the trademarks Open Text Great Minds Working Together Livelink and MeetingZone among others This list is not exhaustive All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only and are trademarks of their respective owners All rights reserved Open Text Corporation provides certain warranties and limitations in connection with the software that this document describes For information about these warranties and limitations refer to the license agreement entered into between the licensee and Open Text Corporation Contacting Us Ope
23. Remark Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 x Please enter a remark The remark will be saved in the log T Do not show this dialog again Cancel Fig 50 Entering a remark for a new object Select the Do not show this dialog again check box if you do not want the Remark dialog box to be displayed after adding objects or editing object content You can also make this setting in the Configuration dialog box To add the object click the OK button Importing Embedded Objects Embedded objects are objects referenced in an object These objects can include images CSS files and JavaScript files contained in an HTML or JSP page The following conditions must be fulfilled to import these objects together with the referencing object into the WCM system 146 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects m the references are relative m the embedded objects are located in the same directory as the refer encing object or in a subdirectory m the Download applet is used for working with the Content client Note Only those objects are imported as embedded objects into the WCM system that conform to one of the object types GIF image JavaScript JPEG image PNG image or Other If you click the OK button in the wizard for adding an object the system checks whether the file specified in the second step contains embedded objects If there are embedded objects the following dialog box is displayed Z
24. and Create for the topic to which the object is to be added m the functional area Import and the functional area linked with the object type of the new object To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info The following sections describe how to proceed when importing objects from a ZIP file by means of the wizard 158 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Starting the Wizard To start the wizard 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the topic in which you want to integrate the objects 3 Choose Object Import gt from ZIP file The wizard starts 4 Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the import process Selecting a File In this dialog box you specify the file that is the basis for adding the objects Z Select file Microsoft Internet Explorer iol x Please select a file you want to use for creating the WCM object From file Browse IV Create topic Import dependent files only Start file for import lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 56 Specifying a ZIP file for import Content Client User Manual 159 Chapter 5 1 Compress the files that you want to import in a ZIP or JAR file file extension zip or jar 2 Click the Browse button next to the From file field to select the ZIP file 3 Select the desired check boxes Create topic Select this check box to add a n
25. http wcmserver company example InternetSite_Edit InternetSite ProductOverview html gt lt head gt lt body gt lt a onclick goto lt url gt gt Go to Product Overview lt a gt lt br gt lt taglib myTag myAttributeVIPURL http wcmserver company example InternetSite_Edit InternetSite NewProducts htm1l gt lt body gt lt html gt JavaScript example The following JavaScript example illustrates the use of the different JavaScript expressions for identifying references lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt VIPTITLE lt title gt lt script language JavaScript gt JavaScript implementation of the getVIPURL pattern function getVIPURL url return url Leads the browser to the given url function goto url 212 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects location href url var url VIPURL http wcmserver company example InternetSite_Edit InternetSite ProductOverview html lt script gt lt head gt lt body gt lt a href javascript goto getVIPURL http wcemserver company example InternetSite_Edit InternetSite Products html gt Go to Products lt a gt lt br gt lt a onclick goto url gt Go to Product Overview lt a gt lt br gt lt body gt lt html gt You can also reference an object by means of its OID In this case you precede the OID with the expression VIPOID The code fragments then look as follows
26. large integer 437 list 437 Livelink ID 437 object content 438 object source 438 object URL 438 OID 438 set 437 set of e mail addresses 438 string 438 text 439 time 439 time stamp 439 date data type 436 delayed release add object 139 metadata item 43 object status 35 set for an object 198 WCM tag 429 delete activity 270 application class 124 attribute set 484 cascading template 406 compound object 241 end point 270 entry from action list automatically 120 entry from action list manually 102 filter 385 object category 490 object not yet released 229 517 Index object type 477 page 232 profile 128 property 489 reference 214 reject 231 relator 362 released object 227 source object 241 starting point 270 template 400 transition 270 workflow definition 280 workflow element 270 deleted object status 36 dependent object 248 deployment dynamic 90 description metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 destroy object 230 dialog metadata dialog box 193 dialog box Access rights dialog box 215 Change password 78 Configuration dialog box 108 Log in 75 Login information 80 References dialog box 202 Select website 76 Send e mail 92 Take over as substitute 79 direct release 253 add object 139 metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 display content 89 information on workflow 92 518 preview in browser 89 preview in editor 92 Download applet 113 configure 113 dy
27. released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Change rights and Change metadata for the object 216 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Inthe navigation area mark the object whose access control list you want to edit 3 Choose View Access rights The Access rights dialog box opens Current Change Change Change Move and Read Read object Delete Ge Release metadata rights copy Production v v x v x v v x v Access rights Move Change Change Change Read Typev Name Read object Delete Create Release metadata rights ha Production User jstein vY vY v vY User mmoreno v v v v v v v v v Role Trainee v x x x x v Group Marketing v v v Y Y v Save Reset Help Fig 71 The Access rights dialog box Notes The groups and roles to which the logged in user is assigned are emphasized in bold type in the Type and Name columns The access rights in the Current section result from the combination of the access rights for the principals shown in bold If the Use access rights of parent topic button is displayed the object has an access control list of its own In this case the object has not inherited the access settings of the parent topic Content Client User Manual 217 Chapter 6 4 Open the context menu of the dialog b
28. to deactivate the transition mode 2 Mark the desired element with the left mouse button 3 Press the DEL key The selected element is deleted Graphical Representation of Workflow Elements In the workflow modeler transitions activities starting points and end points have a graphical representation The following table shows the representation of the individual workflow elements in the workflow modeler 270 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Table 17 Graphical representation of workflow elements Starting point End point Release End point Stop End point Destroy Activity Edit Edit Activity QA Activity Delete Delta Transition Transition gt Content Client User Manual 271 Chapter 8 Creating and Editing Workflow Definitions This section describes how to create a workflow definition see the following section edit existing workflow definitions see section Editing a Workflow Definition on page 278 m delete existing workflow definitions see section Deleting a Workflow Definition on page 280 Creating a Workflow Definition This section describes how to create a workflow definition The procedure depends on whether you start the workflow modeler via the Content client or as a separate application Creating a Workflow Definition via the Content Client Prerequisites m You have the acc
29. Choose View Workflow to display information on the assigned work flow Content Client User Manual 285 Chapter 8 Objective You want to edit a WCM object to which a workflow is assigned Prerequisites m You are assigned to the current activity of the object Choose View My work list for an overview of all objects in the workflow that you may currently edit m You have the access rights that are required for editing the object and forwarding it in the workflow Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to edit 2 Check out the object and edit it as usual 3 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system 4 Choose Object Forward or click the appropriate icon vi Icon for forwarding an object in the workflow If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can forward the object and send a message to the principal assigned to the next activity If the current activity has only one transition the object is forwarded automatically Otherwise the Forward dialog box opens 5 Select a transition and confirm by clicking the OK button If the Content client is configured accordingly a Remark dialog box opens 6 Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button 286 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow The object is forwarded to the next activity If you have selected a transiti
30. E Enterprise E Accounting amp Finance Eg Company wide Discussions Eg Development Eg Human Resources S E Training Bg Presentations S E Tutorials Ba de a Ba Cancel Fig 105 Selecting the Livelink folder Content Client User Manual 347 Chapter 11 Confirm your selection by clicking the Next button Specifying the version of the Livelink folder The Livelink folder that the Livelink folder relator refers to may be subject to change In this dialog box you determine how the Livelink folder relator reacts when the Livelink folder changes Note For each object in the Livelink folder a separate relator is created The setting that you make here initially applies to all relators However you can subsequently change this setting for individual rela tors see section Modifying Livelink Metadata on page 355 3 Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explorer Check whether you selected the right Livelink Folder Specify the version Livelink ID E en Nodeld 5246 When a Livelink folder relator is added all subfolders and documents within this folder are also added as relators Thus many objects may i be added to the website The selected Livelink Folder contains at least 6 documents which will be imported Version ic Update Edit version automatically Fixed version Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 106 Specifying the v
31. Finding Objects and Editing Them Together 3 Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explorer 0 x You have selected the following filter expression K h title contains Products Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 117 Generated filter expression The filter expression displayed finds objects whose title contains the expression Products Click the OK button The filter expression is written to the filter definition field Z Filter editor Microsoft Internet Explorer Filter definition title contains Products Save Delete Reset Cancel Help Fig 118 Adopting the filter expression Content Client User Manual 381 Chapter 12 Saving and Applying the Filter To apply the new filter click the OK button If you want to save the filter for future filter actions click the Save button Explorer User Prompt gq x Script Prompt Please enter a name for the filter Cancel Fig 119 Saving a user defined filter Enter a name for the filter and click the OK button The filter is integrated in the drop down list of the object filter and is applied automatically Filter Variables Instead of specifying a concrete comparison value for a filter you can use a variable for the comparison value In this way you can use the same filter for several queries A filter variable has the format variable name
32. Object list view Above the object list the topic whose object list you are viewing is displayed To navigate up in the object hierarchy click the icon or the respective entry in the path If you want to navigate down in the object 84 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client hierarchy double click an entry in the list This opens the object list of the respective object In the Configuration dialog box you can determine the maximum number of entries to be displayed in the object list The Favorites list For quick access to objects you can use the personal favorites list The Favorites menu takes you straight to the objects you frequently edit Favorites are only displayed for the currently selected website To add an object to the list of favorites mark the object in the navigation area and choose Favorites gt Add to Favorites Choose Favorites gt Remove from Favorites to delete the current object from the list of favor ites Favorites de Topic OID 5 en Careers Topic OID 8 en Company Info Products Topic OID 16 enj News Events HTML page OID 32 Fig 24 The Favorites list Choosing Functions In the Content client you can choose functions in the following ways m from the menu bar m from the context menu from the toolbar m from the Subordinate objects view Content Client User Manual 85 Chapter 3 The menu items and icons are dynamically mod
33. Phasellus a enim non purus scelerisque kr Aktivity Integer turpis Maecenas vitae libero Aliquam sapien pee egestas condimentum interdum et elementum quis Version 1 0 0 Etiam cus Cras porttitor rutrum tellus Duis biber tempor elit Curabitur ut tellus Sed gravida orci eu nil hac habitasse phtea dictumst Phasellus ut purus Fig 98 Partner object in InSite Editing 2 Click the icon 2 next to the fragment that you want to edit A dialog box in which you can change the value of the fragment opens 334 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Kryptonite Power Partner Kryptonite Power GmbH BRYPTONITE Get energized with Kryptonite Powe Kryptonite Pewror ira Furemoan ananmr enanialirar in Cantact Interactive C Fe RETR epererssisuiesg sassy loj xj Strategy We T technobogi r our clients o slogan Jeet energized with Kryptonite Power Aenean variu tellus tincidui amet erat Pr Integer turpis egestas sr Save Reset Cancel Help Etiam lacus tempor elit Curabitur ut tellus Sed gravida orci eu nibh In hac habitasse phtea dictumst Phasellus ut purus Fig 99 Editing a partner object via InSite Editing 3 Make the desired changes 4 Click the Save button The changes immediately become available in the Edit view of the website 5 To make further changes repeat steps 2 to 4 Step 5 Replace logo 1 Next to the logo click the icon a A dialog
34. Selecting the Delete Livelink object together with relator option In the Livelink metadata dialog box you can determine that the referenced Livelink object will be destroyed together with the relator 362 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Proceed as follows 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Open the Livelink metadata dialog box by choosing View gt Livelink metadata 3 On the General Livelink data tab select the check box Delete Livelink object together with relator 4 Click the Save button For the change to take effect you must submit the relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance Content Client User Manual 363 364 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 12 Finding Objects and Editing Them Together The Content client provides extensive filter functions in order to find objects quickly You can search objects according to certain criteria and perform actions such as Submit or Release on the objects found This way you can edit many objects simultaneously This considerably speeds up work procedures and makes them more efficient as it is also possible to send compact e mails to the responsible editors and QA staff via the filter navigation The following filter functions are available in the Content client The object filter contains predefined and ready to use standard filters see the following section m The My objects view contains
35. Specify whether you want text to be displayed on the toolbar icons and where this text is located Actions in toolbar Specify which functions are to be represented by toolbar icons 116 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Hide disabled icons Select this check box if you do not want to display deactivated icons Note If you use the Mozilla browser and selected below for Text in toolbar you must not select this check box 4 Do one of the following m Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Configuring the Navigation To specify the settings for the navigation 1 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 Mark the tree element Navigation or one of its sub elements in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box The possible settings are displayed in the right window pane The following table describes for which areas of the navigation you can make settings For detailed information refer to the online help of the Content client Content Client User Manual 117 Chapter 4 Table 11 Navigation settings of a profile Item Possible settings Navigation Layout of the object tree nodes Maximum number of objects displayed below a topic or template Maximum number of objects displa
36. The Object Identification of the object integer The WCM system automatically generates an OID for every new object You cannot change the OID It is not reused after the object has been deleted The OID is displayed in almost all dialog boxes Note Use the OID field in the toolbar to directly navigate to an object If you frequently edit certain objects it might be helpful to note down the respective OIDs The position of the object in the topic struc ture of the website Released by The ID of the last user who released the object Release date Status The date with time on which the object was released last The current processing status of the object Suggested file name The suggested name for the page gener ated from the WCM object In many cases the WCM system considers this suggestion Target group The group of people the object content is relevant to This information can be used as a search criterion in the object filter Content Client User Manual 45 Chapter 2 Metadata item Description Inherited Template Indicates whether a template is assigned wi to the object and if so which template is used Note If you do not have read rights for the template assigned to the object the entry No read rights for template is displayed in the Metadata dialog box In this case you cannot see the title of the template only its OID is visible to you
37. The new attribute set Heropage is assigned to both object types The attribute set Heropage contains the attributes top middle and bottom of the data type Object content For further infor mation on adding object types and attribute sets refer to chapter 16 Managing Websites in the Content Client On the basis of the object type Herotemplate the template Herotem plate was created On all pages of the website three teasers for data sheets are to be displayed in the left window pane This is realized by means of the attributes top middle and bottom integrated into the template by means of WCM tags To enable InSite Editing for these attributes the edit parameter is set in the WCM tags For detailed infor mation on using WCM tags refer to chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags The teasers to be displayed on the website are saved as WCM objects of type HTML page in the topic fragments with the OID 52 When a teaser is replaced only WCM objects from this topic should be available For this reason the filter parameter is also set in the WCM tags see section The filter Parameter on page 451 304 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing The parameter default ensures that the same teasers are displayed on all pages of the website see section The default Parameter on page 452 The WCM tag for the attribute top looks as follows VIPTOP
38. The selected workflow definition opens 4 Edit the workflow definition You can add workflow elements see section Creating a Workflow Defini tion on page 272 and Adding Transitions on page 268 delete workflow elements see section Deleting Workflow Elements on page 270 move workflow elements see sections Moving Activities Starting Points and End Points on page 267 and Moving Tran sitions on page 269 double click a workflow element to edit its properties 5 Save your changes and close the workflow modeler Note The changed workflow definition does not automatically become available in the WCM system For this purpose you must add a WCM object of type Workflow on the basis of the changed XPDL file or change an existing workflow object Deleting a Workflow Definition Via the Content client To delete a workflow definition you must only delete the respective WCM object of type Workflow in the Content client If you want to delete the WCM object only without deleting the workflow definition proceed as follows 280 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow 1 Check out the workflow object to be deleted The workflow modeler opens 2 Save the workflow definition in the file system Choose File gt Save asor click the appropriate icon a Icon for saving a workflow definition in the file system 3 Close the workflow modeler and delete the respective WCM
39. This tab is only used for information purposes It shows all metadata that are integrated into the content of the current object by means of WCM tags 4 Make the desired changes on the tabs Note It is not possible to change the object category and the prop erties of an object in one step Change the object category first and save your changes Then you can edit the properties of the object The same applies to the object type and the attributes of an object 5 Click the Save button The metadata are changed The object has the status changed Content Client User Manual 195 Chapter 6 6 To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Editing Metadata of Several Objects Objective You want to change the metadata of several objects simultaneously A wizard guides you through this process Prerequisites m The objects have the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the objects Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Choose View Object list or use the object filter e g if you want to set a new identical expiration date for all expired objects 3 In the object list or hitlist mark the objects whose metadata you want to edit 4 Choose Edit Edit metadata of curren
40. User Manual 497 Appendix A XSLT templates can be used in many ways Like an XSLT document you can use an XSLT template to format the content of an XML document In the XSLT template it is also possible to define conditions that dynamically control the layout of the generated data You can define these conditions on the basis of WCM tags e g lt xsliwhen test VIPDEPLOYMENT_NAME VIPSITE _prod gt Using Templates Like any other object objects of type XML document can be assigned templates Depending on the type of the template assigned the content and file extension of the generated page change The following table gives you an overview The table includes only those combinations of templates that have usable results Table 49 Content and file extension depending on the template none The complete content of the XML xml document is output including the lt xml tag HTML or JSP template The content of the XML document html or without the lt xm1 tag is inserted jsp at the location marked by VIPCONTENT 498 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML a JSP template or an XML template template After the XSLT transfor mation the result of the transformation is inserted in the HTML JSP or XML template at the location marked by VIPCONTENT XML template The lt xml tag is adopted from the xml template The content of the XML docume
41. User Manual 73 Chapter 3 the right to access the WCM system You can obtain your user ID and a password from your WCM administrator editor programs You can use your familiar programs to edit the website content i e any HTML editor for HTML pages your preferred graphics program for graphics etc For editing HTML objects the Content client offers an integrated HTML editor Starting the Content Client This section describes the first steps in working with the Content client The following procedures will be explained 74 log in to the WCM system see the following section select the website you want to edit see section Selecting a Website on page 76 log out of the WCM system see section Logging Out of the WCM System on page 77 change your password see section Changing the Password on page 78 log in as substitute for another user see section Taking over as Substitute on page 79 display your login information see section Information on the Logged in User on page 80 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Logging in to the WCM System Before you log in to the WCM system for the first time you will receive the following information from your WCM administrator the URL of the Content client you user ID and the corresponding password To log in to the WCM system 1 2 Launch your browser Enter the URL of the Content client in the address field of your
42. delete 270 graphical representation 270 workflow modeler functions 265 in general 262 install 261 menu bar 265 start 263 toolbar 265 World 52 add zu access control list 216 set access rights 220 withdraw access rights 222 X XML application examples 500 object types 493 use templates 498 XML document object data type 472 object type 69 XML schema object type 70 529 Index XML template object data type 472 object type 70 XSLT document object type 70 XSLT template object data type 472 object type 70 530 Livelink WCM Server
43. e g whether they may only read the object or can edit it as well In the settings of an object each access right can be explicitly assigned or denied to a principal i e a user group or role The following table gives an overview of the actions you can perform on objects and the required access rights Table 4 Actions and required access rights Action Required access rights Add object Read Create Change object for the parent topic Delete object Read Delete Change object Submit object Read Change object Edit an object check out change Read Change object check in Change an object s metadata Read Change metadata Change an object s references Read Change metadata Rename object Read Change metadata 50 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Action Required access rights Move object Read Move and copy Change meta data for the source object Copy object Read Move and copy Change meta data for the source object Insert object after cutting or Read Create for the target topic copying Check access rights of object Read Change access rights of object Read Change rights Change metadata Release or reject object Read Release Release object directly Read Change object Destroy object Read Release Users Groups and Roles Livelink WCM Server allows you to assign the users of a website to groups and to contro
44. floating point parameter number 1234567 9999 not set 1 234 567 9999 1234567 1234 HHH HEH HH UOOA4 1 234 567 12 234567 9999 0 000 000 00 u00A4 u00A4 0 234 568 00 USD 234567 9999 O HHEEOO 2 3457E05 446 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Value of the Value of the format Output floating point parameter number 0 87 currency 0 87 0 25 percent 25 0 005 HH U2030 5 o Values of the format parameter for integers and large integers Possible values for the format parameter are m currency Inserts separators for thousands and decimal places returns the currency symbol depending on the language of the WCM object or the value of the Locale parameter Examples The value 42 is output as 42 00 The value 123456789 is output as 123 456 789 00 m bytes returns the unit bytes KB or MB depending on the amount of the value Examples The value 42 is output as 42 bytes The value 1234 is output as 1 20 KB The value 123456789 is output as 117 73 MB Values of the format parameter for Livelink IDs Possible values for the format parameter are nodeid returns the ID of the object in the Livelink system m systemname returns the name of the Livelink system Content Client User Manual 447 Chapter 15 Values of the format parameter for sets and lists By default commas are interpreted as separators for the data
45. functional elements e g JavaScript The template also provides place holders so called WCM tags for the actual content of the objects based on the template and for information from the object metadata For detailed information on using WCM tags refer to chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags Thus creating a template means constructing a layout that contains not only defined design elements but also content and metadata positioned by means of placeholders Furthermore navigation can also be imple mented in the template which means that editors are relieved of this task and are free to concentrate on the content of the objects Content Client User Manual 397 Chapter 13 Notes You cannot use framesets in a template An object using the Unicode character set can only be assigned templates that also use Unicode For objects to which a template is assigned the head element is deleted and replaced with the head element of the template each time the object is checked in It is possible that both the body element of the template and the body element of the object contain attributes When the page is generated i e when template and object are merged only the attributes in the body element of the template are considered The attributes in the body element of the object are only considered if the body element of the template does not contain any attributes The following table illustrates this Table 32
46. hereof No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Gauss Interprise AG or Gauss Interprise Inc Moreover the regulations of the software license agreement apply to this documentation All brand names and trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners http www opentext com bridgin auss html Program version Livelink Web Content Management Server Content Server 9 5 1 Document version En 01 Publication date May 2006 Table of Contents List of Figures List of Tables Chapter 1 Introduction What Livelink WCM Server Has to Offer About this Manual Typographic Conventions Chapter 2 Concepts System Architecture Structure of a WCM Object Functional Areas Object Types Chapter 3 Working with the Content Client Starting the Content Client The User Interface of the Content Client Editing Objects in the Content Client The Log Help on the Content client Chapter 4 Configuring the Content Client Adding a Profile Using a Profile Editing a Profile Deleting a Profile Customizing the Content Client 13 17 17 21 23 27 27 38 61 65 73 74 81 86 103 105 107 109 127 128 128 129 Livelink WCM Server Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Adding Objects Adding Objects on the Basis of an Object Type Adding Objects on the Basis of a Template Importing Linked Objects Importing Objects from a ZIP File C
47. objects as well Special Properties of Compound Objects The object type Compound object is required for downward compatibility It was introduced to represent complex document structures generated by means of a converter When adding a compound object you specify the source document to be converted as a file Basically compound objects behave as normal source objects during conversion There are however some differences when working with compound objects These are described in the following Metadata of a compound object The dependent objects of the compound object inherit its metadata You may change the metadata of the dependent objects separately from the compound object However all changes get lost when the compound object is changed Attributes of a compound object If the compound object and the dependent objects have the same attributes the dependent objects inherit the values of these attributes from the compound object This results in two different working methods for compound objects 242 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects m You add a compound object based on a source document only once All changes and modifications required later are made to the objects generated by the converter The source document itself is not changed m You add a compound object based on a source document All required changes are made in the source document After checking in the source document choose the Convert
48. specified in the metadata HTML page consisting of template and content Fig 6 Separation of layout and content Content Client User Manual 41 Chapter 2 If you use templates for the objects in your website the pages in the website are generated by merging template and object content The layout of the pages is defined in the templates By means of placeholders the so called WCM tags available in Livelink WCM Server you can insert additional information from the object metadata in the generated HTML page For example by using the WCM tag VIPDATE_CREATED you can display the object s creation date on the HTML page see chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags After a template has been changed the changes are applied automatically to all objects based on that template as soon as the edited template is released There is no need to adapt the individual objects Like all WCM objects templates are subject to the defined staging steps This ensures that changes to a template do not become visible in the Produc tion view until the template has been checked and released by Quality Assurance For detailed information on working with templates refer to chapter 13 Working with Templates Metadata For each WCM object Livelink WCM Server manages information describing the object Such information is known as metadata and comprises various properties of the object The metadata can be used to filter objects
49. the installation of the WCM system and provides information on configuring HTTP server and JSP engine WCM Java API Programmer s Manual This document contains information on interfaces classes and methods of the Java programming interface WCM Java API which enables you to use the functionality of the WCM servers via external programs Online help Livelink WCM Server offers an integrated online help that can be called at any time when working with the Content client Content Client User Manual 21 Chapter 1 The contents of this manual are organized as follows 22 Chapter 2 Concepts explains the fundamental concepts of Livelink WCM Server Chapter 3 Working with the Content Client describes the first steps in working with Livelink WCM Server and introduces the user inter face of the Content client Chapter 4 Configuring the Content Client explains how to tailor the process of editing objects and the layout of the Content client to your needs Chapter 5 Adding Objects offers a detailed description of the different procedures for creating new WCM objects Chapter 6 Editing Objects gives you a detailed introduction to object editing Chapter 7 Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects describes the respective staging actions Chapter 8 Content Workflow explains how to create user defined workflows in order to extend the staging of Livelink WCM Server Chapter 9 InSit
50. ASP topic can contain subor dinate objects CGI script This object type is used to integrate execut able files Compound object This object type is used for downward compatibility and represents complex docu ment structures that are to be managed as a single document CSS This object type is used to integrate Cascading Style Sheets CSS Excel document This object type is used to integrate Microsoft Excel documents e g spreadsheets 66 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Object type Description Form instance This object type is used for creating forms It is represented by an XML file Form template Frame lt This object type defines the type Form i e it is used to identify and categorize the different form instances Frames can be used to divide the browser window into separate freely definable segments Each of these segments can have content of its own The individual segments i e frames may have static or dynamic content Frame topic This object type represents a combination of a frame object and a directory As with other topic types a frame topic can contain subor dinate objects GIF image HTML page This object type is used to integrate graphics in the GIF file format This object type is used to integrate HTML pages which may include text hyperlinks and graphics HTML template An HTML template
51. Chapter 12 Setting the Filter Criterion Click the desired filter criterion in the drop down list of the object filter or the My objects view In the configuration of the Content client you can determine which filters are displayed in the drop down lists The following tables explain the standard filters Table 24 Standard filters in the object filter Filter Description changed Finds objects with the status changed checked out Finds objects with the status checked out delayed release Finds objects with the status delayed release deleted Finds objects with the status deleted expired Finds objects that have exceeded their expira tion date objects with references to deleted objects Finds objects that have invalid references because they reference deleted objects objects with workflow assignment Finds objects to which a workflow is assigned objects without workflow assignment Finds objects to which no workflow is assigned rejected Finds objects that have been rejected by Quality Assurance and sent back to the responsible editor for correction released Finds objects with the status released special access rights Finds objects that do not inherit their access settings from the parent topic i e objects that have an access control list of their own 368 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Togethe
52. Group Roles You can allow access to an object for a group a role or a combination of a specific group and a specific role Such a combination is called group role The group role is not an organizational unit that is defined in the Admin client but a configuration option in the Content client The following example illustrates the concept of group roles Example Several groups and the roles Editor and QA were defined in the Admin client The users were assigned to the groups on the basis of their departments The users in the marketing department belong to the group Marketing those in the training department belong to the group Training etc The users in each department who are responsible for adding and editing objects are assigned to the role Editor while the users responsible for quality assurance of the objects are assigned to the role QA 52 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Fig 9 Assignment of users to groups and roles By using group role settings you can set very specific access rights for objects i e both subject specific by using the group and task specific by using the role For example the access rights for the topic area Marketing could be set in such a way that only editors who are assigned to the group Marketing are given the rights Create Change object Change metadata etc Similarly the right to release objects could be assigned to the
53. Hierarchy level VIPLEVEL File extension VIPSUFFIX Heading VIPSUBTITLE Keywords VIPKEYWORDLIST Language VIPLANGUAGE Language code of the VIPDCLANGUAGE Modification date VIPDATE_MODIFIED Modified by VIPMODIFIED BY Object category VIPOBJECTCATEGORY Content Client User Manual 429 Chapter 15 Metadata item WCM tag Object size in bytes OID VIPCONTENT SIZE VIPOID Parent topic References from other objects to this object References of the object to other objects VIPTOPIC VIPLINKED_FROM Note An object containing this WCM tag is not automatically regenerated if a reference to this object is added to another object The page for the object is generated again when the object is submitted Alternately you can manually start page generation function Regenerate page in the Content client VIPLINKS_TO Release date VIPDATE_RELEASED Released by VIPRELEASED BY Status VIPSTATE Suggested file name VIPDEPLOYMENT_HINT Target group VIPTARGET_GROUP Template VIPTEMPLATE Title VIPTITLE Type VIPTYPE 430 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Metadata item WCM tag URL VIPURL Note Deployment systems can be configured to create relative references If the deployment system that generated the page has been configured accordingly this URL is als
54. Livelink WCM Server The explicit prohibition for the role takes priority over the explicit permission for the group priority rule 1 Concepts Since no explicit permission is set for either the role or the group an implicit prohibition applies priority rule 4 Current Change Change Change Move R Reed object Doista 1 Cresto Release metadata rights and copy Production v v x v x x x x v Access rights T N 4 Read Shange Delete Create Release Change Change oh pea ype ame p object eRe ase metadata rights ee Production User Admin v v v v v v v v v Group Marketing w v v v v v Role Trainee v x x x x v Fig 13 Interpreting group and role specific access rights jstein has the task to regularly update the various pages under Prod ucts At the same time jstein must also make sure that an appropriate expiration date is set for each page If necessary he must set the expira tion date in the metadata The access rights for the role Trainee are set in such a way that the right Change metadata is denied This explicit prohibition to change the meta data also takes priority over the explicit permission for the group Marketing Thus the result of this setting is that jstein the metadata of the pages cannot change There are several ways of giving the user jstein the access right required for changing metadata
55. Metadata dialog boxes of the Content client and of InSite Editing Content Client User Manual 453 Chapter 15 If the Content client is used in different languages you can localize i e translate the alternative names In this way the translated alternative names of the special attributes will be shown in a German user interface To localize an alternative name add the value of the label parameter to the file FieldNameMessage_ properties The asterisk replaces the language label of the file e g en for English and de for German For detailed information on localizing user interface texts refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual chapter Working in the Admin Client Example Your object category Press_Release contains a number of properties including main The WCM tag VIPMAIN lLabel Main text causes the special attribute main to be shown with the name Main text in the Metadata dialog box In order to provide a translated alternative name in a German user inter face add the following entry to the file FieldNameMessage_de properties Main text Haupttext The option_idand option_mode Parameters Use the option_id parameter to set predefined values for an attribute so that the users are able to select one of these values When a user clicks the corresponding attribute field in the Metadata dialog box a selection dialog box with the defined values ope
56. Nested Filters on page 392 To delete a user defined filter 1 Choose View Object filter to open the object filter 2 In the drop down list click the user defined filter that you want to delete 3 Click the Filter editor icon in the navigation area F Icon for opening the filter editor 4 Click the Delete button The filter is removed from the drop down list in the object filter The Filter Expression Language This section describes the individual elements of the filter expression language The filter expression parser processes the filter expression language to construct the filters you have defined Comparators The following table contains the operators that you can use to compare two values Content Client User Manual 385 Chapter 12 Table 26 Comparators in the filter editor Operator Expression Description Can be applied to equal to As commonly used All metadata not equal to l All metadata less than lt Character strings numbers less than lt As commonly used Character equal to strings numbers greater than gt Character strings numbers greater than gt Character equal to strings numbers corresponds Like Compares patterns Character to pattern The comparison value can Strings contain the percent char acter as a placeholder The percent character replaces any number of characters at the beginning at the end or in
57. Tools Website administration gt Object types The Object types dialog box opens Mark the desired object type in the left window pane In the right window pane three tabs with the settings for the object type are displayed All these properties were defined when the object type was added You can modify the following parameters subsequently General tab Icon and Comment Object data type and additional settings tab all entries except the object data type m Assignments tab all entries i e assignment of an attribute set and a functional area Make the desired changes Click the Save button Content Client User Manual 475 Chapter 16 Notes on changing object types If you assign a different attribute set to an object type and WCM objects with this object type already exist the attributes and values no longer assigned are removed from the metadata of the relevant WCM objects The removed attributes and the associated values remain stored in the database as long as no changes are made to the newly assigned attribute set for the relevant WCM objects Thus if you accidently assign the wrong attribute set and then correct your mistake immediately without any changes being made to the metadata for the relevant WCM objects the old values will be available again The servers of the WCM system are automatically notified about changes to the object types with the result that new icons are avail ab
58. alphabetically sorted Simple text input addresses comma separated list of the entries field Double entries are removed In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not generated to the page Object content Returns the generated content of the referenced object Only the content of the body element is returned WCM tags are replaced Simple input element with additional icons e g for opening by the metadata of the referenced the topic object structure Object source Returns the generated content of Simple input the referenced object Only the element with content of the body element is returned WCM tags are replaced additional icons e g for opening by the metadata of the current the topic object structure Object URL Returns depending on the settings Simple input of the deployment system the element with URL of the referenced object as a additional icons relative absolute or server relative e g for opening reference the topic structure OID Returns the OID as a string Simple input element with additional icons e g for opening the topic structure String Returns the entry itself Simple text input field 438 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Data type Format used Input element Text Returns the entry itself Multiline text input field Time Returns depending on the Simple text input language setting
59. an object and at the same time belong to a group or role also having access to the object The actual access rights of the user result from the combination of the group specific or role specific access rights with the user specific access rights Since the access rights for an object may be defined differently for groups roles and individual users it is possible that this combination may result in conflicting access rights Such conflicts are resolved by means of the following priority rules Content Client User Manual 57 Chapter 2 1 Explicit prohibition takes priority over explicit permission 2 An individual explicit permission overrides a general or group role specific prohibition 3 An individual explicit prohibition overrides an explicit group role specific permission 4 If an access right is neither explicitly permitted nor forbidden an implicit prohibition applies i e access is not possible The following simple example illustrates these priority rules Example The user stein is a trainee in the Marketing department He is given the task of editing various Internet pages including the list of new products and the overview of all products In the Admin client jstein is assigned to the group Marketing and the role Trainee This gives him access rights to the objects below the topic Products Because of his group and role membership the access rights are set as follows 58
60. and select the desired object type l Durchsuchen ASP page ASP template Ba ASP topic Bal Compound object Form template B Frame Ea Frame topic HTML page amp HTML template E7 Heropage x Herotemplate Fig 55 Specifying title file and object type when importing linked objects m Title Enter a name for the object The title is used to identify the object and is displayed both in the header and in the navigation area Entering a title is mandatory 156 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Note Titles must not be more than 255 characters long Also you should adapt the length of the title in such a way that the resulting file name meets the requirements of your operating system Under Windows the absolute path to a topic and a generated page may not be longer than 240 and 260 characters respectively File Click the Browse button to select the start file Note Please choose only files that have a file extension m Object type Select the object type from the list e g HTML page HTML template Topic Only those object types that match the extension of the specified file and for which an import is possible are displayed Specifying an object type is mandatory For some object types it is possible to change the type subsequently Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button
61. box in which you can replace the logo opens 2 Enter the OID of the new logo If you do not know the OID click the icon A dialog box with a list of all available logos opens Content Client User Manual 335 Chapter 10 Kryptonite Power Partner Kryptonite Power GmbH F Livelink WCM Server Content Chiem Je fd Thumbnail BRYPTONITE Type OID Title htera 24 KryptonitePow armstrong F 22 baumwall 8 dr evil 5 OK Cancel Help Fig 100 Changing the partner logo via InSite Editing 3 Select the desired logo and click the OK button The dialog box closes and the name of the selected logo is written to the field ogo 4 Click the Save button The changes immediately become available in the Edit view of the website 336 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Content Client User Manual 337 338 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 11 Livelink Contents in the Content Client Due to the integration of the WCM system with Livelink you can add Livelink objects as WCM objects to a WCM managed website These WCM objects are called re ators They always refer to a certain version of the Livelink object The WCM object type Livelink relator enables you to integrate a single Livelink object in a website the WCM object type Livelink folder relator is provided for integrating Livelink folders You can directly access relators in the
62. browser The Log in dialog box opens oix User ID jistein Password freer Fig 15 Logging in to the Content client Enter your user ID and the corresponding password Note User ID and password are case sensitive For the WCM system user and User are two different users Click the Log in button When you log in to the WCM system for the first time you are asked to change your password Content Client User Manual 75 Chapter 3 Selecting a Website After you have successfully logged in to the WCM system the Select website dialog box is displayed This dialog box gives you an overview of all websites you can access F Select website Microsoft Internet Exp Website Ge CompanyIntranet WCM InternetSite WCM Cancel Help Fig 16 Selecting a website To determine the website that you want to work with 1 In the selection list mark the desired website 2 Confirm by clicking the OK button The name of the selected website is displayed in the header After login the view you selected last is displayed by default When you log in for the first time the Edit view is displayed You can select any other available view at any time via Tools gt View The Edit view is available as soon as a website has been created in the Admin client and read rights have been set 76 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client m The QA vie
63. changed too q more than 94 milioi got the problem sol Portals Real Heroes Fig 91 Replacing a teaser in the template Herotemplate 6 Select the desired object 7 Click the OK button 8 To submit the changed template Herotemplate to Quality Assur ance choose Submit on the context menu After the template has been released by Quality Assurance the new teaser is available in the Production view on all pages of the website Configuring InSite Editing By means of an XML file you can configure InSite Editing and thus customize it to suit your company s requirements The following table provides a short overview of the different configuration items A sample configuration is located in the directory WCM installation directory examples insite editing Content Client User Manual 309 Chapter 9 Table 19 Configuration items of InSite Editing lt header display true type default oid gt This item configures the header of InSite Editing display attribute true shows the header false hides the header type attribute default The header has the Livelink layout content The header shows the generated content of a refer enced object WCM tags are replaced by the metadata of the referenced object include same as content with the difference that WCM tags are replaced by the metadata of the current object oidattribute OID of the object referenced for content
64. consequat Phasellus pede tellus tincidunt ut sollicitudin eu mattis id pede Donec sit amet erat Phasellus a enim non purus scelerisque lacinia Integer turpis Maecenas vitae libero Aliquam sapien velit egestas condimentum interdum et elementum quis arcu Etiam lacus Cras porttitor rutrum tellus Duis bibendum tempor elit Curabitur ut tellus Sed gravida orci eu nibh In hac habitasse platea dictumst Phasellus ut purus E partnername kryptonite Power GmbH partnerurl http www KryptonitePower xy slogan Get energized with Kryptonite Power Save Reset Help Fig 96 Entering partner information for the assembled object during creation On the HTML page of the partner object the information entered is now displayed as defined in the template In the object preview the profile of the partner Kryptonite Power GmbH looks as follows 330 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Kryptonite Power Partner Kryptonite Power GmbH RBRYPTONITE Get energized with Kryptonite Power POWER Kryptonite Power is a European agency specialized in Contact Interactive Communication and Result Hunting Strategy We supply all the skills and services Mondweg 132 22299 Hamburg necessary technological strategic and creative to Tel 49 04 1234 400 Fax fully enable our clients on the Internet 49 04 1234 402 Aenean varius pede vel enim In consequat Phasellus pede tellus tincidunt ut sollici
65. contains embedded objects e g images If there are embedded objects an according dialog box is displayed 174 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects y Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet E pl D Select the embedded objects that you want to import Use the context menu to select a storage location for these objects By default the embedded objects are added to the same topic as the HTML page InternetSite_138_admin 03 1_filesfimag lt Cancel Help Fig 61 Selecting embedded objects when checking in an object In this dialog box you determine which embedded objects are to be imported into the WCM system together with the checked in file You can deselect individual or all objects These objects will not be imported If an object with the same name and object type already exists in your website the OID column shows the OID of this object Deselect existing objects to prevent adding multiple objects containing the same file e g the same image By default the embedded objects are added to the topic containing the referencing object To specify a different storage location for indi vidual objects choose Select topic on the context menu and mark the desired topic in the selection dialog box The Topic column will show the OID of the storage location 4 Select the desired objects and click the OK button 5 Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button Content Client Use
66. edit on filter topic 52 default on In the Content WYSIWYG view of the Content client the template Herotemplate looks like this Content WYSIWYG VIPTOP edit on filter topic 52 default on VIPMIDDLE edit on filter topic 52 default on VIPBOTTOM edit on filter topic 52 default on VIPSUBTITLE edit on VIPCONTENT VIPTITLE Zoom in Original size Zoom out Help Heroes The Flyer Come watch and see our brand new hero flyers more Heroes The Song Written by Stefan Kowalewski dedicated to all company heroes download Heroes Man in the moon Fig 89 The template Herotemplate in the Content WYSIWYG view Content Client User Manual 305 Chapter 9 Task Edit Teasers It is your task to check the teasers You want to get a realistic impression of the objects and browse through the Edit view of the HeroLeasing website You want to correct the errors you find directly in the website without starting the Content client You should make your changes in the template Herotemplate to ensure that the same teasers are displayed on all pages of the website Procedure 1 Start InSite Editing 2 Choose Select object on the context menu or click the corresponding icon Select object A window with the topic structure opens 3 Select the template Herotemplate In the left window pane th
67. filters enable you to search for objects on the basis of their object status Additionally there are a number of other search options such as references between objects Opening the Object Filter or My objects View In the Navigation area mark the topic in which you want to search Choose View Object filter to open the object filter 366 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Search beginning with topic InternetSite Cr checked out delayed release deleted expired objects with references to deleted objects objects with workflow assignment objects without workflow assignment rejected released special access rights submitted Fig 110 Standard filters of the object filter Choose View My objects to open the My objects view Search beginning with topic InternetSite Show me all objects that Ja I can edit content I can edit metadata I can release directly I can release I have changed I have checked out Thave created have been rejected edit content have been rejected edit metadata have been submitted to me have expired and that I can edit that I can destroy Fig 111 Standard filters of the My objects view The drop down list contains the predefined standard filters The path to the topic that you marked in the navigation is displayed above the lists Content Client User Manual 367
68. for editing 36 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Tasks of an Editor The editors are responsible for creating and maintaining the website content They have to publish information on an up to the minute basis The right to add and edit objects is reserved to certain groups roles or individual users the so called principals Only principals that are assigned to certain functional areas and have the access right Create Change object are allowed to add and edit objects Assigning access rights enables you to define clear responsibilities which reflect the organi zational structure of your company For further information on defining groups and roles and on assigning access rights refer to section Access Rights starting on page 50 Tasks of a QA Staff Member Correct and thorough quality assurance for all objects in a website is an important precondition for successful use of the website Thus the staging concept of Livelink WCM Server takes account of quality assurance as a part of content management This guarantees a better quality of the website content In addition to the designers and editors who are responsible for layout and content of the website there is staff whose task is the quality assur ance of the website Whether employees are allowed to perform quality assurance tasks depends on their rights For example to release objects and thus publish them in the Production view the access right
69. for workflow assignment 392 filter functions introduction 96 use 365 filter variable 382 Fixed version folder relator 349 relator 345 floating point number data type 436 folder relator 339 add 346 form instance object type 67 form template object type 67 formatted text data type 436 fragment 299 edit via InSite Editing 298 frame object data type 471 object type 67 frame topic object data type 471 object type 67 functional area 61 access rights dialog 63 Advanced 62 assign to object type 475 Basic 62 Direct release 63 Dynamic 62 Filter edit 64 Filter standard 63 Form 62 import 64 Intelligent templates 63 Livelink 63 log dialog 63 References dialog 63 519 Index Search 64 Template structure 64 View My objects 64 View Object list 64 View Subordinate objects 64 Workflow 62 functions attribute sets 478 InSite Editing 296 object types 467 workflow modeler 265 G generate_static special attribute 415 GIF image object type 67 group 51 add to access control list 216 set access rights 220 withdraw access rights 222 group role 52 H header 81 heading metadata item 44 WCM tag 429 help 105 hierarchy level WCM tag 429 HTML page object type 67 HTML template object data type 471 object type 67 hyperlink add in Content client 204 add in editor 209 add in integrated HTML editor 206 delete 214 in general 46 maintain 201 520 l import from ZIP file 158 select file 159 specify title and ob
70. frame object the frameset etc The following table shows the various kinds of content components Content Client User Manual 39 Chapter 2 Table 2 Object types with possible content components Object type Content component ASP page ASP topic HTML page JSP page JSP topic PHP page PHP topic Topic The body element of the HTML file If no template is assigned to the object the content component corre sponds to the complete source file ASP template HTML template JSP template PHP template The head and body elements of the HTML file Frame Frame topic The head and frameset elements of the source file GIF image JPEG image PNG image The complete graphics file CGI script Compound object Excel document Form instance Form template JavaScript Other PDF document PowerPoint file Word document The complete source file XML document XML template XSLT document XSLT template The content of an XML or XSLT docu ment begins with the tag that does not correspond to the form lt or lt Workflow The workflow definition If you have assigned a template to the object the WCM system automati cally merges the template and the object content When the object is displayed you see the resulting HTML page However when checking out an object in the Content client you edit only the content 40 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Note S
71. function This auto matically generates an up to date compound object and new dependent objects Either one of these working methods prevents changes from being over written Representation of compound objects in the navigation area In the navigation area a compound object is identified by the following icon fy Icon for the object type Compound object Like a topic object a compound object generates a node in the navigation tree Content Client User Manual 243 Chapter 6 Topic structure Ea Internetsite 5 BR de a Bay en H BR Careers So BR Company Info 5 BR Products 2 Gal a BACK HOME1 NEXT Products Products_1 D Products 2 Products_3 Products_ Products_5 Products_6 Products_ i PRODUCTS1 ce By Services w Bg General Templates Ba Home Ba News ce Bay Site Map ce Ea Support ce By Workflows a BR Fr Fig 76 The compound object in the navigation area e Je Je Je Je Je 1e Je Jer 000000 00202020202020200202020 The object type icon represents the source file the compound object is based on e g a Word or PowerPoint file Below the compound object you can see the dependent objects These have been imported into the WCM system as HTML or graphic objects and have the properties of these object types The start page is also included in this subtree as an HTML object You can select each of the dependent objects in the navigation area and display it in the Content c
72. in the Metadata dialog box The timeout value that applies to a page is determined as follows 1 The value of the special attribute Timeout is determined for the object to be statified 2 The value of the special attribute Timeout is determined for the template assigned to the object to be statified if necessary the template cascade is searched 3 The timeout value is read from the configuration of the deploy ment system Thus the timeout value specified in the Admin client is only used if neither the object to be statified nor one of its templates has a valid value for the special attribute Timeout Content Client User Manual 415 Chapter 14 Note Statification is performed by the Content server running in the context of a JSP engine or as web application in an application server If this Content server is overloaded the valid timeout value may be exceeded This results in the abortion of the statification attempt and in error messages Therefore select generous timeout values Absolute URL The special attribute Absolute URL plays among other things a special role when statifying form instances see section Statification of Form Instances on page 418 Object Dependent Statification An object whose type is associated with the attribute set dynamic possesses the special attribute Statify page In the Metadata dialog box you can use this attribut
73. in the XML document The transformation rules contained in the XSLT document are to be applied to the XML document In the XML document add the following reference to your XSLT document lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href transformation xsl gt In the Production view the HTML page generated from the XML docu ment might look as follows software package order no 123456789 price 1250 euro The all in one package for devel Out now Fig 137 Result of the transformation on the client side As transformation is performed on the client side the source code has the format XML Transformation of XML Data on the Server Side This example explains how to display product information stored in an XML file in a clearly structured way on an HTML page by means of an XSL file In this example the transformation of the XML data into HTML is performed on the server side 502 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML The two files product xml and transformation xsl from the first appli cation example are the starting point again For a transformation on the server side the head element and both the body tags and HTML tags must be removed from the XSLT template Modify the file transformation xslI accordingly Code of the file transformation xsl for transformation on the server side lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl stylesheet version 1 0 xmins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform
74. interface of the Content client This setting takes priority over the language setting made for your user ID in the Admin client Working directory Local directory The Download applet saves the files of the checked out and edited objects in this directory Use Download applet Use Download applet to check objects out and in See section The Download Applet starting on page 113 Use integrated HTML Use integrated HTML editor to edit HTML objects editor See section The Integrated HTML Editor starting on page 114 The function Regenerate page uses the released template even in the Edit view Note This setting only applies to static deploy ment system For information on the configuration options for dynamic deployment systems refer to section Configuring the Dynamic Deployment on page 125 Content Client User Manual 111 Chapter 4 112 Basic settings Effect if selected Suppress E mail dialogs Never display an E mail dialog box after performing a staging step The person respon sible for the next work step does not geta message You can also make this setting directly in the E mail dialog box See section Sending E Mails starting on page 92 Suppress remark dialogs Never display a Remark dialog box after adding objects or editing an object content You can also make this setting directly in the Remark dialog box Synchronize object preview The object prev
75. m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Move and copy and Change metadata for the object m You have the access rights Read and Create for the topic in which you want to insert the copied object m You are assigned the functional area which is linked with the object type of the object To check your functional areas choose Tools gt Login info Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to copy source object 3 Choose Edit Copy The object is copied to the clipboard 4 In the navigation area mark the topic in which you want to insert the copy target topic 5 Choose Edit Paste If the Content client is configured accordingly a Remark dialog box opens 6 Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button The copy is added to the target topic Not only the content but also the metadata and references of the source object are copied Only the following metadata items are reset Content Client User Manual 163 Chapter 5 m Version The main version number of the copy is 0 because the object has been newly created Author When you copy an object you are the author of the copy m Status The status of the copy is changed as for all new objects Copying a topic Note that whe
76. name gt lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt Content Client User Manual 495 Appendix A lt table width 40 gt lt tr gt lt th align left colspan 2 gt lt xsl value of select name gt lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt order no lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select order_no gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt price lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select price gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 gt lt em gt lt xsl value of select description gt lt em gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt You reference the XSLT document as a style sheet directly in an XML document or XML template for example in the form lt xml stylesheet type text xsl href transformation xsl gt The transformation rules contained in the XSLT document are applied to the XML document or to all XML documents to which the XML template is assigned The transformation of the XML data by the style sheet is performed on the client side i e in the browser Note XSLT is not supported by all browsers Thus the possible appli cations of XSLT documents are limited 496 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML The Object Type XSLT template An object of type XSLT template is used as a template and has all the properties of an XSLT document XSLT tem
77. not being displayed correctly In this case you should deactivate InSite Editing for the respective page For this purpose specify the tag VIPINSITEEDITINGOFF in one of the templates of the WCM object 314 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Content Client User Manual 315 316 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 10 Working with Assembled Objects Quite often the layout and content of web pages are not freely design able but are subject to a clearly defined structure that must absolutely be adhered to An example are press releases which do not only always have the same layout but also consist of identical parts such as title introduc tion main text date and image You can define accurate specifications for such objects in the WCM system This enables authors to easily compose web pages Defining object structures as well as adding and editing objects based on these object structures is called Content Assembly The object type Assembled object was introduced to represent object structures that may consist of the content of several objects and additional properties An object of type Assembled object does not have any content and thus cannot be checked out All data belonging to the object is saved in the metadata and is displayed in the generated page by means of WCM tags integrated in the template For this reason an object of type Assembled object must always be assigned a template The functions of Conte
78. object Via the workflow modeler as a separate application Delete the respective XPDL file in the file system Please note that in this case the workflow definition is not deleted in the WCM system In order to delete a workflow definition from the WCM system proceed as described above WCM Objects in the Workflow In the Content client you can assign to WCM objects the workflow defini tions that you have created by means of the workflow modeler When editing the object the user will select one of the predefined workflow steps The normal staging actions are no longer available for this object In this section you get information on the following aspects m assigning a workflow to a WCM object see the following section m removing the assignment of a workflow toa WCM object see section Removing a Workflow Assignment on page 284 editing WCM objects to which a workflow is assigned see section WCM Objects in the Workflow on page 285 forwarding an object through an entire workflow on the basis of an application example see section Application Example on page 287 Content Client User Manual 281 Chapter 8 Assigning a Workflow You can assign a workflow to a WCM object directly when adding the WCM object or at any time later In the following both options will be described Assigning a Workflow when Adding the Object Prerequisites m You have the access right Read for the workflow object
79. object dependent If in the Admin client statification was set to always for a deployment system it is not possible to add edit or statify form instances by means of a JSP page in this deployment system In a deployment system with such a configuration you cannot work with forms in a useful way Although the special attribute Statify page is also analyzed for the statifi cation of form instances a different algorithm is used than with JSP objects form instances are statified by means of a JSP page that must be specified The special attribute Statify page contains the OID of the JSP page that takes over the actual statification If this special attribute does not have a value in a form instance the system checks the instance s form template to see if such a value exists If this is the case the value is used for statification The OID of the form instance is sent to the determined JSP page for statification Afterwards the result usually an HTML page 418 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes is generated by the deployment system References from other objects to the form instance are automatically mapped to this HTML page If the Analyze statified pages check box is selected for the deployment system all form instances to which this JSP page is assigned are regener ated and statified each time the JSP page changes The JSP page determines the layout and presentation of the data from the form
80. of the WCM object field the time in the following form 15 59 23 German 3 59 23 PM English Time stamp Returns depending on the Separate dialog language setting of the WCM object box calendar the date and time in the following The time must be form entered manu 04 09 2003 15 59 23 German ally in the text input field Sep 4 2003 3 59 23 PM English Note When integrating WCM objects by means of special attributes of type Object content or Object source it may happen that a user sees the content of an object without having read rights for the object Example The content of object A is integrated in object B by means of a WCM tag The user only has read rights for object B However via the respective page the user can also see the content of object A Content Client User Manual 439 Chapter 15 Example The following HTML code provides an example of the use of WCM tags lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt VIPTITLE lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table height 100 width 100 gt lt tr gt lt td height 80 gt lt h2 gt VIPSUBTITLE lt h2 gt VIPCONTENT lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td height 20 align right gt Valid until VIPDATE_EXPIRE lt br gt Contact lt a href mailto VIPEMAIL_EDIT gt VIPEMAIL_EDIT lt a gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt For detailed application examples refer to chapt
81. option View the References dialog box View the Access rights dialog box View the Log dialog box View the Livelink metadata dialog box Use the standard filters Content Client User Manual 63 Chapter 2 Filter edit FILTER_EDIT View Subordinate objects OBJECTLIST View Object list LISTVIEW View My objects FILTER_TODO View Template structure TEMPLATE_STRUCTURE Import IMPORT Search COMI_ SEARCH none Create and edit filters in the filter editor Note Additionally the functional area Filter standard is required View the subordinate objects of a WCM object Object list view My objects and My work list views Template structure view Use import functions Use search functions 64 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Object Types This section introduces the object types used in Livelink WCM Server Each WCM object is assigned to a specific object type The object type is defined when the object is added There are only a few cases in which it may subsequently be changed You can manage object types via the Tools menu of the Content client or in the Admin client An object s type depends on its content and on its use For example there is no difference between the content of an object of type Topic and an object of type HTML page The topic howe
82. predefined and ready to use stan dard filters that take account of your access rights The hitlist is personalized i e only those objects that you have edited or that you may edit are available to you see the following section The My work list view offers you filters for searching WCM objects that are in a certain workflow activity or to which a certain workflow is assigned The results are personalized Only those objects that you may edit are displayed The available filters depend on the workflow definitions in your WCM system see section The My worklist view on page 98 Content Client User Manual 365 Chapter 12 m The filter editor enables you to create any number of filters according to custom criteria This is especially useful in the case of recurring and complicated queries see section The Filter Editor starting on page 376 The Standard Filters Note To be able to use the standard filters you require the functional areas Filter standard and View My objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info In this section you get information on the following aspects of the stan dard filters m using the standard filters see the following section description of the filter procedure on the basis of two application examples see section Examples of Using the Standard Filters starting on page 373 Using the Standard Filters The standard
83. systems do not generate the pages statically when the WCM object changes but dynamically when the page is requested by the HTTP server If a changed object is accessed e g because a user wants to edit it with the Content client the page is processed by the deployment system Thus the current version of the object is always displayed Dynamic page generation is especially advantageous if many changes are made to the WCM objects e g for the Edit view Dynamic deployment systems can generate pages for different versions of the WCM objects m for the different views i e Edit QA and Production for different template versions released template or current template in the Edit view m for the object version at a certain point in time m for the object state with the changes of certain users This option can for example be used by template developers to view how the generated pages will look with templates that they are currently editing Only the changes of the current user are taken into account Additionally all changes that other users made before the object was edited by the selected user are displayed In this way you get a personalized view of the website 90 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client In the Configuration dialog box you can determine which rendition of the WCM objects you want to display Example Releasing a master template The website has the following template cascade the template D
84. tab in the Metadata dialog box The template Partnertemplate in the object preview Entering partner information for the assembled object during creation Partner profile in the object preview Partner object in InSite Editing Editing a partner object via InSite Editing Changing the partner logo via InSite Editing Specifying the Livelink system Selecting the Livelink object when adding a relator Specifying the version of the Livelink object Entering comments about the relator Selecting the Livelink folder Specifying the version of the Livelink folder relator Specifying title file and object type The Livelink metadata dialog box The category training materials in the Livelink system Standard filters of the object filter Content Client User Manual 307 309 313 322 323 329 330 331 334 335 336 342 343 344 346 347 348 351 356 360 367 11 Fig 111 Standard filters of the My objects view 367 Fig 112 Filter hitlist 371 Fig 113 The filter editor 376 Fig 114 Specifying the Filter Criterion 378 Fig 115 Determining a comparator 379 Fig 116 Specifying a comparison value 380 Fig 117 Generated filter expression 381 Fig 118 Adopting the filter expression 381 Fig 119 Saving a user defined filter 382 Fig 120 Entering the value for the filter variable 383 Fig 121 Searching with a new search expression 383 Fig 122 Defining a logical operator
85. tabs General Properties Attributes E mail Info WCM tags OID 5 Title fnvoce SoS Heading LO Template without template eal iQ R Type Hmp oo O Object category woes oO O OA Language Eases oooO OSO Expiration date Delayed release Suggested file name Keywords Description osz05 2014 03 58 29 PM z finvoice htm Jaccounting invoice Target group internal JI Direct release Save Reset Help Fig 67 The Metadata dialog box 194 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects General tab All entries on this tab are standard metadata that are defined by the WCM system and are available for each WCM object Properties tab only displayed if an object category is assigned to the object Properties are metadata that do not belong to the standard metadata The properties of the object result from its assignment to an object category Attributes tab only displayed if the object type is linked with an attribute set Attributes are metadata that do not belong to the standard metadata The attributes of the object result from its association with an object type m E mail tab On this tab the e mail addresses specified for the object are displayed You can send messages to these e mail addresses when the object acquires a certain status m Info tab This tab is only used for information purposes The stan dard metadata displayed here are controlled by the WCM system WCM tags tab
86. the status rejected 4 The editor kblume revises the text for the data sheet and selects the transition Add graphic In the E mail dialog box he briefly describes what the graphic should look like and where it is to be inserted in the text The object ProductFeatures is forwarded to the activity Create graphic to which the role Designer is assigned and gets the status changed 5 The graphics specialist nshepard creates the desired graphic and adds it to the data sheet There is only one transition leading away from the activity Create graphic This transition is performed auto matically when hshepard forwards the WCM object in the workflow This takes the WCM object to the activity Check data sheet the first stage of quality assurance The object has the status submitted 6 The QA member dcarson checks both text and graphic and approves of them He forwards the WCM object to the second stage of quality assurance by selecting the transition Check again The object ProductFeatures remains in the status submitted and is now in the activity Check finally 7 The QA member mrossi checks the data sheet again He does not approve of the graphic Thus he selects the transition Reject Content Client User Manual 289 Chapter 8 graphic and enters the reason for the rejection in the E mail dialog box The object get
87. the views the objects of your website are organized according to different criteria They are displayed in an object tree or an object list Via the View menu you can toggle between different views Note The available views depend on your functional areas The Topic structure view Choose View Topic structure to open the topic structure The topic structure is displayed as an object tree The topmost node of the object tree is the name of the website Starting from this node the object tree branches to topics and subtopics like the directories and subdirectories in a file system 82 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Topic structure E gt Ba Careers B BS Company Info re ey Products 4 ER Services BR General Templates ey Home Ba News Ba Site Map Ea Support Ba Workflows E ey fr Fig 21 The Topic structure view If a topic contains subordinate objects the topic node is displayed as or Click or to open or close the relevant topic branch and view the subordinate objects In the Configuration dialog box you can determine how the nodes look and specify the maximum number of objects to be displayed below a topic The Template structure view Choose View Template structure to open the template structure The template structure is displayed as an object tree This view displays the various templates used in the website in alphabetical order
88. the corre sponding icon a Icon for adding an object category The New object category dialog box opens 3 Enter a name for the new object category The name of the object category must be unique within the website and must not be more than 17 characters long The following characters are permitted m a zand A Z no umlauts and special characters 0 9 the first character must always be a letter _ underline Note The following names are reserved and may not be used admin acl ats att cda con dyn lat lin obj oty par pri pro pty rli sta tta tto 486 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client You cannot change the name subsequently 4 Add the object category by clicking the OK button 5 Define the properties for the new object category see the following section Editing an Object Category Note When object categories are changed the pages of the WCM objects to which the category is assigned are not automatically regenerated In this case it may happen that the values of deleted prop erties are still displayed on the generated pages The following functions are available for editing object categories creating properties see the following section m deleting properties see section Deleting Properties on page 489 Creating Properties Notes You cannot change existing properties subsequently You cannot reuse the properties of existing object categories
89. the following steps 1 Configure the JSP engine properly responsible WCM system administrator For detailed information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Installation Manual 2 Set up an InSite Editing deployment system for the website respon sible WCM system administrator For detailed information refer to the online help of the Admin client 3 Optional configure InSite Editing responsible web designer For detailed information refer to section Configuring InSite Editing on page 309 Content Client User Manual 293 Chapter 9 This chapter describes how to work with InSite Editing This includes m introduction to working with InSite Editing see the following section m example for editing a website via InSite Editing see section Applica tion Example The HeroLeasing Website on page 304 configuring InSite Editing see section Configuring InSite Editing on page 309 Working with InSite Editing This section contains an introduction to working with InSite Editing It is described how to start InSite Editing see the following section call functions for WCM objects in InSite Editing see section Calling Functions in InSite Editing on page 296 edit the content of objects via InSite Editing see section Editing Object Content via InSite Editing on page 297 m edit object fragments via InSite Editing see section Editing Object Fragments via InSite Editing on pa
90. the object list only shows those objects that you changed last Content Client User Manual 97 Chapter 3 3 Search beginning with topic InternetSite en Show me all objects that f have checked out la Objects found 2 Type _ OID Title a Path status 9 Careers fen ve 24 Events fen News we Fig 28 The My objects view The objects are displayed in an object list For each object the object type OID title path to the root object and status are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the criterion in the column Another click reverses the sort order You can mark one or more objects in the list in order to edit them see chapter 12 Finding Objects and Editing Them Together The My worklist view Choose View My worklist to open the My worklist view This view is personalized as it considers your assignments to workflow activities Only those objects that are assigned a workflow and that you may edit are displayed All the workflows and activities for which exist objects that you may currently edit are available as filters The versions of the workflow objects are also considered For detailed information on the workflow of Livelink WCM Server refer to chapter 8 Content Workflow 98 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client My work list objects with workflowsactivity
91. to the standard filters which cannot be changed it is possible to edit user defined filters To edit a user defined filter 1 Choose View Object filter to open the object filter 2 In the drop down list click the user defined filter that you want to edit Content Client User Manual 383 Chapter 12 3 Click the Filter editor icon in the navigation area 2 Icon for opening the filter editor 4 Make the desired changes To change the filter expression make your changes directly in the filter definition Example to change the comparison value Products to Support click the filter definition and replace Products with Support To add expressions to the filter click the button The wizard for creating a user defined filter starts with the following dialog box Cancel Fig 122 Defining a logical operator Mark the desired combination operator The individual operators are described in section Combination Oper ators on page 390 5 The following procedure corresponds to defining a new filter 384 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Deleting a Custom Filter In contrast to the standard filters which can only be hidden from the drop down list via the Configuration dialog box it is possible to delete user defined filters Note Before deleting a filter make sure that you do not use the filter within another filter see section
92. users The action is not written to the log Displaying Information on the Workflow Choose View gt Workflow to display the following information on the workflow that is assigned to the current object name and description of the workflow as well as name and OID of the object containing the workflow definition m name assigned principal and description of the current activity list of all transitions of the current activity Additionally a graphical representation of the workflow definition is displayed in the lower window pane The current activity is highlighted by a green frame Sending E Mails After you have edited an object you can inform the person responsible for the next work step by e mail The e mail addresses of the responsible persons are stored in the metadata of the object Note If a workflow is assigned to the object the system automatically sends an e mail to the address of the user who is assigned to the next workflow step In the case of a staging transition no separate e mail is sent to the address specified in the metadata 92 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Sending an e mail is possible after the following actions Table 8 Staging steps and e mail notification Staging step Notified user Submit E mail address from the metadata item E mail QA Release E mail address from the metadata item E mail Release Reject E mail address
93. you must create new ones If you want to use the same property e g Price for two different object categories you must create this property twice with different names but identical settings To create a property for an object category 1 Choose Tools Website administration Object categories The Object categories dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired object category in the left window pane Content Client User Manual 487 Chapter 16 3 Choose New property on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon ri Icon for creating a property The New property dialog box opens T New property Microsoft Internet Explorer Oj x Name Type String lt Maximum length Precision Scale Ok Cancel Help Fig 136 Dialog box when creating a property 4 Make the following settings m Name The name must be unique within the entire website Moreover the name of the property must not be identical to the name of an attribute from an attribute set in this website The name must not be more than 20 characters long Otherwise the same conditions as for names of categories apply Note If you want the name of the property to be displayed in the language of the user you can translate it For more infor mation refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual 488 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client m Type Click a type in the d
94. 1 Livelink relator 471 surrogate 471 Topic 471 web document 471 workflow 472 XML document 472 XML template 472 XSLT template 472 object filter introduction 96 use 366 object fragment 299 edit via InSite Editing 298 simple 299 with object reference 299 object list 84 object preview dynamic deployment 90 in general 89 object reference 299 object rights in general 50 object size in bytes metadata item 44 WCM tag 430 object source data type 438 object status 32 changed 35 checked out 35 delayed release 35 deleted 36 rejected 36 released 36 submitted 36 object type add 467 ASP page 66 ASP template 66 523 Index ASP topic 66 Assembled object 66 CGI script 66 change 199 Compound object 66 CSS 66 delete 477 edit 475 Excel document 66 Form instance 67 Form template 67 Frame 67 Frame topic 67 functions 467 GIF image 67 HTML page 67 HTML template 67 in general 65 JavaScript 67 JPEG image 67 JSP page 68 JSP template 68 JSP topic 68 Livelink folder relator 68 Livelink relator 68 manage 466 Other 68 PDF document 68 PHP page 68 PHP template 68 PHP topic 69 PNG image 69 PowerPoint file 69 Script 69 Topic 69 Word document 69 Workflow 69 XML document 69 XML schema 70 XML template 70 XSLT document 70 XSLT template 70 524 object URL data type 438 OID data type 438 metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 old version restore 186 online help 105 operators for searching principals 391 Othe
95. 202 WCM tag 430 References dialog box External references 203 Invalid references 203 referenced objects 202 referencing objects 202 referencing objects References dialog box 202 WCM tag 430 reject delete 231 object 255 rejected object status 36 relative references 48 relator 339 add 341 add with Livelink document 350 delete 362 edit content 354 edit metadata 355 integrate metadata 358 update manually 361 release cascading template 405 delayed 198 directly 253 525 Index object 251 release date metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 released object status 36 released by metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 remove attribute from attribute set 483 page 232 reference 214 workflow 284 workflow assignment 284 replace object 190 reset access rights 226 rights add principal 216 edit 215 in general 50 set rights for an object 220 role 51 add to access control list 216 set access rights 220 withdraw access rights 222 S score 101 Script object type 69 search 100 objects 365 search functions 96 security warning Download applet 169 integrated HTML editor 114 workflow modeler 264 select view 77 526 website 76 send e mail 92 server 27 set data type 437 set of e mail addresses data type 438 several objects edit 365 edit metadata 196 source object copy 236 delete 241 edit 240 metadata 236 move 236 reconvert 235 staging actions 235 submit 241 special attribute Absolute URL 416 Statify page 415 Timeout 41
96. 209 reference in integrated HTML editor 206 relator 341 relator with Livelink document 350 template 399 new object define object responsibilities 140 enter remark 146 select file 135 select workflow 135 select workflow transition 145 specify basic properties 137 specify title and object type 135 specify values for attributes 142 specify values for properties 144 start wizard 135 notification send 92 O object activate thumbnails 422 add 134 assign workflow 282 call functions in InSite Editing 296 change type 199 check in 174 check out 168 convert 239 copy 162 cut 187 delete not yet released 229 delete released 227 dependent 248 Livelink WCM Server destroy 230 edit again 184 edit content 178 edit in workflow 285 edit metadata 193 embedded 146 find 365 insert WCM tag 179 integrate metadata 200 log 103 move 187 reject 255 release 251 release directly 253 replace 190 restore older version 186 set delayed release option 198 submit 248 undo changes 186 undo check out 173 undo submit 250 update 189 object category add 486 add object 139 delete 490 delete properties 489 edit 487 in general 410 manage 485 metadata item 44 new property 487 WCM tag 429 object content 89 data type 438 edit via InSite Editing 297 integrate via WCM tags 428 replace 190 object data type 470 Assembled object 471 Compound object 471 Frame 471 Content Client User Manual Index Frame topic 471 HTML template 47
97. 254 Livelink WCM Server Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects Rejecting an Object Objective During the quality assurance process you found errors in an object and you want to send the object back to the responsible editor for correction Prerequisites m The object has the status submitted m You have the access rights Read and Release for the object Procedure 1 Inthe navigation area mark the object that you want to send back to the responsible editor 2 Choose Object Reject or click the appropriate icon 2 Icon for rejecting an object If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can reject the object and send a message to the e mail addresses saved in the metadata item E mail Edit 3 Click the OK button The object has the status rejected and can be checked out and edited Content Client User Manual 255 256 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 8 Content Workflow Content Workflow enables you to extend the predefined staging steps by custom workflow steps e g in order to realize editing by several editors or a multi stage quality assurance For this purpose the object type Work flow is used An object of type Workflow workflow object for short represents a so called workflow definition which contains the individual workflow steps Workflow definitions are created and edited with the Content Workflow Mo
98. 384 Fig 123 Example of a cascading template 402 Fig 124 Merging the body element in a cascading template 404 Fig 125 Deleting a template from a cascade 407 Fig 126 The object category Invoice in the Metadata dialog box 411 Fig 127 Filtering for the payment deadline Nov 30 2004 413 Fig 128 Selecting an image for a thumbnail 424 Fig 129 Selection dialog box for the VIPKEYWORDLIST attribute 457 Fig 130 Overview of available object types 466 Fig 131 Specifying general information for the object type 468 Fig 132 Specifying object data type and additional settings for the object type 470 Fig 133 Making assignments for the object type 474 Fig 134 Default attribute sets 478 Fig 135 Dialog box when creating an attribute 481 Fig 136 Dialog box when creating a property 488 Fig 137 Result of the transformation on the client side 502 Fig 138 Result of the transformation on the server side 505 12 Livelink WCM Server List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Object statuses with description Object types with possible content components Standard metadata with description Actions and required access rights Example of group roles and rights Functi
99. 4 Save the workflow definition 1 Choose File gt Save or click the appropriate icon Ld Icon for saving a workflow definition The Save workflow definition dialog box opens Content Client User Manual 277 Chapter 8 2 From the Save in drop down list select the desired storage location In the File Name field enter the name for the workflow definition file XPDL format 3 Click the OK button The workflow definition is saved Step 5 Add workflow object If you want to use the new workflow definition in the WCM system add a WCM object of type Workflow The following requirements must be met m You have the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which you want to add the WCM object of type Workflow m You are assigned the functional area Workflow or the functional area your WCM administrator has provided for adding workflow objects To check your functional areas choose Too s Login info On the basis of the XPDL file saved in step 4 add a WCM object of type Workflow The workflow object now passes through the normal staging steps of Livelink WCM Server i e it must be submitted to Quality Assurance which either releases or rejects it After the workflow object has been released it can be assigned to other WCM objects Editing a Workflow Definition Via the Content client 1 Check out the workflow object The workflow modeler opens 278 Li
100. 5 special attributes edit 411 filter by 412 from attribute set 409 from object category 410 in general 409 statification 413 WCM tags 433 staging 29 standard filter 365 application examples 373 in the My objects view 369 in the object filter 368 use 366 standard metadata 43 start Content client 74 InSite Editing 295 workflow modeler 263 Livelink WCM Server starting point change size 268 delete 270 move 267 statification 413 of form instances 418 of JSP objects 416 of XML objects 421 Statify page special attribute 415 status metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 status bar 81 object information 86 string data type 438 structure cascading template 402 WCM object 38 workflow definition 258 submit 248 compound object 241 source object 241 undo 250 submitted object status 36 substitute 79 suggested file name metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 surrogate object data type 471 system architecture 27 T tab External References dialog box 203 Invalid References dialog box 203 Referenced objects References dialog box 202 Referencing objects References dialog box 202 Content Client User Manual Index take over as substitute 79 target group metadata item 45 WCM tag 430 tasks of a QA staff member 37 of an editor 37 template add 399 add object 138 cascading 401 delete 400 edit 400 in general 41 397 merge with object 398 metadata item 46 WCM tag 430 template structure 83 text data type 439 thumb
101. 6 397 399 400 401 409 411 412 413 422 Livelink WCM Server Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Appendix A Glossary Index Working with WCM Tags Integrating Metadata Parameterized WCM Tags Managing Websites in the Content Client Managing Object Types Managing Attribute Sets Managing Object Categories Livelink WCM Server and XML The XML Object Types Using Templates Application Examples Content Client User Manual 427 428 440 465 466 477 485 493 493 498 500 507 515 List of Figures Fig 1 The staging of Livelink WCM Server 30 Fig 2 Example workflow in Livelink WCM Server 31 Fig 3 Object statuses in the Edit view 33 Fig 4 Object statuses in the QA view 34 Fig 5 Structure of a WCM Object 39 Fig 6 Separation of layout and content 41 Fig 7 References of a WCM object 48 Fig 8 Absolute and relative references 49 Fig 9 Assignment of users to groups and roles 53 Fig 10 Inheritance of access rights 55 Fig 11 Interrupted chain of inheritance as a result of changed access rights 56 Fig 12 Restoring the inherited access rights 57 Fig 13 Interpreting group and role specific access rights 59 Fig 14 Interpreting group role and user specific access rights 60 Fig 15 Logging in to the Content client 75 Fig 16 Selecting a website 76 Fig 17 Change password 78 Fig 18 Taking over as a substitute 79 Fig 19 The Logi
102. CM Server CHAPTER 15 Working with WCM Tags By means of so called WCM tags you can integrate metadata in a template or in an object s HTML page WCM tags are placeholders for metadata which are inserted in the HTML code When the pages are generated the relevant metadata items are automatically copied into the page In the HTML code WCM tags are enclosed in curly brackets Notes Do not confuse WCM tags with the placeholders for certain elements that are also enclosed in curly brackets in this document see section Typographic Conventions on page 23 An overview of all information integrated in the current object by means of WCM tags is available in the Metadata dialog box on the WCM tags tab By using WCM tags in templates you ensure that important object data is always displayed on your website in the same form This object data includes for example the expiration date or the e mail address of the editor responsible for maintaining the object The use of WCM tags is not confined to templates and offers individual design opportunities for other objects as well Especially in connection with the Content Assembly func tions and InSite Editing WCM tags play an important part Content Client User Manual 427 Chapter 15 This chapter explains how to integrate metadata into a page by means of WCM tags see the following section m influence the functionality of WCM tags by means of parameters see section P
103. Edit Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 loj xj Select the embedded objects that you want to import Use the context menu to select a storage location for these objects By default the embedded objects are added to the same topic as the HTML page Fig 51 Selecting embedded objects when adding an object Content Client User Manual 147 Chapter 5 In this dialog box you determine which embedded objects are to be imported into the WCM system together with the referencing object You can deselect individual or all objects These objects will not be imported If an object with the same name and object type already exists in your website the O D column shows the OID of this object Deselect existing objects to prevent adding multiple objects containing the same file e g the same image By default the embedded objects are added to the topic containing the referencing object To specify a different storage location for individual objects choose Select topic on the context menu and mark the desired topic in the selection dialog box The Topic column will show the OID of the storage location To add the object click the OK button The system creates the new object together with the embedded objects and displays them in the navigation area The object s status is changed Adding Objects on the Basis of a Template The wizard for adding an object on the basis of a template enables you to determine the lay
104. Final check Graphics specialist Publish Fig 2 Example workflow in Livelink WCM Server The following sections provide information on different aspects of the staging and workflow of Livelink WCM Server status changes of a WCM object in the staging and workflow see the following section tasks of an editor see section Tasks of an Editor starting on page 37 tasks of quality assurance see section Tasks of a QA Staff Member starting on page 37 Content Client User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Statuses of WCM Objects As a result of the various work steps the status of an object changes when it is edited The current object status determines the functions you can perform on the object In the Content client different icons illustrate the object statuses You can inform the person responsible for the next work step by e mail when the status of an object changes For example if you have edited an object and checked it in again the object acquires the status changed and can be submitted to Quality Assurance When you submit the object you can inform the responsible staff by e mail The required e mail addresses are stored in the object s metadata If a workflow is assigned to the object the e mail is automatically sent to the address of the user who is assigned to the next workflow step Example For a better understanding the staging is described on the basis of the following example 1 You a
105. K button If you know the OID of the template you can enter it directly in the Template field Click the icon Q to view the selected template in the object preview The icon takes you directly to the selected template m Workflow If you want to assign a workflow to the new object click the desired workflow in the drop down list To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Content Client User Manual 151 Chapter 5 Specifying Object Type and Basic Properties In this dialog box you define the object type and basic properties for the new object Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer Please specify standard metadata The entry is optional Heading Press Release Type HTML page Object category No category Language English USA Expiration date fosfozjzo14 08 53 33 AM lt Delayed release lt Suggested file name 7 Direct release lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 54 Specifying type and basic properties when adding objects on the basis of a template m Heading Enter a heading for the object Type Determine the type of the object Click the icon to open a dialog box with a list of all object types Object category Use the drop down list to assign an object category to the object By assigning an object category you can categorize the object based on its contents or create an assemb
106. M objects video mpeg video files in MPEG format application Files that do not belong to the other categories and thus have to be processed by a particular application before they can be displayed in the browser x javascript JavaScript vnd ms excel Microsoft Excel vnd ms powerpoint Microsoft PowerPoint msword Microsoft Word postscript Postscript files xml XML files Enter the MIME type in the text field m File extensions extensions of the source files for importing objects e g xls MS Excel or doc MS Word Enter the file extensions as a comma separated list Generated file extension extension of the pages generated by the deployment system If files cannot be displayed directly in the browser e g Excel files a surrogate page containing a link to the file is generated In such cases the surrogate page is generated with the file extension specified here example htm In the metadata of a WCM object a suggested file name for the generated file can be entered When a WCM object is added or when changes are made to the object s metadata an automatic check is made to see whether the suggested file name s extension is supported by the object type Invalid file extensions cannot be saved Enter the desired file extension Content Client User Manual 473 Chapter 16 m Index file only for object types with the object data type Topic fil
107. MENT_NAME Type of the deployment system VIPDEPLOYMENT_TYPE URL of the deployment system VIPDEPLOYMENT_URL Path to the directory where the pages generated by the deployment system are stored VIPDEPLOYMENT_PATH Host name of the mail server VIPMAIL_HOST User ID of the e mail sender VIPMAIL_SENDER Integrating workflow information in a page The following table lists the WCM tags for integrating workflow informa tion 432 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Table 37 WCM tags for workflow information Information WCM tag Name of the workflow VI PWORKF LOW Name of the current activity VIPACTIVITY Integrating special attributes in a page Special attributes like all object metadata can be integrated in pages or templates by means of WCM tags You can form WCM tags for special attributes by adding the prefix VIP to the attribute and enclosing the expression in curly brackets The following table contains the attributes of the attribute sets supplied with Livelink WCM Server and the WCM tags formed accordingly For displaying the attributes in the Content client names that are easier to understand were chosen These names are listed in the column Attribute name in the Content client Table 38 WCM tags for the supplied special attributes Attribute WCM tag Attribute name in Data type the Co
108. To do so set the Locale parameter to none Example VIPSTATE locale none returns edited for the object status changed Content Client User Manual 449 Chapter 15 The encoding Parameter The encoding parameter determines the encoding to be used to write the value of a WCM tag to the page Permitted values are plain The encoding configured for the website is used ISO 8859 1 or UTF 8 html The text is HTML encoded Non ASCII characters are output as Unicode in HTML numeric entities example A is replaced by amp 196 m javascript The text is coded in order to enable the use in Javas cript code The following characters are replaced one character gt two characters one character two characters one character two characters r one character r two characters n one character n two characters t one character gt gt t two characters gt lt lt Notes Values that return URLs are not encoded If the parameter encoding is not specified HTML encoding is always used In this case the named entity is used example is replaced by amp Aumi The type Parameter Use the type parameter to specify the HTML tag generated for the data type Object URL Possible values of the parameter are img and href In 450 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags the gen
109. WCM object include m integrated graphics files m links to other objects within the website m references to external addresses outside the current website e g pages on the Internet For the most object types the internal reference check guarantees consis tency of the internal references contained in the metadata and the refer ences included in the page The References dialog box shows all references of an object Content Client User Manual 201 Chapter 6 This section describes how to work with the References dialog box see the following section m add references in the Content client or in an editor see section Adding References starting on page 203 m delete references see section Deleting References starting on page 214 The References Dialog Box Note For viewing the References dialog box you require the functional area References dialog To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Choose View References to open the References dialog box Referencing objects Referenced objects External Invalid Type OID Title Path Version status aa 143 CompanyLogo fen Company Info Products Images 0 0 1 21 New Products fen Company Info Products 1 051 g 63 Product Features fen Company Info Products 0 0 1 E NEW BR 17 Products Jen Company Info 2 0 0 n Ba 14 Site Map fen 2 0 2 Fig 68 The References dialog box On four tabs you can view the reference
110. WCM system e g with the Content client The actual objects however are stored in the Livelink database Relators are treated like normal WCM objects and are subject to staging The reference management of Livelink WCM Server is also available for relators Livelink folder relators have a special feature As they do not have any content you cannot check out and check in Livelink folder relators Livelink documents integrated in a website by means of relators are displayed directly in the browser If files cannot be displayed directly in the browser e g PDF files or Word documents a so called surrogate page containing a link to the file is generated Livelink folders become WCM topics As WCM topics have content an HTML page is generated for each Livelink folder In the Navigation area of the Content client the following icons symbolize relators Content Client User Manual 339 Chapter 11 The letters LL in the bottom right corner of the object type icon stand for Livelink The figure shows the relator icon for an Excel document m be If the system cannot access the Livelink object referenced by the relator the relator s icon is marked by a red cross The reason for this may be for example that the Livelink object has been deleted or that the connection between the WCM system and the Livelink system has been interrupted In this chapter the following topics are introduced m adding relators see the followin
111. You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object m The Use integrated HTML editor check box in the Configuration dialog box is selected 206 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to edit and check the object out The object s content is transferred to the integrated HTML editor 3 Choose Insert Add reference to a WCM object or click the appro priate icon K4 Icon for adding references A dialog box with the topic structure of the website opens Livelink WCM Server Content Client Micra Topic structure Ea Internetsite HER de a BA en i Ba Careers Ey Company Info te Ba Products 5 Ea Services E mail Phone Ea General Templates SES i By News Ba Site Map te Ba Support ce Bay Workflows Ee fr Fig 70 Topic structure when adding references Content Client User Manual 207 Chapter 6 4 In the topic structure select the object that is to be the target of the reference 5 Move the inserted link to the desired position and edit the link text if required 6 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system References are checked automatically when the object is checked in to the WCM system References to WCM objects are entered in the reference management of Livelink WCM Server The referen
112. a topic for content organization See also Topic Group Collection of users for which specific access rights can be defined User groups are usually tied to organizational units such as departments and projects Group role Combination of a group and role The group role is not an organizational unit that is defined in the Admin client but a configuration option for the object access rights in the Content client Home page The start page of a website It usually performs the function of a title page and table of contents for the website Content Client User Manual 509 Glossary HTML Hypertext Markup Language A text description language for creating pages that can be displayed in the browser HTML page HTML file that is displayed by the browser HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol A communication protocol for transferring HTML pages Java Object oriented programming language developed by Sun Microsystems and used especially in the field of Internet technology Security aspects and platform independence are the basic philosophies of Java JavaScript Scripting language for integrating executable scripts in HTML pages JavaScript can be used to incorporate plausibility checks and calculation functions in forms Metadata Every WCM object has a number of object information assigned to it e g expiration date language These are known as metadata Object Each element of a website is integr
113. adata in a template or in the page generated for the object and thus use the meta data in a WCM managed website For integrating metadata WCM tags are provided Note For detailed information on WCM tags refer to chapter 14 Mit WCM Tags arbeiten L Livelink Standard Metadata The following table provides an overview of the WCM tags for the most common Livelink standard metadata The file Livelink_WCM_tags html in the directory WCM installation directory examples wcmtags contains all Livelink specific WOM tags Table 23 WCM tags for the most common Livelink metadata Metadata item Internal name WCM tag Description comment VIPLL attribute comment File name filename VIPLL attribute filename Created by createdby VIPLL attribute createdby Created createdate VIPLL attribute createdate Modified modifydate VIPLL attribute modifydate MIME type mimetype VIPLL attribute mimetype Object size filedatasize VIPLL attribute filedatasize in byte 358 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Metadata item Internal name WCM tag Node ID nodeid VIPLL attribute nodeid Version versionnum VIPLL attribute versionnum Version vcomment VIPLL attribute vcomment description User Defined Metadata The WCM tag mechanism is also available for user defined Livelink meta data e g the attributes of an o
114. ails is assigned to the attribute sets html and dynamic These attribute sets are linked with certain object types You can change the assignment of attribute sets to object types via Tools Website administration Object types Thumbnails can be displayed in the following dialogs boxes m When adding an object on the basis of a template thumbnails facili tate the selection of an appropriate template m When selecting objects via a filter thumbnails enable you to quickly find the desired object A selection of objects with thumbnails is only possible for object references integrated into the generated page by means of WCM tags Additionally the parameters filter and thumbnails must be set for these WCM tags For more information refer to sections The filter Parameter on page 451 and The thumbnails Parameter on page 452 For an application example refer to section Content Assembly with InSite Editing on page 331 422 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes To activate the thumbnail for an object Note For graphic objects the steps described in the following are not required In this case thumbnails are automatically activated Step 1 Create screenshot for object 1 Navigate to the object for which a thumbnail is to be displayed 2 Display the object in the object preview and create a screenshot for the object 3 Save the screenshot on your local drive Note Fo
115. align middle gt lt td bgcolor 000080 gt lt h3 align center gt VIP SITE amp 1 50 VIPSUBTITLE lt h3 gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr height 85 valign middle gt lt td bgcolor DDDDDD gt lt small VIPCONTENT small gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr height 5 vaign middle gt lt td bgcolor DDDDDD gt lt smal gt amp nbsp 2004 Company Inc Dependent tem plate All rights reserved lt smal gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt itable gt lt tr width 100 height 100 valign top gt lt body gt lt td gt VIPCONTENT lt td gt d gt lt p align tight gt lt a href http wcmserver company example InternetSitele di Products lt a gt lt p gt lt p align tight gt lt a href http wcmserver company example InternetSitele di Events lt a gt lt p gt lt p align tight gt lt a href http wcmserver company example InternetSitele di PressRekase lt a gt lt p gt lt p align tight gt lt a href http wcmserver company example InternetSitele di News lt a gt lt p gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt v v v v Fig 124 Merging the body element in a cascading template When assembling the cascading template unlike other object types settings in the body element of the dependent template are also taken into account For example if the body element of the dependent template contains attributes su
116. allation requirements for the workflow modeler refer to the Release Notes for Livelink WCM Server To install the workflow modeler 1 Extract the file workflowmodeler zip from the directory workflowmodeler of the installation CD to a local directory e g d wem workflowmodeler 2 Open the prompt 3 Change to the directory selected in step 1 4 Start the installation by calling the installation script install bat The following parameters can be used m path to the Java Runtime Environment JRE If the installation script cannot find a path to a JRE this param eter must be supplied as the first parameter Example install bat d j2sdk1 4 2 bin m installation directory By means of the parameter directory you can specify a different installation directory for the workflow modeler In this case all files are copied to the specified directory The start script is created in the new directory Content Client User Manual 261 Chapter 8 Example install bat d j2sdk1 4 2 bin directory c Program Files WorkflowModeler m languages By means of the parameter Language you can determine the language for the user interface of the workflow modeler If this parameter is missing the default language of the operating system is used Supported languages are English en and German de Example install bat d j2sdk1 4 2 bin language en After the installation the workflow modeler can be started by me
117. already contains double quotes example oty_name GIF enclose the filter parameter value in single quotes example filter oty_name GIF For further information on creating filters refer to section The Filter Editor on page 376 For an example of using a filter in WCM tags refer to section Content Assembly with InSite Editing on page 331 The thumbnails Parameter If the thumbnails parameter has the value on thumbnails of the indi vidual objects are displayed when selecting objects by means of a filter For this reason you should use the thumbnails parameter only in connection with the filter parameter In the case of graphic objects the thumbnails are displayed automatically For all other WCM objects the special attribute Thumbnail must be set For more information refer to section Activating Thumbnails for Objects on page 422 For an example of using the thumbnails parameter refer to section Content Assembly with InSite Editing on page 331 The default Parameter By means of the default parameter you can use values from the template in the generated page of the object This presupposes that the value of the parameter is on and that the respective metadata item is not set in the WCM object In the Metadata dialog box the value from the template is not displayed If a cascading template is assigned to the object the system searches the template cascade until it finds a respec tive
118. and this setting has been released by Quality Assurance Thus a filter searching for objects that can be released directly filter expression direct_release true only finds objects for which this setting has been released by Quality Assurance By marking an object in the navigation area you can determine the start object for filtering However this selection will not be consid ered if the filter contains one of the following expressions m childof is subordinate object of m topic topic equal to m oid OID equal to 394 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Content Client User Manual 395 396 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 13 Working with Templates The basic concept behind the structure of WCM objects is the separation of layout and content Each page in a website can be assigned a defined template which can however be changed at any time The template contains the layout information for the page Changes to a template result in fully automatic changes to the layout of all pages based on that template Thus you only need to change the layout in the template to update the relevant pages in the entire website This makes it easier to implement your style guide and ensure a consistent appearance for the pages in your website A template is a freely designable page that contains design elements e g graphics background image background color text and link colors and
119. another user The displayed data is managed via the Admin client and can only be viewed here The User Interface of the Content Client After you have logged in successfully and selected a website the user interface of the Content client builds up The window is divided into different areas Title bar Header Menu bar gt tre m e Tont teoter_JS fe an WL SB Willkommen S909999999993999 a Navigation Welcome l EE Bienvenue Settings of ame the selected gt object al Zen at Fig 20 The user interface of the Content client Content Client User Manual 81 Chapter 3 The following sections provide a short introduction to the user interface of the Content client It is explained how to m use the Content client to navigate through the website see the following section call functions in the Content client see section Choosing Functions starting on page 85 Navigating in the Content Client You can use the navigation area to quickly navigate within the website Via the navigation area you can find pages or graphics and select them for editing The selected object is highlighted in color Another navigation tool is the OID field in the toolbar If you want to edit an object and know its OID enter the corresponding number here This takes you straight to the desired object The Content client provides different views of the website structure In
120. ans of WCM tags has in the generated page Moreover the data type determines the layout of the input element for the special attribute in the Content client The following table lists the different data types and the formats used by Livelink WCM Server and the respec tive input elements Note The table contains the default formats used By specifying param eters in the WCM tags you can change the format of the object information displayed For more information see section Parameter ized WCM Tags on page 440 Content Client User Manual 435 Chapter 15 Table 39 Data types with formats used Data type Format used Input element Boolean value Date Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object true or false or wahr or falsch Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object the date in the following form 04 09 2003 German Sep 4 2003 English Check box Separate dialog box calendar External URL Returns the entry itself Simple text input field Floating point number Returns the floating point value The number of digits after the decimal point scale is determined when the special attribute is created The value range is defined as follows from 10 10 5 to 10P 5 10 S with p precision and s scale Example A precision of 5 witha scale of 3 results in a value range of 99 999 to 99 999
121. ans of the start script VIPWorkflowModeler bat generated during the installation The start script is located in the workflow modeler installation directory Working with the Workflow Modeler The workflow modeler is a Java application that offers you a graphical user interface for creating and editing workflow definitions The following gives you a brief introduction to working with the workflow modeler Described is how to start the workflow modeler see the following section m to use the menu bar and the toolbar see section Menu Bar and Toolbar on page 265 m to work using the mouse and keyboard see section Using Mouse and Keyboard on page 267 262 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow m the individual workflow elements are displayed see section Graph ical Representation of Workflow Elements on page 270 Starting the Workflow Modeler There are different possibilities to start the workflow modeler The way you choose depends on whether you want to use the Workflow Modeler inside or outside the WCM system and on how your Content client is configured Starting the Workflow Modeler Separately from the WCM System For the workflow modeler to be started separately from the WCM system it must be installed on your computer If this is the case the workflow modeler can be started by double clicking the start script VIPWorkflowModeler bat generated during the installation The start script is located in the work
122. ans of the parameters for the WCM tags you can activate InSite Editing for the individual metadata items and specify default values For detailed information on WCM tags refer to chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags 322 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Step 3 Add an assembled object responsible editor To add assembled objects based on the category created in step 1 choose Object New assembled object Follow the instructions of the wizard For detailed information refer to the online help of the Content client The new objects have the properties of the assigned object category To edit these properties and thus the content of the assembled object go to the Properties tab of the Metadata dialog box There you can for example specify the OID of the object which is to be used as the image for the press release General Properties Attributes E mail Info WCM tags date image CompanyLogo OID 143 GIF image changed m TQ te introduction maintext wu titlearticle Save Reset Help Fig 94 The Properties tab in the Metadata dialog box Content Client User Manual 323 Chapter 10 Editing Assembled Objects In contrast to normal WCM objects assembled objects do not have a content component Thus the following functions are not available for assembled objects m Check out m Check in Edit content m Undo m Replace m Add reference All i
123. ant to delete Note You cannot delete the default profile The selected profile is loaded to the Configuration dialog box 3 Click the Delete button The profile is removed from the Load profile drop down list 4 Click the OK button 128 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Customizing the Content Client Livelink WCM Server offers you various possibilities to customize the Content client to your individual needs Basically you can use customizing options to hide certain user interface elements This makes working with the Content client even easier espe cially for users with a clearly defined working environment You have the following possibilities to tailor the Content client to your needs m through access rights see the following section through functional areas see section Customizing Through Func tional Areas on page 130 m through profiles see section Customizing Through Profiles on page 130 Customizing Through Access Rights For general information on access rights refer to section Access Rights on page 50 The access rights determine how the users may access the objects e g whether they may only read the object or whether they are also allowed to change it Certain icons and menu items are for example disabled if the user does not have the required right In the Admin client the access rights can be preset for each principal These settings are called default o
124. arameterized WCM Tags on page 440 Integrating Metadata The integrated HTML editor provides a wizard for inserting WCM tags in a comfortable way see section Inserting a WCM Tag in an HTML Object on page 179 In the following sections the most important WCM tags are described Integrating object content in a page Like any HTML page a template may contain any desired elements e g graphics text Since a template provides the framework for other WCM objects it also contains the information as to where the content of the WCM object is to be inserted For this purpose the special WCM tag VIPCONTENT is provided Integrating object specific information in a page The following table lists the WCM tags for integrating object specific infor mation The majority of this information is managed in the Metadata dialog box 428 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Table 35 WCM tags for object specific information Metadata item WCM tag Author VIPCREATED_BY Country code of the language e g US for the United States VIPCOUNTRY Created on Delayed release VIPDATE_CREATED VIPDATE_RELEASED_AT Description Direct release VIPDESCRIPTION VIPDIRECT_RELEASE E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release VIPEMAIL_EDIT VIPEMAIL_QA VIPEMAIL_RELEASE Expiration date VIPDATE_EXPIRE language e g en for English
125. are on The information is equipped with a toolbar and highlighted by a red frame You can edit the information directly on the page or in the WOM tag dialog box Example VIPKEYWORDLIST edit on param The information can be edited via the WCM tag dialog box they are not highlighted on the page Example VIPKEYWORDLIST edit param 458 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags m begin and end In most cases it is sufficient to enable InSite Editing by means of the value on or param As a URL can only be used within such HTML tags as lt a href VIPLINK gt or lt img src VIPLINK gt and these HTML tags may not contain the edit parameter the parameter was extended by the values begin and end Two additional WCM tags must be inserted that enclose the actual WCM tag These WCM tags are only considered by InSite Editing deployment systems All other deployment systems ignore them Example VIPLINK edit begin lt img src VIPLINK gt VIPLINK edit end The order Parameter Use the order parameter to determine the position of the WCM tag in the WCM tag dialog box of InSite Editing This enables you to position the input fields for essential information on top of the dialog box You can only enter integers for the order parameter When determining the order of tags in the WCM tag dialog box the system evaluates the order parameter first WCM tags for which this parameter is not set are sorted accord
126. as to Offer Many companies today have a number of intranet extranet and Internet environments with specific focuses This involves managing content for a wide variety of target groups employees subsidiaries business associ ates or customers An efficient content management system in the company makes it possible to equip users with the rights and tools they need to provide such content and at the same time ensure control of the content Livelink WCM Server enables you to implement sophisticated intranet Internet and extranet solutions The content is managed in the form of complex websites Livelink WCM Server includes other products for creating and managing dynamic and personalized websites Content Client User Manual 17 Chapter 1 Easy to Use Livelink WCM Server is designed as a client server solution All website data is managed on servers Website content can be edited with the Content client which does not require separate installation on the client computers The Content client offers editors graphics specialists or quality assurance employees an intuitive user interface for editing website content Any desired applications can be used for editing content which means that authors can continue to use their familiar authoring environ ment and concentrate on their specific subject areas The elements of the website are shown in a clearly arranged tree struc ture An integrated HTML editor with design view allows you
127. at is loaded from the Internet by the browser and is run on the recipient s computer The Download applet of the Content client assists you with all download processes from the server to the local hard disk and upload processes from the local hard disk to the server To edit an object you have to check it out first By doing so you load the file that represents the object from the server to your local hard disk download When you have finished editing the object you check it in again This transfers the edited file from your local hard disk to the server upload Use Download applet check box cleared Note For performance and usability reasons we strongly recommend that you always work with the Download applet For security reasons it may be necessary to prevent access by the browser to your local hard disk This is ensured by clearing the Use Download applet check box If you clear this check box you will have to perform all download and upload operations manually For the exact procedures refer to sections Checking out without Download applet on page 171 and Checking in without Download applet on page 176 Content Client User Manual 113 Chapter 4 The advantage of working without the Download applet is that you have full control of the data transfer This guarantees maximum security The disadvantage is that working becomes relatively inconvenient Use Download applet check box selected You ca
128. ata such as Livelink system and Livelink ID You can view and modify the Livelink metadata of relators in the Livelink metadata dialog box You want to edit the Livelink metadata of a relator Prerequisites The relator has the status changed rejected released or delayed release You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the relator You are assigned the functional area Livelink To check your func tional areas choose Tools Login info You have the permission Modify for the Livelink object Content Client User Manual 355 Chapter 11 Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Inthe Navigation area mark the relator whose Livelink metadata you want to edit 3 Choose View Livelink metadata General Livelink data TrainingMaterials Livelink system Livelink intern Livelink ID Advanced Training Nodeld 4945 ersion 1 Jun 2 2004 i Created 2 04 12 Created by Admin PM F i p application vnd ms File name OnlineHelp2 ppt MIME Type powerpoint TSR 971 50 Object size KB Description Yersion description Update Edit version automatically Fixed version 1E 7 Delete Livelink object together with relator Save Reset Help Fig 108 The Livelink metadata dialog box Yersion 356 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client The dialog box
129. ata types and the default formats used by Livelink WCM Server 318 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Table 20 Important data types with formats used Data type Format used Date Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object the date in the following form 04 09 2003 German Sep 4 2003 English External URL Returns the URL itself Formatted text Returns the HTML content of the attribute Only the content of the body element is returned If there is no body element the entire text is generated to the page Links contained in the text are not managed automatically Integer Returns the integer itself The value range is defined as follows 2147483647 lt integer lt 2147483647 List Returns a comma separated list of the entries in the order they were entered In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not generated to the page Livelink ID Returns the ID of the object in the Livelink system Set Returns an alphabetically sorted comma separated list of the entries Double entries are removed In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not gener ated to the page Set of e mail addresses Returns an alphabetically sorted comma separated list of the entries Double entries are removed In the case of expressions enclosed in quotes quotes are not gener ated to the page Conte
130. ated in Livelink WCM Server as a single object Each object is based on an object type such a HTML page Object types can be defined in the Admin client or the Content client Object category Assignment of a WCM object to a specific category Due to this assignment the WCM object has a set of additional special attributes metadata Object fragment Metadata item integrated into the generated page by means of a WCM tag In InSite Editing fragments are highlighted by a red frame and can be edited separately without checking out the WCM object Object type The specific kind of object e g HTML page HTML template Topic Various properties of the WCM object result from the object type The object type is defined when the object is created There are only a few cases in which it may subsequently be changed Object types can be edited in the Admin client or the Content client 510 Livelink WCM Server Glossary Portal A portal is a website that serves the user as a central point of access as a gate to certain Internet services A portal often offers topic specific and personalized offers and information Production view The Production view of Livelink WCM Server makes the released pages of a website available to the user By means of a web server these pages can be accessed in the Internet intranet or extranet QA view The QA view of Livelink WCM Server is used for quality assuranc
131. atically changed whenever the object is modified in the Livelink system For the changes to become visible in the published website you must submit the changed relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance 344 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Note A relator can only be updated automatically if its status is either changed rejected released or delayed release If this requirement is not met use the appropriate staging action to change the relator s status After this you can adapt the relator to the modified Livelink object by choosing Object gt Synchronize Fixed version If you click this radio button the relator will be based on a certain version of the Livelink object When the object changes in the Livelink system the relator remains unchanged You can however update the relator manually via the Livelink metadata dialog box see section Modifying Livelink Metadata on page 355 m Version lf you clicked the Fixed version radio button specify the desired version of the Livelink object by clicking it in the drop down list Confirm your entries by clicking the OK button Entering a remark In this dialog box you may enter information for the relator s log Content Client User Manual 345 Chapter 11 y Remark Microsoft Internet Explorer lol xj Please enter a remark The remark will be saved in the log Remark T Do not s
132. atify page 417 Table 34 Sample configuration for the special attribute Absolute URL 420 Table 35 WOM tags for object specific information 429 Table 36 WOM tags for global information 432 Table 37 WOM tags for workflow information 433 Table 38 WOM tags for the supplied special attributes 433 Table 39 Data types with formats used 436 Table 40 Values of the format parameter for the data types Date Time and Time stamp 442 Table 41 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Time stamp 444 Table 42 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Object URL 445 Table 43 Values of the format parameter for the data type Floating point number 445 Table 44 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Floating point number 446 Table 45 Examples for using the type parameter 451 Table 46 Datatypes and target parameter 462 Table 47 Object data types and WCM objects 471 Table 48 MIME types and WCM objects 472 Table 49 Content and file extension depending on the template 498 14 Livelink WCM Server Content Client User Manual 15 16 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 1 Introduction This chapter gives you an introduction to the functionality of Livelink Web Content Management Server Livelink WCM Server for short It also provides a brief overview of the structure of this manual What Livelink WCM Server H
133. ation area For conveniently adding references to WCM objects you can use the following commands from the Edit menu or the context menu Content Client User Manual 209 Chapter 6 m Copy URL This command creates a reference to the object you have marked in the navigation area This reference is saved in the form of the object s URL and can be inserted into the object via the clipboard Copy HTML tag This command creates a complete HTML reference to the object you have marked in the navigation area The reference has the format lt A HREF URL of the object gt title of the object lt A gt and can be inserted into the object via the clipboard Note The procedure in the Mozilla browser differs from this description The reference is not copied to the clipboard A separate window with the URL or the HTML tag opens instead Use the context menu of the browser to copy the reference to the clipboard 4 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system When the object is checked in the WCM system automatically recognizes references that have been inserted manually and that contain the HTML tags for references lt a href gt lt img src gt lt frame src gt and adds these references to the metadata As when adding references in the Content client references are checked automatically when the object is checked in to the WCM system 210 Livelink WCM Server E
134. atus are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the criterion in the column Another click reverses the sort order You can mark one or more objects in the list in order to edit them 96 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Search beginning with topic InternetSite en freleased E aAa I Apply action to all objects Objects found 15 Type _ OID Title a Path status 9 Careers jen oO ER 10 Company Info jen A 22 E mail fen Company Info Services oO 24 Events jenjNews oO BS 11 General Templates fen 6 Ey 12 Home jen ER 13 News fen a 23 Phone fen Company Info Services ag 59 Press Release fenjWorkflows oO 17 Products fen Company Info io Be 18 Services fen Company Info oO Be 14 Site Map fen A Ba 15 Support fen Ba 16 Workflows jen n Ba 7 en oO Fig 27 The Object filter view For detailed information on the functions and use of the object filter refer to chapter 12 Finding Objects and Editing Them Together The My objects view Choose View My objects to open the My objects view This view is personalized as it considers your access rights Only those objects that you have edited or that you can edit are displayed The view offers a list from which you can select the criteria for filtering the website objects For example if you click have changed in the drop down list
135. background When an asynchronous operation has been started it is added to the so called action list By means of the action list you can watch the progress of your asynchronous actions The action list is displayed in a separate window Content Client User Manual 101 Chapter 3 a Action list Microsoft Internet Explorer E iol xi Actions Action type Done Detailed information Action type Release The deployment system has finished generating or deleting files Start time Aug 9 2004 10 19 34 AM 12 of 12 objects have been processed 0 of these Progress objects could not be processed Deployment progress Refresh view Update Delete Close Help Fig 33 The action list The following functions are available for the action list Refresh view refreshes the navigation area of the Content client after a time consuming action Update refreshes the action list m Delete removes the marked entry from the action list 102 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Note As soon as you exit the Content client all entries in the action list are deleted automatically The Log Note For viewing the Log dialog box you require the functional area Log dialog To check your functional areas choose Tools gt Login info The log is the history of the current object It contains all actions that have been perfo
136. bar Choose Object Direct release or click the appropriate icon A Icon for directly releasing an object The system checks whether there are dependent objects that can be released together with the object Dependent objects are objects that cannot be displayed correctly without the object to be released e g images embedded in an HTML page If there are dependent objects an according dialog box is displayed Content Client User Manual 253 Chapter 7 y Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Select the objects that you want to submit or release The list contains the selected object and all dependent objects Type OID Title fen Company a 143 CompanyLogo Info Produc D 20 Product Overview Continue Cancel Help Fig 79 Selecting dependent objects when releasing an object directly 3 Select the dependent objects which are to be released together with the object and click the Next button If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can release the object directly and send a message to the e mail addresses saved in the metadata item E mail Release 4 Click the OK button All the necessary steps will now be performed automatically i e the object is sent to Quality Assurance and automatically released there Upon reaching the release date the released version of the object becomes available in the Production view
137. be a model for optimum access right settings 60 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Functional Areas Functional areas control which functions are available to the users in the Content client They fulfill two different tasks Functional areas determine which types of objects a user may add check out and check in The functional areas such as Basic are by default linked with object types Only a user who has the corre sponding functional area can add objects of this object type Functional areas determine which views and dialog boxes are avail able to the user in the Content client This way you can determine exactly which actions the user is allowed to perform For example the Access rights dialog box is only displayed if the user has the functional area Access rights dialog If the user is not assigned this functional area via group or role membership or a direct assign ment the user cannot view and edit the access rights of the WCM objects Note The layout of your Content client strongly depends on the functional areas you have been assigned and can thus be different from the description in this manual In the Admin client functional areas can be assigned to groups roles or individual users Also the WCM administrator can add functional areas and change the default assignment of object types The following table gives an overview of the default functional areas and their assignment to ob
138. bject category Use the following pattern to form WCM tags for user defined attributes VIPLL category lt category name gt set lt set name gt attribute lt attribute name gt set_no lt number gt item_no lt number gt m category name of the category containing the attribute m set name of the set containing the attribute m attribute name of the attribute for which the WCM tag is created m set_no position of the set in the list of set values item_no position of the attribute value to be shown in the list of attribute values If the attribute to be shown is not of type set the expression becomes simpler VIPLL category lt category name gt attribute lt attribute name gt item_no lt number gt Content Client User Manual 359 Chapter 11 Example For the training materials you created a category named Training Mate rials By means of the attributes of this category you can manage infor mation on the status and the contact person for the materials The attribute set Contact Information of the category contains three attributes in the following order 1 Contact Person 2 E mail 3 Phone number The attribute Phone number may contain two values in the first position the conventional phone number in the second position the mobile phone number TrainingMaterials Level Advanced Status Released Contact person fistein B E mail address steina
139. bject rights If one of these principals is added to the access control list these settings are used as the initial settings for the access rights For more information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual With the Content client you modify the access rights for each object at any time Content Client User Manual 129 Chapter 4 Customizing Through Functional Areas For general information on functional areas refer to section Functional Areas on page 61 Functional areas determine which types of objects a user may add check out and check in The functional areas such as Basic are by default linked with object types Only users that have the corresponding functional area can add and edit objects of this object type When adding an object users may only select the object types for which they have the required functional areas In addition functional areas determine which views and dialog boxes are available to the user For example the Access rights dialog box is only displayed if the user has the functional area Access rights dialog Functional areas are assigned to users groups and roles via the Admin client Here the WCM administrator can also add functional areas and edit existing ones For more information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual Customizing Through Profiles Profiles provide the following customizing options Toolbar You can determine which f
140. bject with the fragment that you want to edit 3 Place the mouse pointer on the toolbar of the fragment that you want to edit The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame Content Client User Manual 301 Chapter 9 4 Choose Use default value on the context menu 5 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The value of the metadata item is deleted On the generated page the value from the template is displayed Editing Fragments with Object References For editing fragments containing object references the context menu provides several functions Additionally icons offer access to the most important functions Replacing the referenced object with an existing object To replace the referenced object with an existing object 1 Start InSite Editing 2 Navigate to the object with the fragment that you want to edit 3 Place the mouse pointer on the toolbar of the fragment that you want to edit The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame 4 Choose Select different object on the context menu or click the icon l A window for selecting an object opens 302 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Portfolio ot Her How Leasing Works Martin had collaboration problems since his company acquired several other companies Martin sowed his companies problems with Gauss VIP for myo es Mr Murray had to 1 that changed too qt more than 94 milioi got the problem sol P
141. blishing Production view support of time controlled publication delayed release placeholders for object expiration dates m full versioning of content m integrated reference check to avoid dead links or graphics that cannot be displayed Integration with Livelink Enterprise Server Due to the integration of Livelink WCM Server with Livelink Enterprise Server you can add Livelink objects as WCM objects to a WCM managed website These WCM objects are called relators They always refer toa certain version of the Livelink object The WCM object type Livelink relator enables you to integrate a single Livelink object in a website the WCM object type Livelink folder relator is provided for integrating Livelink folders 20 Livelink WCM Server Introduction About this Manual This manual describes the functions of Livelink WCM Server from the point of view of a user who is actively involved in editing or quality assur ance of websites with Livelink WCM Server In addition to this User Manual the following sources provide information Livelink Integration Manual This document explains how to integrate your WCM system with a Livelink system Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual This document explains how to configure and administer WCM systems Moreover it contains a detailed description of the technical concepts of Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server Installation Manual This document describes
142. by a number of properties which can be freely specified via Tools gt Website administration Object categories or in the Admin client An invoice contains for example the information on who will receive the invoice and which amount is to be paid when Accordingly the object category Invoice is characterized by the properties invoice_recipient invoice_amount and payment _deadline When adding a WCM object you can optionally associate the object with an object category It then possesses the properties that have been defined for this category via Tools Website administration Object categories or in the Admin client By means of WCM tags you can embed these properties in websites and use them when searching a website For example this makes it possible to show a customer all outstanding invoices In this chapter you get information on the following aspects of special attributes representation of special attributes in the Metadata dialog box see the following section filtering for special attributes see section Special Attributes in the Object Filter starting on page 412 a statification of objects see section Statification starting on page 413 activating thumbnails for WCM objects see section Activating Thumbnails for Objects starting on page 422 Note For detailed information on integrating special attributes by means of WCM tags refer to chapter 15 Worki
143. c this button is not displayed 226 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Deleting Objects In this section you learn which functions are required for deleting WCM objects The following procedures are described deleting an object that has already been released at least once see the following section m deleting an object that has never been released see section Deleting an Object not yet Released starting on page 229 destroying an object see section Destroying a Released Object starting on page 230 m rejecting deletion of an object see section Rejecting the Deletion of a Released Object starting on page 231 m removing a published object from the Production view see section Removing a Page from the Production View starting on page 232 Deleting a Released Object Objective You want to delete a released object Prerequisites m The object has neither the status submitted nor checked out You can only delete a topic if none of its subordinate objects have the status submitted or checked out Content Client User Manual 227 Chapter 6 m The object has been released at least once by Quality Assurance i e it has a major version number of at least 1 m You can only delete a template if the website contains no objects that use this template To check this choose View gt Template structure m You have the access rights Read and Delete for t
144. c which is stored on your local hard disk or in the network The external file is imported into the WCM system Under certain circumstances objects referenced by this file are also imported m add an object with the direct release right You can add objects that do not have to be submitted to Quality Assurance but can be released directly by the responsible editor The objects must only be submitted to Quality Assurance for initial release Required rights and functional areas You need the following rights and functional areas to add an object by means of the wizard m theaccess rights Read and Create for the topic to which the object is to be added 134 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects m the functional area linked with the object type of the new object To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info The following sections describe how to add an object by means of the wizard Starting the Wizard To start the wizard 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the topic to which you want to add the object 3 Choose Object New from object type or click the appropriate icon E Icon for adding an object on the basis of an object type The wizard starts 4 Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the process of adding the object Specifying Title Object Type and Workflow In the first dialog box you specify the title and obj
145. ce check automatically resolves any inconsistencies between the meta data and the object content Inserting an image Choose Insert Insert Image in the integrated HTML editor to integrate an image in an object If you use WebDAV for editing your objects you cannot only insert image files stored on your local hard disk or a network drive but also images from web servers outside the company network In the Insert Image dialog box click the following icon Icon for inserting an image file via WebDAV Browse Server 208 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Adding References in the Editor Objective You want to add a reference to an object which points to another WCM object in the same website or to an external address Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Change object and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object to which you want to add a reference and check the object out 3 Insert a reference at the desired position in the object content Note Do notuse the tag lt BASE href gt in the head element of the HTML page Using this tag interferes with the reference manage ment of Livelink WCM Server To reference an object from the same website select the target of the reference in the navig
146. ch as the attribute bgcolor to define the back ground color these are copied into the generated template As a result of combining the two templates it may happen that an attribute in the body element is present more than once for example if a back ground color was defined in both templates In that case the setting in the dependent template takes priority and is copied into the generated template 404 Livelink WCM Server Working with Templates Adding Cascading Templates To create a cascading template first add an object in any topic you like For cascading templates make the following settings in the wizard for adding objects Select a template object type e g HTML template Inthe window with the template structure select the desired master template or enter the respective OID in the Template field Editing and Releasing Cascading Templates When working with cascading templates it is important to note the following points changes to a master template do not take effect immedi ately in the dependent templates and the objects that use the dependent templates The dependent templates are not regenerated automatically They are only generated when the master template is released Note If the master template has not been released yet i e has the major version number 0 the changes immediately take effect in the directly dependent templates The other templates in the cascade will only be modifie
147. children applet category code content content_size copyright created_by date_created date_expire date_modified date_released date_released_at deployment_hint deployment_name deployment_path deniavmeant tyne Absolute URL Access rights All subordinate objects Applet Object category Code Content Object size Copyright Author Created on Expiration date Modification date Release date Delayed release Suggested file name String Access control list List String String String String Large integer String User Timestamp Timestamp Timestamp Timestamp Timestamp String String String Strinn Object type Read only Read only Object type Standard Object type Global Read only Object type Read only Read only Standard Read only Read only Read only Standard Global Global Glnhal zl lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 62 Selecting a WCM tag The dialog box shows the metadata of the current object For each meta data item the list provides the corresponding WCM tag the name in the Content client the data type and the metadata type Metadata types include m Standard standard metadata item m Category property from the assigned object category m Object type attribute from the attribute set assigned to the object type 180 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Global global not object specific information e g website t
148. cipal must have the access rights required for editing the object within the activity m Description Enter additional information on the activity 3 Click the OK button The new activity is inserted in the top left window pane 4 Mark the new activity with the mouse and while holding the left mouse button down move it to the desired location 5 To add more activities repeat steps 2 to 4 Step 5 Add end points 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon to deactivate the transition mode 2 Choose Edit Add Release Add Destroy or Add Stop or click one of the appropriate icons Icon for adding the end point Release x Icon for adding the end point Destroy Icon for adding the end point Stop Content Client User Manual 275 Chapter 8 The new end point is inserted in the top left window pane 3 Mark the new end point with the mouse and while holding the left mouse button down move it to the desired location 4 Double click the end point The Edit activity dialog box contains the following information Name This field shows the name of the end point You cannot change this entry Activity type This field shows the type of the activity You cannot change this entry Description In this field you can enter additional information on the end point 5 Click the OK button 6 To add mo
149. command Restore old version in the Log dialog box of the source object only refers to the source object it cannot be applied to its depen dent objects Thus it is not possible to undo changes made to the dependent objects of a source object 240 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Submitting the Source Object Objective You want to submit a source object to Quality Assurance Prerequisites D o m The source object has the status changed rejected or released None of the dependent objects has the status checked out m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the source object Procedure Proceed exactly as for submitting a normal object see section Submit ting an Object starting on page 247 The only difference you have to note is that submitting a source object automatically submits all its dependent objects as well Deleting the Source Object Objective You want to delete a source object Prerequisites The source object has neither the status submitted nor checked out m You have the access rights Read and Delete for the source object Content Client User Manual 241 Chapter 6 Procedure Proceed exactly as for deleting a normal object see section Deleting Objects starting on page 227 The only difference you have to note is that deleting a source object automatically deletes all its dependent
150. company example Phone number fi 555 889 09 t1 55588919 Fig 109 The category training materials in the Livelink system Use the WCM tag VIPLL category Training Materials set Contact Information attribute Phone number set_no 1 item_no 2 to show the mobile phone number of the contact person on the page In case of the employee Joshua Stein who is entered as the contact person this is the phone number 1 898 999 333 360 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Updating a Relator Manually Objective If you have selected the Fixed version radio button for the relator the relator will not be updated automatically when the referenced Livelink object changes You want to update the relator manually Prerequisites The relator has the status changed rejected released or delayed release The Fixed version radio button was selected for the relator m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the relator m You are assigned the functional area Livelink To check your func tional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the Navigation area mark the relator that you want to update 3 Choose View Livelink metadata General Livelink data tab 4 In the Version drop down list click the version of the Livelink object that the relator is to reflec
151. cs books tutorial i18n format decimalFormat html Table 43 Values of the format parameter for the data type Floating point number Content Client User Manual Value Explanation 0 Digit if the digit does not exist O is returned Digit Minus sign comma Grouping separator dot Decimal separator 445 Chapter 15 Value Explanation E Separates mantissa and exponent percent Multiplies by 100 and shows the value in percent u2030 Multiplies by 1000 and shows the value per mill u00A4 Returns the currency symbol depending on the language of the WCM object or the value of the locale parameter u00A4 u00A4 Returns the international currency abbreviation depending on the language of the WCM object or the value of the Locale parameter currency Inserts separators for thousands and decimal places returns the currency symbol depending on the language of the WCM object or the value of the locale parameter The following table provides examples for using the format parameter with the data type Floating point number The examples refer to a WOM tag for a special attribute of type Floating point number anda scale of 4 The language of the WCM object is English Table 44 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Floating point number Value of the Value of the format Output
152. d Points To change the size of an activity a starting point or an end point 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon Fi to deactivate the transition mode 2 Mark the desired element with the left mouse button The element is highlighted by an additional frame 3 Place the mouse pointer on a small box within this frame The mouse pointer changes to a double sided arrow 4 While holding the mouse button down drag the element to the desired size Adding Transitions Note Not all transitions are possible Also the principal assigned to the source activity must have the required access rights for the transition see table Possible transitions in the workflow and required access rights on page 260 The workflow modeler does not check the access rights To add a transition 1 To activate the transition mode click the icon m l 2 Place the mouse pointer on the activity or the starting point to be used as the source of the transition 268 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow The mouse pointer changes to a hand 3 While holding the left mouse button down drag the displayed line to the activity or end point that is to be the target of the transition until this activity or end point is highlighted by an additional frame 4 Release the mouse button 5 To deactivate the transition mode click the icon Lo Note It is also possible to add transit
153. d the access right Read Production is granted by default to the special principal World This setting thus represents a general permission to access the Production view However the general rule that users may only access an object if they have the necessary access rights also applies to the Production view So you can prohibit or restrict this general access at any time by changing the access rights Resetting All Object Specific Access Settings According to the rules of inheritance each object inherits the access settings of the parent topic The settings of the topic may also be inherited As long as access to the object is regulated satisfactorily by the settings for the topic the object does not need any individual access settings see section Inheritance of Access Rights on page 55 If the inherited access rights of an object are changed the chain of inherit ance is interrupted The child object no longer inherits changes to the access settings of the parent topic If necessary you can discard changes in an object s access settings and thereby reintegrate the object in the chain of inheritance Proceed as follows 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object whose access control list you want to edit 3 Choose View Access rights 4 Click the Use access rights of topic button If this object has already inherited the access settings of the parent topi
154. d after the changed template has been released To check the effects of a master template that has been changed but not yet released 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Choose View Template structure In the template structure you can see which templates and objects are dependent on the modified master template and are therefore affected by the change 3 Inthe navigation area mark a dependent template whose layout you want to change Content Client User Manual 405 Chapter 13 4 Choose Object Regenerate page If the Content client is configured accordingly the dependent template is displayed on the basis of the changed master template Note If you use a dynamic deployment system open the Configu ration dialog box choose Dynamic deployment and click Current template in the Template view drop down list You can repeat the process for the other dependent templates and objects Deleting Cascading Templates You can only delete a template from a cascading template structure if there are no dependent templates based on the template that you want to delete There are two ways of ensuring this Deleting all dependent templates First delete all templates that are dependent on the template that you want to delete This deletion must be confirmed by Quality Assurance to ensure that the dependent templates are also deleted from the Production view Only then is it possible to de
155. data type 471 object type 66 special properties 242 submit 241 configuration 107 action list 119 application class 121 basic settings 110 Download applet 113 dynamic deployment 125 editor program for file types 121 InSite Editing 309 integrated HTML editor 114 navigation 117 object attributes 120 toolbar 116 Configuration dialog box 108 configuration file for InSite Editing 309 content display 89 edit 178 edit via InSite Editing 297 in general 39 Content Assembly application examples 324 determine default values 328 enable InSite Editing 332 in general 317 with Content client 325 with InSite Editing 331 Content client configuring 107 customizing 129 Livelink WCM Server help 105 in general 73 introduction 18 log in 75 log out 77 user interface 81 Content Workflow Modeler functions 265 in general 262 install 261 menu bar 265 start 263 toolbar 265 convert compound object 239 in general 233 object 239 copy dependent objects 236 object 162 source object 236 topic 164 country code WCM tag 429 create filter 377 property 487 transition 268 workflow definition 272 created on metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 CSS object type 66 current object 86 customizing 129 through access rights 129 through functional areas 130 through profiles 130 cut 187 Content Client User Manual Index data type boolean value 436 date 436 external URL 436 floating point number 436 formatted text 436 integer 437
156. dd an object The new object s status is changed This status is indicated by the icon two arrows 2 You check out the object in order to edit it The respective file is copied to the local working directory you configured and gets the status checked out This means that no other user can edit the object until you check it in The relevant icon is wg 32 Livelink WCM Server Concepts 3 After editing the object you check it The object again has the status changed You can repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as you like Edit view x Submit a ynoyseyg x 9 oO oy Fig 3 Object statuses in the Edit view 4 You submit the object to Quality Assurance The object thus has the status submitted The relevant icon is red and green split square The changes made in the Edit view now become visible in the QA view An object with the status submitted cannot be checked out for editing Content Client User Manual 33 Chapter 2 QA view J gt Submit n lt gt m Reject Release Fig 4 Object statuses in the QA view 5 The object is checked by Quality Assurance Quality Assurance can either release or reject the object If Quality Assurance rejects the object it is given the status rejected and returned for correction The relevant icon is n red square with exclamation mark You can then check out the object again and ed
157. delayed release m You have the access rights Read Change rights and Change metadata for the object Content Client User Manual 223 Chapter 6 Procedure 1 2 224 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object whose access control list you want to edit Choose View gt Access rights If the principal World is not contained in the access control list click the right mouse button and choose Add World on the context menu The principal World is inserted in the access control list Mark the entry World in the access control list and choose Edit access rights on the context menu Set the desired access rights for the principal World To apply the changes to the Access rights dialog box click the Apply button Click the Save button in the Access rights dialog box Submit the object with the changed access control list to Quality Assurance To do so choose Object gt Submit or click the appro priate icon Icon for submitting an object Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Setting Access Rights for the Production View In Livelink WCM Server you can control access to object versions published in the Production view For the access rights to be considered the access control component Secure Access or a dynamic InSite Editing or WebDAV deployment system must be used for more information re
158. deler workflow modeler for short In the Content client workflow objects can be assigned to WCM objects For general information on the workflow concept of Livelink WCM Server refer to section Workflow on page 30 In this chapter you get information on the following workflow aspects elements of a workflow definition see the following section m installation of the workflow modeler see section Installing the Work flow Modeler on page 261 working with the workflow modeler see section Working with the Workflow Modeler on page 262 creating and editing workflow definitions see section Creating and Editing Workflow Definitions on page 272 m working with WCM objects to which a workflow is assigned see section WCM Objects in the Workflow on page 281 Content Client User Manual 257 Chapter 8 Structure of a Workflow Definition The workflow definitions created with the workflow modeler are saved in the so called XML Process Definition Language XPDL The format XPDL is XML based and is the standard defined by the Workflow Management Coalition WFMC for interchanging process definitions A workflow definition has at least one starting point and at least one end point When an object is forwarded in the workflow and reaches an end point the assignment between WCM object and workflow object is auto matically removed The following types of end points exist m Release When this end poin
159. displayed in the language of the user you can translate it For more information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual m Icon Select a file in GIF format as the icon for displaying the object type in the Content client The selected graphic is copied to the following directories WCM installation directory config vipimages objecttype WCM installation directory admin config vipimages objecttype WCM installation directory website cmsclient images vipimages objecttype Comment Enter any description of the object type Confirm your entries by clicking the Next button Content Client User Manual 469 Chapter 16 Specifying Object Data Type and Additional Settings In this dialog box you determine the object data type and specify addi tional settings New object type Microsoft Internet Explorer Here you specify the object data type a MIME type and the file extensions that are assigned to this object type IF you do not determine the file extensions all file extensions are allowed Also define the created File extension For the object data type Topic it is also required to enter a name For the index file Object data Web document type MIME type File extensions Generated file extension Index file lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 132 Specifying object data type and additional settings for the object type Object data
160. diting Objects Special cases JSP pages and JavaScript code In some cases the WCM system cannot identify references automatically e g in the JSP code fragment String url To solve this problem you can precede the reference with the expressions in the following table Table 13 Expressions for identifying references Expression Application area Code fragment VIPURL This expression can be used in the code wher ever comments are allowed Java String url VIPURL URL of the object JavaScript var url VIPURL URL of the object getVIPURL This expression can be used in the code wher ever method calls and function calls are allowed JavaScript var url getVIPURL URL of the object attribute name VIPURL You have developed a custom JSP tag If the value of an attribute of this JSP tag is to be inter preted as a reference the attribute name must contain the suffix VIPURL Note Each value of an attribute whose name ends with VIPURL is interpreted as a reference This has to be considered when naming attributes JSP lt taglib myTag myAttributeVIPURL URL of the object gt Content Client User Manual 211 Chapter 6 JSP example The following JSP example illustrates the use of expressions for identi fying references lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt VIPTITLE lt title gt lt static String url VIPURL
161. do not occur in the generated pages The Mozilla browser does not support the zoom functions Content source In this mode you can view the object content in the right window pane as plain text In the Configuration dialog box you can determine which object types are to be displayed in the modes Displaying the Object Preview When you log in to the WCM system a browser window for the object preview always opens automatically The object preview displays the page that the current deployment system generates for the object selected in the navigation area If you have for example choosen Edit view under Tools View you see the view of the object generated by an Edit deploy ment system Choose View gt name of the deployment system to display the view of a different deployment system in the object preview the current deployment system is checked in the menu This way you can easily check how the object that you edited currently looks in the QA or Production view Content Client User Manual 89 Chapter 3 Note If you select different objects in rapid succession the object preview may no longer by synchronized with the Content client In this case select the current object again Object Preview on the Basis of a Dynamic Deployment System Deployment systems generate pages for the WCM objects stored in the database These pages can be displayed in a browser Dynamic deployment
162. e released Edit changed Edit deleted Delete delayed release Edit submitted QA Whether the transition from one activity to another activity or to an end point is allowed depends on whether it is possible to perform the respec tive staging action For example the transition from the activity Delete to the end point Release is not possible The following table provides an overview of the possible transitions within the workflow and the required access rights Content Client User Manual 259 Chapter 8 Table 15 Possible transitions in the workflow and required access rights Transition Required access rights Edit gt Edit Read QA Read Change object Delete Read Delete Change object Change metadata Release Read Release Change object Change metadata Destroy Read Release Change object Change metadata Stop Read QA gt Edit Read Release QA Read Release Read Release Stop Read Delete Edit Read Release Delete Read Destroy Read Release Stop Read 260 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Installing the Workflow Modeler A separate installation of the workflow modeler is only required if you want to use it as a separate application outside the WCM system e g without starting the Content client or if Java Web Start is not installed on your computer Note For information on the inst
163. e name of the parent topic file referencing the subordinate files This name is used by the relevant deployment system for the generated topic file even if a different suggestion for the file name exists in the topic s metadata Enter the respective file name Confirm your entries by clicking the Next button Making the Assignments of the Object Type In this dialog box you can assign the new object type a functional area and an attribute set t New object type Microsoft Internet Explorer E a Oj x Please define the required functional area You can also assign an attribute set to the object type Functional area Attribute lt none gt set Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 133 Making assignments for the object type Functional area Assign a functional area to the object type Only principals with this functional area can add check out and check in WCM objects of this type Click one of the available functional areas in the drop down list 474 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Attribute set You can assign an attribute set to the object type The attributes of the attribute set are displayed on the Attributes tab of the Metadata dialog box Click one of the available attribute sets in the drop down list Add the object type by clicking the OK button Editing an Object Type To change the settings of an object type 1 Choose
164. e 450 The format Parameter The format parameter enables you to format object information The interpretation of the parameter depends on the data type In the following the possible values of the format parameter will be introduced for the supported data types Content Client User Manual 441 Chapter 15 Values of the format parameter for dates Note The following description is limited to the most important values Detailed information on the formatting options for the data types Date Time and Time stamp is available at http java sun com j2se 1 4 2 docs api java text SimpleDateFormat html Table 40 Values of the format parameter for the data types Date Time and Time stamp Value Explanation Presentation D Day in year Number d Day in month Number E Day in week Text Example The week day is Thursday In this case E EE and EEE return Thu EEEE returns Thursday M Month Number or text depending on the number of letters Example The month is September In this case M returns 9 MM returns 09 MMM returns Sep and MMMM returns September W Week in month Number W Week in year Number y Year Number Example The year is 2003 In this case y yy and yyy return 03 yyyy returns 2003 H Hour 0 23 Number k Hour 1 24 Number 442 Livelink WCM Server Working
165. e Editing shows how objects can be edited directly in the website Chapter 10 Working with Assembled Objects introduces the func tions of Content Assembly and explains how to edit assembled objects Chapter 12 Finding Objects and Editing Them Together shows how to use the search functions of the Content client Chapter 13 Working with Templates describes the special features of WCM templates Livelink WCM Server Introduction Chapter 14 Working with Special Attributes explains the special attributes Chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags shows how to use WCM tags for integrating object information into web pages Chapter 16 Managing Websites in the Content Client introduces the functions the Content client offers for managing websites m Appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML describes how to use the four XML object types For this chapter a sound knowledge of XML and Livelink WCM Server is required Typographic Conventions The following conventions are used in the text to draw attention to program elements etc Element Program interface such as menu commands windows dialog boxes field and button names Font or symbol Menu Entry Examples File gt Create Paths to directories file and directory names Drive Directory File name Content Client User Manual D WCM admin bat 23 Chapter 1 Quotation
166. e changes become visible to other users This mecha nism guarantees structured work procedures for editing website objects and thereby ensures consistency of the company s data Separation of layout and content Thanks to its separation of layout and content Livelink WCM Server helps you implement corporate design guidelines for a consistent company wide layout Each page in a website can be assigned a defined template which can however be changed at any time This template contains the layout information for the page Changes to the template result in fully automatic changes in the layout of all pages concerned In other words you change the layout in one place only the template and your entire website is automatically updated by Livelink WCM Server The template is a freely designable page with placeholders for information from the object s metadata and for the actual content During page gener ation Livelink WCM Server automatically merges the template and the content Content Client User Manual 19 Chapter 1 Up to Date Content Up to date information is the key to customers purchase decisions and thus an essential requirement for enterprise portals To ensure that website content is up to date Livelink WCM Server offers a number of functions content management during the entire life cycle and throughout all phases of the staging which consists of editing Edit view quality assurance QA view and pu
167. e checked out Finds objects that have been checked out by you have created Finds objects that have been added by you have been rejected edit content Finds objects with the status rejected for which you have the access right Change object have been rejected edit metadata have been submitted to me Finds objects with the status rejected for which you have the access right Change metadata Finds objects with the status submitted or deleted for which you have the access right Release have expired and that can edit Finds objects that have exceeded their expira tion date that are in the status released changed or rejected and for which you have the access rights Change object and Change metadata Click the desired filter in the drop down list The filter hitlist opens automatically 370 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Search beginning with topic InternetSite en freleased lt 2 a IT Apply action to all objects Objects found 15 Type or Title a Path status 9 Careers jen oO ER 10 Company Info jen n 22 E mail fen Company Info Services oO 24 Events jenjNews oO BS 11 General Templates fen 6 Ey 12 Home jen Be 13 News jen ial 23 Phone fen Company Info Services ag 59 Press Release fenjWorkflows oO 17 Products fen C
168. e implicitly as a result of the assignment to groups and roles To search for a principal 1 In the Filter field enter the first letter s of the principal that you want to find If you also want to search for implicitly assigned users clear the check box display only users directly assigned to the website Note If you want to add a group role you can enter two search expressions separated by a space The first expression is used for searching the group the second for searching the role Click the Search button The selection list shows only those principals that match the search criterion entered Content Client User Manual 219 Chapter 6 3 From the restricted selection list select the principal you want to add to the access control list 4 To display the full selection list again clear the search criterion from the field and click the Search button Setting the Access Rights of a Principal Objective You want to set the access rights for an object Note Please note that the access settings you make for a topic are valid for all subordinate objects of the topic for which no separate access rights have been set Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Change rights and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of
169. e in the Production view on all pages of the website 9 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all other teasers that you want to change Task Replace Teasers It is your task to replace an old teaser with a new one As all other teasers the new teaser was saved as a WCM object of type HTML page in the topic fragments You should make the changes directly in the template Herotemplate to ensure that the new teaser is displayed on all pages of the website Procedure 1 2 308 Start InSite Editing Choose Select object on the context menu or click the corresponding icon Select object A window with the topic structure opens Select the template Herotemplate In the left window pane the three teasers are displayed Place the mouse pointer on the toolbar of the fragment whose content you want to replace The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame Choose Select different object on the context menu or click the icon 4 A window showing all objects below the topic fragments opens Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Martin had collaboration problems since his company acquired several other companies Martin sowed his companies problems with Gauss VIP for myo es Portfolio ot Her How Leasing Works Hero leasing is based entirely on the concept that you pay for the amount by F Metadata Microsoft Internet Explorer ca bawaan Mr Murray had to 1 that
170. e of the dynamic page is already executed during the asynchronous generation of the page and the result usually HTML code is saved Statifying pages means freezing the object state and publishing it in the Production view of a website For example in the case of a page containing navigation elements the current navigation status at the time of publication is recorded in the form of static elements on the page Changes in the topic structure released subsequently are not reflected in the statified navigation The dynamic page elements are updated only when the page is regenerated or republished Statification is generally unsuitable for personalized pages as these pages have to react dynami cally i e at runtime to the user data entered Content Client User Manual 413 Chapter 14 Statification of pages depends on various conditions Configuration of the deployment system In the Admin client you determine whether statification is to be performed for all objects of the website for no objects or depending on the object In the Admin client the check box Analyze statified pages can be selected During this analysis the OIDs for the WCM URLs used on the pages are saved in the database If the URL of a referenced object changes the respective pages are automatically regenerated and statified For detailed information on the configuration of deployment systems refer to the online help of the Admin client Object t
171. e of the objects and thus of the website content This view thus performs the control function between editing in the Edit view and publication in the Production view Reference Cross references and links managed by Livelink WCM Server between the objects in a website are known as references Only references that are physically incorporated in the HTML page are called hyperlinks Relator Due to the integration of web content management and Livelink you can add Livelink objects as WCM objects in a WCM managed website These WCM objects are called relators They always refer to a certain version of a Livelink object For integrating a single Livelink object the WCM system provides the object type Livelink relator For integrating Livelink folders the WCM object type Livelink folder relator is provided Release Staging action of Livelink WCM Server Quality Assurance checks whether the content and the form of a submitted object meet the quality standards of the company If so the object is released The release transmits the quality assured version of the object to the Production view and thus makes it available to the end user in the published website Role Collection of users similar to a user group for which specific access rights can be defined The user role is usually defined in terms of tasks whereas user groups are generally tied to organizational units such as departments or projects Server Proce
172. e submitted together with the object and click the Next button If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can submit the object and send a message to the e mail addresses saved in the metadata item E mail QA 5 Click the OK button The object has the status submitted and can be checked by Quality Assurance Content Client User Manual 249 Chapter 7 Undoing Submission of an Object Objective You want to undo the action of submitting an object you have edited This is useful for example if you find errors in the submitted object and want to correct them Prerequisites The object has the status submitted You were the last person to submit the object You have the access rights Read Change object and or Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 2 3 250 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the submitted object Choose Object Reject or click the appropriate icon Icon for rejecting an object The object now has the status rejected You can check out the object and edit it again Livelink WCM Server Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects Releasing or Rejecting an Object Livelink WCM Server defines Quality Assurance as the control function between Edit view and Production view Quality Assurance decides whether an object meets the company s quali
173. e that this template is not assigned to an object Use the Template structure view to check this Cascading Templates Cascading templates make it possible to combine various templates within a website to form nested structures This enables you to build up a hierarchical template structure in which the individual templates are the dependent objects of a higher level template The advantage of cascading templates is that the basic features of all pages in a website such as company logo text color background color layout rules only have to be defined once in the master template You can then derive the templates of the individual topics or object types from the master template If you change the master template this change automat ically takes effect in the dependent templates and hence in the objects that use the dependent templates Content Client User Manual 401 Chapter 13 By using the Metadata dialog box it is possible to assign objects to a different template You can do this with cascading templates as well It is also possible to add templates that are not cascading i e that are not themselves based on another template Structure of a Cascading Template Master template InternetSite Dependent template VIPCONTENT pac VIPCONTENT InternetSite VIPCONTENT PREV NEXT Fig 123 Example of a cascading template 402 Livelink WCM Server Working w
174. e the elements that can be configured The individual settings of an element are displayed in the right window pane and can be edited there You can make settings for the following areas basic settings of the profile see section Configuring the Basic Settings starting on page 110 m toolbar of the Content client see section Configuring the Toolbar on page 116 108 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client navigation see section Configuring the Navigation starting on page 117 action list see section Configuring the Action List starting on page 119 object dependent attributes see section Configuring Object Attributes starting on page 120 application classes see section Configuring Application Classes starting on page 121 dynamic deployment see section Configuring the Dynamic Deploy ment on page 125 This chapter describes how to work with profiles It also summarizes the different possibilities to tailor the Content client to your needs Adding a Profile To add a profile 1 2 Choose Tools gt Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box Click the New profile button In the Profile name field the entry New profile is displayed Overwrite the entry New profile with the name of your new profile Do one of the following m Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box For each profile you ca
175. e three teasers are displayed 306 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Real Heroes Martin had collaboration problems since his company acquired several other companies Martin solved his companies problems with Gauss VIP for mySAP Enterprise Portal New Heroes Mir Murray had to manage too much information that changed too quickly An information flood of more than 94 million addresses But Mr Murray got the problem solver VIP for Enterprise Portals Batter Heroes Ft Sylvia had customer relationship problems But she soled her problems with Gauss VIP for IBM WebSphere Enterprise Portals No tales no mystery Just enterprise business solutions at work Fig 90 Teasers on the website HeroLeasing 4 Place the mouse pointer on the fragment that you want to edit The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame 5 Choose Check out on the context menu or click the icon g Depending on the configuration of the Content client the referenced WCM object is opened in the integrated HTML editor or in the associ ated editor program 6 Edit the object in the respective editor 7 Check the object back in to the WCM system Choose Check in on the context menu or click the icon es 8 To submit the changed object to Quality Assurance choose Submit on the context menu Content Client User Manual 307 Chapter 9 After the object has been released by Quality Assurance the changed teaser is availabl
176. e to determine how the code of the object and if existing of its template s is to be statified This requires that object dependent statification is set for the deployment system in the Admin client Statification of JSP Objects Statification of JSP objects is object dependent if the special attribute Statify page has the value on or local 416 on This value causes the content of the object to be converted into static code The same applies to all templates assigned to the object provided their content is inserted into the page that the deployment system generates for the object Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes m local Regarding the body element this value causes only the content of the object to be converted into static code Additionally the content of the entire head element which may consist of the merged content of the head elements of the template cascade is converted into static code If you do not enter a value for the attribute Statify page in the Metadata dialog box no statification is performed Example In this example the object JSP page is assigned a template cascade consisting of JSP template and master JSP template The following table describes four sample configurations for the value of the special attribute Statify page and the respective results Table 33 Sample configuration for the special attribute Statify page
177. ect 339 object 134 object based on object type 134 object based on template 148 object category 486 object type 467 profile 109 reference in Content client 204 reference in editor 209 reference in integrated HTML editor 206 relator 341 relator with Livelink document 350 template 399 application class 121 add 122 delete 124 edit 124 ASP page object type 66 ASP template object type 66 ASP topic object type 66 assembled object application examples 324 determine default values 328 edit 324 in general 317 object data type 471 object type 66 assembled object create add object category 318 create template 322 assign workflow 282 asynchronous actions 101 attribute add to attribute set 483 515 Index create 480 remove 483 attribute set 409 add 479 add attribute 483 assign to object type 475 delete 484 edit 480 functions 478 manage 477 new attribute 480 remove attribute 483 author metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 B basic settings configure 110 boolean value data type 436 broken links 203 Cc cascading template 401 add 405 delete 406 edit 405 release 405 structure 402 CGI script object type 66 change password 78 changed object status 35 check in 174 check out object 168 undo 173 checked out object status 35 client 27 client server technology 27 516 combination operators 390 comparators 385 comparison values 388 compound object convert 239 delete 241 edit 240 metadata 242 object
178. ect type of the new object If you want to add an object on the basis of an existing file select the desired file You can also assign a workflow to the object Content Client User Manual 135 Chapter 5 Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer a iol x Specify a title for the object and select the desired object type IF the object is to be created from an existing file also specify this file You may also l lt assign a workflow to the object Title File Browse Workflow lt none gt asp page g ASP template 2 ASP topic a Assembled object ia CGI script i Compound object Excel document aj Es Form instance Form template a Frame x lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 44 Specifying title type and workflow of a new object m Title Enter a name for the object The title is used to identify the object and is displayed both in the header and in the navigation area Entering a title is mandatory Note Titles must not be more than 255 characters long Also you should adapt the length of the title in such a way that the resulting file name meets the requirements of your operating system Under Windows the absolute path to a topic and a generated page may not be longer than 240 and 260 characters respectively File lf you want to use an existing file as the basis for the new object click the Browse button to select the file 136 Liveli
179. ed Objects To edit the marked objects choose the respective command from the menu or click the appropriate icon in the toolbar e g Submit For each object selected Livelink WCM Server checks whether the action can be performed This depends on the following factors m the object status of the individual object m your access rights for the individual objects certain object properties such as Direct release Notes m Objects on which the action cannot be performed are removed from the selection f an error occurs while the action is being performed the entire action is canceled Changes that have already been made are undone 372 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together m You can use the filter while an asynchronous action is in progress If the filter hitlist contains objects that are also affected by the asyn chronous action the data of these objects e g the status might not be up to date This might lead to errors if you perform an action on the filtered objects a A filter hitlist may contain a compound object with its dependent objects You should not perform any actions on these objects as this may lead to errors in the Content client Examples of Using the Standard Filters In the following the use of the standard filters in the My objects view and in the object filter is described on the basis of a simple example Example Submitting Changed Objects Objective You wan
180. ed in the Internet intranet or extranet The following figure illustrates the different staging steps and the actions that realize the transitions between these steps Content Client User Manual 29 Chapter 2 New object Edit view QA view Production view gt Submit or amp Release delete Editing Quality Assurance Public access Reject Destroy Fig 1 The staging of Livelink WCM Server Workflow To extend the predefined editing and publication stages of WCM objects by custom workflow steps you can assign a workflow to a WCM object Depending on the processes in your company this workflow may contain several Edit and QA steps When the workflow is created in the workflow modeler certain users are assigned to the workflow steps Only these users are allowed to edit the respective objects within these workflow steps Of course the users also need sufficient object rights After editing the WCM object the user simply selects one of the predefined workflow steps in order to forward the object to the next user or to return it to the previous workflow step The normal staging actions submit reject release etc are not available The necessary staging transitions are automatically performed in the background 30 Livelink WCM Server Concepts The following diagram illustrates an example workflow Newobject Editor No image required Change text Add image
181. ed out see section Editing Object Content Again starting on page 184 undoing changes made to an object see section Undoing Changes starting on page 186 moving an object to a different location in the topic structure of the website see section Moving an Object starting on page 187 updating an object that has reached its expiration date see section Updating an Expired Object starting on page 189 replacing an object with an external file see section Replacing the Content of an Object starting on page 190 Content Client User Manual 177 Chapter 6 Editing Object Content Objective You want to edit an existing object in your website Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to edit and check the object out Depending on the configuration of the Content client the object is opened in the integrated HTML editor or in the associated editor program 3 Edit the object in the respective editor 4 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system The object has the status changed 5 To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate
182. efined in the first step into the template by means of WOM tags In principle the body section of the template Partnertemplate looks as follows 326 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects lt body gt lt table width 100 border 0 cellspacing 2 cellpadding 3 gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt div align center gt lt center gt lt table border 0 cellspacing 3 cellpadding 3 gt lt tr gt lt td align center class frame dark gt lt b gt VIPPARTNERNAME edit on default on lt b gt lt td gt lt td rowspan 3 valign middle align center class frame dark gt VIPLOGO edit begin filter topic 8 thumbnails on lt img src VIPLOGO default on border 0 width 150 height 73 gt VIPLOGO edit end lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td align center class Lightgrey gt VIPSLOGAN edit on default on lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td align center class rahmen gt VIPPARTNERURL edit begin default on lt a href VIPPARTNERURL target _blank gt VIPPARTNERURL lt a gt VIPPARTNERURL edit end default on lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td class frame valign top gt lt table border 0 cellpadding 8 cellspacing 0 gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td valign top gt lt b gt VIPINTRODUCTION edit on default on lt br gt lt br gt lt b gt VIPPARTNERDESCRIPTION edit on default on lt td gt lt tr gt lt tbody gt lt table gt lt td gt lt td valig
183. ein is the substitute of mmoreno who is entered as substitute for cerdmann jstein takes over as the substitute for mmoreno However as mmoreno jstein cannot take over as the substitute for cerdmann To work with your own user data after having acted as substitute exit the Content client and log in again with your user data Content Client User Manual 79 Chapter 3 Information on the Logged in User The Content client provides a dialog box showing all information on the logged in user To open this dialog box choose Tools Login info Login info Microsoft Internet Explorer Ioj xf General User ID jstein Name Joshua Stein E mail jstein company example Substitute role assumed by mmoreno Language English USA websites CompanyIntranet InternetSite Groups Marketing Roles Trainee Functional areas Access rights dialog Advanced Basic Direct release Dynamic Close Help Fig 19 The Login info dialog box 80 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client The dialog box contains all information on the logged in user that is avail able in the WCM system In addition to the general user information name user ID e mail address and language setting you can see at a glance which websites groups roles and functional areas you are assigned to The dialog box also shows whether you are logged in as the substitute of
184. elink metadata dialog box 355 Livelink object add as WCM object 339 Livelink relator 339 add 341 add with document 350 delete 362 edit content 354 edit metadata 355 integrate metadata 358 object data type 471 object type 68 update manually 361 Livelink WCM Server staging 29 system architecture 27 workflow 30 log 103 log in 75 log out 77 login information 80 M major version 87 manage attribute sets 477 object categories 485 object types 466 websites 465 menu favorites 85 menu bar Content client 81 workflow modeler 265 metadata compound object 242 edit 193 edit metadata of several objects 196 in general 42 integrate via WCM tags 428 521 Index source object 236 special attributes 409 standard metadata 43 micro version 87 MIME type 472 minor version 87 modification date metadata item 44 WCM tag 429 modified by metadata item 44 WCM tag 429 move activity 267 dependent objects 236 end point 267 object 187 source object 236 starting point 267 transition 269 my objects introduction 97 use 366 my worklist view 98 N navigation configure 117 navigation area 81 new application class 122 attribute 480 attribute set 479 cascading template 405 filter 377 folder relator 346 Livelink object as WCM object 339 object 134 object based on object type 134 522 object based on template 148 object category 486 object type 467 profile 109 property 487 reference in Content client 204 reference in editor
185. epart ment is based on the template DepartmentStore which is based on the template Company The highest level template in the cascade the template Company has been changed It is your task to check these changes and their effect on the dependent templates and objects and release them afterwards This presupposes that a dynamic deployment system has been config ured for the website in the Admin client For further information refer to the online help of the Admin client Proceed as follows 1 Choose View name of the dynamic deployment system 2 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 3 In the Configuration dialog box make the following settings for the dynamic deployment m Deployment view Production view Template view Current template The published version of the objects on the basis of the changed template is displayed in the object preview 4 Browse through the website and check the effects of the changed template Company 5 After you have checked the changes you can release or reject the template Content Client User Manual 91 Chapter 3 Displaying the Object Content in the Editor Choose Object Display content to open the object in the editor you have specified for objects of this type in the Configuration dialog box This action does not change the status of the object This means that the object is not barred for write access by other
186. er relator remains unchanged If an object is added to the Livelink folder a new relator representing this object is not automati cally created However the relator for an object will be deleted if the object is removed from the Livelink folder You can adapt the relator manually via the Livelink metadata dialog box see section Modifying Livelink Metadata on page 355 Confirm your entries by clicking the OK button Content Client User Manual 349 Chapter 11 Entering a remark In the following dialog box you may enter information for the logs of the individual relators Confirm your entries by clicking the OK button The WCM system creates the relators and shows them in the Navigation area Their status is changed For the relators to become visible in the published website you must submit them After this the relators must be released by Quality Assur ance Adding a Relator Together with the Associated Livelink Document Objective You want to integrate a relator in the WCM system which refers to a file which does not yet exist as a document in the Livelink system Together with the relator you want to add this file as a new document in Livelink A wizard guides you through this process Notes Livelink objects that you add in the Content client together with the rela tors will always be deleted when the associated relator is destroyed You cannot use the Content client to add folders in Livelink
187. erated page the title of the referenced object is used for the link text Table 45 Examples for using the type parameter Parameterized WCM tag Generated URL VIPNEWS_IMAGE type img lt img src title title of the referenced object gt VIPNEWS DATASHEET type href lt a href gt title of the referenced object lt a gt Enabling Functions The following parameters are provided for enabling special functions filter see the following section thumbnails see section The thumbnails Parameter on page 452 default see section The default Parameter on page 452 required see section The required Parameter on page 453 label see section The label Parameter on page 453 option_id and option_mode see section The option_id and option_mode Parameters on page 454 The filter Parameter For the data types Object content Object source Object URL and OID which represent references to other WCM objects you can use the filter parameter to limit the number of objects to be selected The syntax of the filter expression corresponds to the syntax used by the object filter in the Content client Content Client User Manual 451 Chapter 15 Note The value of the filter parameter must always be enclosed in quotes example filter topic 5 Otherwise problems may occur when the filter expression is evaluated If the filter expression
188. ers 9 InSite Editing and 10 Working with Assembled Objects Parameterized WCM Tags WCM tags with parameters are called parameterized WCM tags and are formed according to the following pattern lt VIPTAG gt lt parameter1 gt lt valuel gt lt parameterN gt lt valueN gt You can enclose the parameter value in double or single quotes If the value does not contain any spaces the quotes are not required 440 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Parameters in WCM tags fulfill multiple tasks Parameters are provided for the following purposes m changing the formatting of the integrating object information on the generated page see the following section enabling functions see section Enabling Functions on page 451 m referencing an object see section Referencing Objects on page 457 for InSite Editing see section Parameters for InSite Editing on page 458 for Content Assembly see section Parameters for Content Assembly on page 461 Formatting the Integrated Information In order to determine how and in which language the object information integrated in the generated page by means of the WCM tag is displayed you can use the following parameters format see the following section m locale see section The locale Parameter on page 449 m encoding see section The encoding Parameter on page 450 m type see section The type Parameter on pag
189. ersion of the Livelink folder relator 348 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client m Livelink ID Livelink ID of the selected folder The Livelink ID is composed of the name and the ID of the folder in the Livelink system You cannot change this entry m Update Edit version automatically f you click this radio button the Edit view of the Livelink folder relator will be automatically adapted whenever the metadata of the associated Livelink folder change If an object is added to the Livelink folder a new relator representing this object is automatically created If an object is removed from the Livelink folder the associated relator will be deleted For the changes to become visible in the published website you must submit the changed relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance Note A relator can only be updated automatically if its status is either changed rejected released or delayed release If this requirement is not met use the appropriate staging action to change the relator s status After this you can adapt the relator to the modified Livelink object by choosing Object gt Synchronize Fixed version f you click this radio button the Livelink folder relator will be based on the current version of the Livelink folder When the folder s metadata change in the Livelink system the associated Livelink fold
190. ess rights Read and Create for the topic to which you want to add the WCM object of type Workflow m You are assigned the functional area Workflow or the functional area your WCM administrator has provided for adding workflow objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Step 1 Add workflow object Add a WCM object of type Workflow Step 2 Check out the workflow object Check out the new workflow object 272 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow The workflow modeler opens You can now start to create the workflow definition The new workflow definition already contains a starting point If you do not want to add additional starting points proceed with step 4 Step 3 Add starting points 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon to deactivate the transition mode 2 Choose Edit Add Start or click the appropriate icon Icon for adding a starting point The new starting point is inserted in the top left window pane 3 Mark the new starting point with the mouse and while holding the left mouse button down move it to the desired location 4 Double click the starting point The Edit activity dialog box contains the following information Name Shows the name of the starting point Start You cannot change this entry Activity type This field shows the type of the activity You canno
191. ew Content Client User Manual 375 Chapter 12 The Filter Editor Note To work with the filter editor you require the functional areas Filter standard and Filter edit To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info The filter editor helps you create custom filters with freely definable criteria Stored filters are added to the drop down list of the object filter In contrast to the standard filters you can edit and delete user defined filters To open the filter editor 1 Choose View Object filter to open the object filter 2 Click the Filter editor icon in the navigation area 2 Icon for opening the filter editor The filter editor opens in a separate window 4 Filter editor Microsoft Internet Explorer Filter definition Save Delete Reset Cancel Help Fig 113 The filter editor 376 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together The following functions are available to you creating user defined filters by means of a wizard see the following section m changing user defined filters see section Editing Custom Filters starting on page 383 m deleting user defined filters see section Deleting a Custom Filter starting on page 385 using the filter expression language for creating user defined filters see section The Filter Expression Language starting on page 385 Creating a Custom Filter A wizard assi
192. ew the object categories of the current website choose Tools gt Website administration gt Object categories The Object categories dialog box opens The object categories are displayed in a list in the left window pane To view the properties of an object category select the object category in the list Immediately after the installation of Livelink WCM Server there are no object categories The following functions are available to you m adding object categories see the following section m adding properties to existing object categories or deleting properties see section Editing an Object Category on page 487 deleting object categories see section Deleting an Object Category on page 490 Content Client User Manual 485 Chapter 16 Note If the proxy Content servers assigned to the respective website use separate data storages changes to object categories must also be saved there For this reason the system checks whether these proxy Content servers are available and whether the JDBC pools assigned can be used If this is not the case you cannot save the changes to the object categories Please refer to the Livelink WCM Server Adminis trator Manual for additional information Adding an Object Category To add an object category 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration gt Object categories The Object categories dialog box opens 2 Choose New object category on the context menu or click
193. ew topic with the name of the ZIP file If the check box is not selected the new WCM objects will be added directly below the current topic a Import dependent files only f you select this check box you must enter the name of the start file or start directory in the field Start file for import If you enter the name of a directory the entire structure below this directory will be imported Otherwise only the files that are recursively linked with the start file are imported 4 Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object 160 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Specifying Title and Object Type In this dialog box you specify the title and object type of the new object Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x Please enter a title for the object and select the desired object type Title EB ASP topic Ba Compound object Ea Frame topic E Herotopic ER JSP topic E PHP topic Topic lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 57 Specifying title and type when importing from a ZIP file Title Enter a name for the object The title is used to identify the object and is displayed both in the header and in the navigation area Entering a title is mandatory Note Titles
194. f the current object is displayed in the object preview If you do not make any settings here the view corresponding to the type of the dynamic deployment system is displayed by default If the deployment system is a Production deployment system for example the Production view is shown Template view specifies whether the current version of the template in the Edit view or the released version of the template is used for generating the HTML page If you do not make any settings here the released version of the template is used by default User view makes it possible to display objects from the point of view of acertain user The current version of the objects in the Production view is displayed including all changes the respec tive user has made Also displayed are all changes that other users made before the object was edited by the selected user Enter the ID of the desired user in the field Note Which changes are displayed also depends on the selected deployment view For example the changes of the selected user are only visible in the QA view after the object has been submitted Time view makes it possible to display the status the objects had at a certain point in time Enter a date with time in the field Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the desired date 126 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Note The respective pages are generated from the source code of t
195. f you do not use InSite Editing for a longer period of time an error message due to a session timeout of the JSP engine or the applica tion server may occur In this case restart your browser Your WCM administrator can modify the timeout value of the JSP engine or the application server m You cannot use InSite Editing for frame objects Editing Object Content via InSite Editing InSite Editing enables you to edit the content of objects directly in the website The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for this purpose The object must be assigned a template in which the edit parameter is set for the WCM tag VIPCONTENT see chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags and section The edit Parameter on page 458 o 6 The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object If you move the mouse over the object s content it is highlighted by a red frame This frame is only displayed if the content can be edited Content Client User Manual 297 Chapter 9 To edit the content of the object 1 2 Start InSite Editing Navigate to the object whose content you want to edit The content is highlighted by a red frame To check out the object choose Check out on the context menu or click the icon in the upper right corner of the frame Depending on the configuration of the C
196. fer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual Unlimited read access in the Production view Read access in the Production view can be permitted on a general basis i e without login Make sure that the access right Read Production for the special principal World is set to permitted The object can thus be read by any user who can access the Production view If the Production view is accessible on the Internet for example all Internet users can open the object in their browsers without logging in Limited read access in the Production view Access to the object versions published in the Production view can be limited e g restricted to certain user groups In this case the access right Read Production is not allowed for the entry World It is only granted to the desired users groups or roles This means the object can only be read by the authorized principals after they have logged in Here too the access settings are in principle inherited by child objects Only a change in the access settings for an individual object interrupts the chain of inheritance Thus if you permit unrestricted access in the Produc tion view to a particular topic in your website this access setting also applies to all child objects for which no individual settings have been made see section Inheritance of Access Rights on page 55 Content Client User Manual 225 Chapter 6 Note When a website is create
197. fferent file types The assignment between an application e g Word and any number of file types is called application class The file types are represented by their respective extension e g doc for the file type Word document Content Client User Manual 121 Chapter 4 To manage application classes open the Configuration dialog box via Tools gt Configuration and select the tree element Application classes in the left window pane In the right window pane you can add edit and delete application classes Adding an Application Class To add an application class 1 Mark the tree element Application classes in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box 2 Click the New application class button in the right window pane Application classes Application class New application class 2 z New application class Name New application class 2 File extensions Application Browse Apply Reset Delete application class Fig 41 Adding an application class 3 In the Name field enter a name for the application class 4 Click the Add button 122 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client LIT x Script Prompt Enter new file extension Fig 42 Entering the file extension for an application class 5 Enter the extension of the file type to which you want to assign an application and click the OK button The file extension is added to t
198. fined as follows from 10 10 S to 10 _10 S with p precision and s scale Example A precision of 5 with a scale of 3 results in a value range of 99 999 to 99 999 5 Click the OK button The new attribute is added to the attribute set 6 Click the Apply button 482 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Adding Attributes To add existing attributes to an attribute set 1 5 Choose Tools Website administration gt Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens Mark the desired attribute set in the left window pane Choose Add attribute on the context menu or click the corresponding icon ri Icon for adding an attribute The Add attribute dialog box opens Mark the attributes that you want to add and click the OK button The selected attributes are added to the attribute set Click the Apply button Removing Attributes from an Attribute Set To remove an attribute from an attribute set 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens Mark the desired attribute set in the left window pane Inthe right window pane mark the attributes that you want to remove from the attribute set Choose Remove attribute on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon ri Icon for removing an attribute from an attribute set Content Client User Manual 483 C
199. flow definition will be closed Open Opens an existing workflow definition An 2 already open workflow definition will be closed Close Closes the current workflow definition Reload Reloads the current workflow definition from the file system All unsaved changes will be lost Save H Saves the current workflow definition Save as 5 Saves the current workflow definition in the file a system A dialog box for selecting the storage location opens Export as PNG an Saves the current workflow definition in PNG image i format Properties Opens a dialog box for entering a title and a description for the workflow definition Page setup Opens a dialog box for configuring the page settings for printing the workflow definition Content Client User Manual 265 Chapter 8 Add Stop Command Icon Function Print Printing the graphical representation of work F flow definitions Exit Closes the current workflow definition and quits the workflow modeler Edit menu gt Add Start Adds a new starting point gt Add activity Adds a new activity Add Release Adds an end point of type Release Add Destroy gt i Adds an end point of type Destroy Adds an end point of type Stop View menu gt Original size Restores the original size of the display A Zoom in 2 Increases magnification of the display P Zoom out Decreases magnification of the dis
200. flow modeler installation directory Starting the Workflow Modeler via the Content Client Via Java Web Start For starting the workflow modeler via the Content client Java Web Start version 1 4 2 must be installed on your computer Java Web Start is avail able for download from Sun Microsystems at http java sun com products javawebstart If Java Web Start is not installed on your computer a window with a link for downloading Java Web Start automatically opens the first time the workflow modeler is started Additionally select the check boxes Use Download applet and Use Java Web Start in the Configuration dialog box Tools gt Configuration The workflow modeler will now start automatically when a WCM object of type Workflow is checked out In order to open the workflow modeler without checking out a WCM object choose Tools Workflow modeler Content Client User Manual 263 Chapter 8 When starting the workflow modeler for the first time a security warning appears You are asked to accept the certificate for the workflow modeler Security Warning 3 xj amp This application is requesting unrestricted access to your local machine and network Do you want to install and run Content Workflow Modeler en Signed and distributed by Gauss Interprise AG Publisher authenticity verified by VeriSign Inc Caution Gauss Interprise AG asserts that this contentis safe You should only install and run
201. for an individual object type click it in the list Object types Name 2 ASP page amp ASP template ASP topic Assembled object CGI script Compound object Word document Other Form instance Form template Frame Frame topic GIF image HTML page JavaScript JPEG image ISP page JSP template JSP topic n Livelink relator PDF document PHP page PHP template E PHP topic z Pros PP SE OPPO Rm WE Dy tye Fig 130 Overview of available object types 466 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client The following functions are available to you m adding an object type see the following section editing object type settings see section Editing an Object Type on page 475 deleting an object type from the website settings see section Deleting an Object Type on page 476 Adding an Object Type In addition to the default object types you can create custom object types Notes You can change the object type of WCM objects subsequently for selected object types This is not possible for custom object types In theory you can add the object type XML topic However Livelink WCM Server does not support such an object type at present The following sections describe how to add an object type Starting the Wizard To start the wizard 1 Choose Tools Website administration Object types The Object types dialog box opens 2 Choose New object type o
202. formation of a cookie is returned only to the web server that originally sent the cookie Deployment Deployment is the distribution of data The deployment of Livelink WCM Server performs two main tasks first generating pages from the WCM objects stored in the database and distributing the 508 Livelink WCM Server Glossary generated files to the appropriate directories second notifying the WCM servers of changes in the WCM system Deployment system The deployment systems generate pages from the WCM objects and distribute the generated files to the appropriate directories From there the files become visible for the users via an HTTP server Deployment systems may be of various types and categories Edit view In the Edit view of Livelink WCM Server the objects of a website are created and edited Here the most current status of the objects is visible End point When a WCM object is forwarded in the workflow and an end point is reached the assignment between WCM object and workflow is removed Extranet Information platform based on Internet technology for business communication with authorized external users e g partners or customers Form Possibility to integrate dialog elements to be filled in by users in web pages The content of such a form can be sent to the server for further processing Frame object Object type for a frameset Frame topic Frame object that is at the same time used as
203. from the metadata item E mail Edit Delete released object E mail address from the metadata item E mail QA Destroy release object E mail address from the metadata item E mail Release If you have performed one of these actions the following E mail dialog box opens For detailed information on the individual fields refer to the Content client s online help Content Client User Manual 93 Chapter 3 Z Send e mail Microsoft Internet Explorer P iol x Send e mail cc Subject objects submitted The following objects were submitted website InternetSite Message text Delayed release on 7 Do not show this dialog again Cancel Help Fig 26 Sending an e mail Activating links to the Content client for e mails The WCM system can be configured in such a way that the e mails sent contain links to the edited objects If you select one of these links the Content client starts After the login the respective WCM object is selected in the navigation area 94 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client To activate this function you must modify the file WCM installation directory config mail conf xml accordingly For each Content server a separate lt mai Lurls gt section must be added with the following entries Notes Only a WCM administrator should make changes to the mail conf xml file For the changes to ta
204. ft Internet Explorer Please select a Livelink object Livelink E Enterprise Eg Accounting amp Finance Eg Company wide Discussions E Development E Human Resources S E Training Eg Presentations S E Tutorials E de S E en Advanced Training By Advanced Training Lessons T Advanced Training Solutions Basic Training T Basic Training Lessons T Basic Training Solutions E Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 102 Selecting the Livelink object when adding a relator Confirm your selection by clicking the Next button Content Client User Manual 343 Chapter 11 Specifying the version of the Livelink object The Livelink object that the relator refers to may be subject to change In this dialog box you determine how the relator reacts when the Livelink object changes Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Please specify the version optional Livelink ID Jadvanced Training Nodeld 8964 Version O Update Edit version automatically C Fixed version Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Fig 103 Specifying the version of the Livelink object Livelink ID Livelink ID of the selected object The Livelink ID is composed of the name and the ID of the object in the Livelink system You cannot change this entry m Update Edit version automatically f you click this radio button the Edit view of the relator will be autom
205. g 1 Create a configuration file with the desired items You have a free choice of name for the file 2 Copy the configuration file to the directory vipimages of the InSite Editing deployment system 312 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing 3 In the Admin client configure the VipHCLApplication For this purpose add a new parameter node with the name of the InSite Editing deployment system Add a config parameter to this node As the parameter value enter name of configuration file For detailed information on configuring applications refer to the online help of the Admin client Configuration Pools e Custom connection types E Servers W Websites a Deployment systems Server agents TE utilities Repositories Ej Applications E ClickStreamApplication E LivelinkApplication E VipDAVApplication E VipHCLApplication Repositories t Parameters E InternetSite_InSite config DEE CROCEA E oj j vee Fig 92 Configuring the VipHCLApplication 4 Shut down the JSP engine 5 Delete all generated files from the directory 200 of the InSite Editing deployment system 6 Restart the JSP engine Content Client User Manual 313 Chapter 9 Switching off InSite Editing for individual pages The scripts generated into the page for InSite Editing may collide with elements of cascading style sheets This may result in the page
206. g procedures m checking out an object with or without the Download applet or the integrated HTML editor see the following section m undoing check out of an object whose status is checked out see section Undoing Check Out starting on page 173 m checking in an object with or without the Download applet or the inte grated HTML editor see section Checking In an Object on page 174 Checking Out an Object Before you can edit the content of an object you must check out the object Checking out makes the object content available to you for editing and at the same time locks the object for write access by other users The process of checking out depends on how you configured the Content client Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected delayed release nt released or m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object m You are assigned the functional area which is linked with the object type of the object To check your functional areas choose Tools gt Login info 168 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Checking out with Download applet 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to check out 3 Choose Edit Check out or click the appropriate icon E Icon for checking out an object The file will automatically be saved in your local working directory the default
207. g references 4 In the topic structure select the object that is to be the target of the reference The reference is registered in the WCM system It is displayed in the References dialog box on the Referenced objects tab and is marked as NEW 5 To add the reference to the object content check out the object 6 Use the editor functions to move the automatically inserted link to the desired position and edit the link text if required 7 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system Content Client User Manual 205 Chapter 6 References are checked automatically when the object is checked in to the WCM system The system compares the content of the HTML file with the metadata of the object The following items are checked m whether all references contained in the object s metadata are present on the page as links or integrated graphics whether all links and integrated graphics present on the page are also contained as references in the object s metadata The reference check automatically resolves any inconsistencies between the metadata and the object content Adding References in the Integrated HTML Editor Objective You want to add a reference to a WCM object which points to another object within the same website Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m The object is an HTML object m
208. g section m editing relators see section Editing Relators on page 353 deleting relators see section Deleting a Relator on page 362 Adding Relators There are different ways of adding Livelink objects as WCM objects You can m add a single Livelink document as a WCM object see the following section m add an existing Livelink folder structure as WCM objects see section Adding a Livelink Folder Relator on page 346 m add a Livelink document together with the associated relator see section Adding a Relator Together with the Associated Livelink Document on page 350 340 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Notes You cannot use the Content client to add folders in Livelink You should not manually add relators and folder relators below a folder relator The process that synchronizes the WCM system with the Livelink system checks whether all the subfolders and documents in the Livelink folder are represented by relators manually created relators are deleted m Prerequisites for adding relators m Inthe WCM system you have the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which the relator is to be added If you want to add a new Livelink document together with the relator you also need the permission Add Items for the Livelink folder to which you want to add the object m You are assigned the functional area Livelink To check
209. ge 298 Note The responsible web designer may configure InSite Editing and customize it to suit your company s requirements For this reason the look and functions of your InSite Editing may differ from the following description 294 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Starting InSite Editing To start InSite Editing 1 Launch your browser 2 Enter the URL your WCM system administrator configured for InSite Editing in the address bar of your browser e g http wemserver company example vipdyn Alternately you can start InSite Editing by choosing View gt name of the InSite Editing deployment system in the Content client If you have not started InSite Editing via the Content client a dialog box for logging in to the WCM system opens The Login dialog box of Internet Explorer is shown here as an example Enter Network Password 2 x Please type your user name and password Site wemserver company example Realm VIP Authorization User Name Password I Save this password in your password list Cancel Fig 85 Logging in to InSite Editing 3 Enter your user ID for the WCM system and the corresponding pass word and click the OK button This takes you to the Edit view of the website Content Client User Manual 295 Chapter 9 Fie Edit View Favortes Tools Help J http wemserver company example wem vipdyn InternetSite_InSite 200 1_p_O htm Microsoit 15 x A
210. ge rights Content Client User Manual 55 Chapter 2 Any change to the access rights of an object interrupts the chain of inherit ance from the parent topic If the changed object is a topic a new chain of inheritance starts at this point The objects added to this topic inherit the new changed access settings The access settings for the XK topic are inherited by child objects Company Info Setting individual access S S E7 rights breaks the chain of oes 2 inheritance from the parent topic Fig 11 Interrupted chain of inheritance as a result of changed access rights If you subsequently change the access rights for a topic this alteration affects not only the topic itself but also all objects in the topic s chain of inheritance The change has no effect on the objects in a different chain of inheritance In order to discard the changed access rights and reintegrate the object in the chain of inheritance of the parent topic you can apply the function Use access rights of parent topic 56 Livelink WCM Server Concepts ES Use access rights of parent topic Company Info Products New Products Services The function Use access rights of aas parent topic is used to discard the child object s access rights and restore the chain of inheritance from the parent topic Fig 12 Restoring the inherited access rights Priority Rules A user can be authorized to access
211. group role Marketing QA and the right to change access rights to the group role Marketing ProjectManager Content Client User Manual 53 Chapter 2 Table 5 Example of group roles and rights Assignment of groups and roles Rights for the topic area Marketing Group Marketing Role Read Change rights Change ProjectManager metadata Group Marketing Role Editor Read Create Change object Change metadata Delete Group Marketing Role QA Read Release Default Access Right Settings In the Admin client the WCM administrator can define default access rights for each user group and role When a principal is added to the list of those authorized to access an object in the Content client these default settings are used as the initial settings for the access rights You can change these presettings at any time in the Access rights dialog box Note We recommend that you make as few changes to the access rights as possible at individual object level That way you prevent the rights actually granted from becoming too confusing Interpreting Access Rights The basic rule is that users may only access an object if they have the necessary access right Thus it is not necessary to forbid access explic itly As long as access is not explicitly permitted or not inherited from a parent topic it is forbidden by default If you want to allow on
212. gt lt xsl output method htm1l indent yes gt lt xsl template match product gt lt table width 40 gt lt tr gt lt th align left colspan 2 gt lt xsl value of select name gt lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt order no lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select order_no gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt price lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select price gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 gt lt em gt lt xsl value of select description gt lt em gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt Content Client User Manual 503 Appendix A Perform the following steps 1 Create an XML document based on the file product xml 2 Create an XSLT template based on the file transformation xsl 3 Create an HTML template without specifying a file The code of this template object looks as follows lt html gt lt head gt lt head gt lt body gt VIPCONTENT lt body gt lt html gt 4 Assign the HTML template to the XSLT template With this assignment you determine the format of the file which is generated when the XSLT template is assigned to an object in this case HTML 5 Assign the XSLT template to the XML document The XML document is transformed on the server side For this purpose an XSLT processor is integrated in the WCM server The code of the HTML page generated fr
213. gt lt price gt 1250 euro lt price gt lt description gt The all in one package for developers Out now lt description gt lt product gt Step 2 Create XSLT document Your transformation rules are defined in the file transformation xsl Use the Content client to add an XSLT document based on this file 500 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML Code of the file transformation xsl for transformation on the client side lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl istylesheet version 1 0 xmins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt lt xsl output method html indent yes gt lt xsl template match product gt lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt lt xsl value of select name gt lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table width 40 gt lt tr gt lt th align left colspan 2 gt lt xsl value of select name gt lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt order no lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select order_no gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt price lt td gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select price gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 gt lt em gt lt xsl value of select description gt lt em gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt Content Client User Manual 501 Appendix A Step 3 Reference the XSLT document
214. hapter 16 5 Click the Apply button The attributes are removed from the set but remain in the database Thus they can later be assigned again Deleting an Attribute Set Note You can only delete attribute sets that are not used by any object in the relevant website To delete an attribute set 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired attribute set in the left window pane 3 Choose Delete attribute set on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon a Icon for deleting an attribute set 4 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button 484 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Managing Object Categories For general information on object categories refer to section Properties from the object category on page 410 and to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual When adding a WCM object you can optionally assign an object category to the object It then possesses the properties that were defined for this category These properties supplement the standard metadata of WCM objects and are displayed on the Properties tab in the Metadata dialog box By means of WCM tags the values of these properties can be automati cally entered in the generated pages and for example queried when searching a website Object categories also form the basis for assembled objects Content Assembly To vi
215. hat has a special format When you specify a comparison value you must consider the data type of the metadata item The following table offers an overview of the data types and the associated formats Table 27 Comparison values in the filter editor Metadata item Data type Format Modification date Time stamp YYYY MM DD HH MM SS or character string now Expiration date Example The date September 30 2003 9 30 is entered as 2003 09 30 09 30 00 Created on Release date Delayed release Author User ID Character string e g jstein Released by Modified by Description String String Direct release Boolean value Character string true or false 388 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Metadata item Data type Format Object category String String OID OID Integer Keywords List String Language Language Locale e g en_US for English Status Status String Title String String Type Object type String Heading String String Version Version Major Minor Micro e g 5 0 3 Template OID Integer Target group String String Character strings can be enclosed in double or single quotes Quotes and backslashes used within a character string must be preceded by a backslash For clarification the following table contains two examples Table 28 Examples of the spelling of com
216. he object belongs to Read only the metadata item cannot be changed Do one of the following To insert the WCM tag click the OK button m WCM tags can be equipped with parameters exception metadata of type Global To specify parameters click the Next button Note For detailed information on parameters in WCM tags refer to section Parameterized WCM Tags starting on page 440 Specifying parameters for the WCM tag In this dialog box you can specify parameters for the WCM tag Parame ters in WCM tags fulfill multiple tasks You can use them to format the inte grated object information or to activate special functions The type and number of available parameters depends on the metadata item s data type The following figure shows the parameters for the meta data item Expiration date which has the data type Timestamp Content Client User Manual 181 Chapter 6 F Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explorer E3 Here you can specify parameters for the WCM tag Ax Language English USA Format medium Alternative name IV Required JQ Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 63 Specifying parameters for a WCM tag The following sections provide detailed information on the individual parameters m on Language see section The locale Parameter on page 449 on Format see section The fo
217. he appropriate icon jw Icon for deleting an object 4 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The object is irretrievably removed from the WCM system Content Client User Manual 229 Chapter 6 Destroying a Released Object Objective The version of an object that has already been released once was deleted in the Edit view In the process of quality assurance you want to confirm the deletion This also deletes the object versions in the QA and Produc tion views The object will be destroyed Prerequisites m The object has the status deleted m You have the access rights Read and Release for the object Procedure 1 Check whether the object may really be destroyed 2 In the navigation area mark the object to be destroyed 3 Choose Object Destroy or click the appropriate icon E 3 Icon for destroying an object If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens 4 In the E mail dialog box make the desired entries and click the OK button 5 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The object is now deleted in the WCM system and is no longer avail able in any view The object cannot be restored 230 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Rejecting the Deletion of a Released Object Objective An object that has already been released once was deleted in the Edit view You do not agree with this and want to reject the delet
218. he e mail addresses defined for the g E mail QA object Messages are sent to these E mail Release addresses when the object acquires a certain status Content Client User Manual 43 Chapter 2 Metadata item Description Inherited Expiration date The date with time until which the object remains valid Expired objects can no longer be submitted to Quality Assurance v Heading The heading of the object Keywords The keywords describing the content of the object This information can be used as a search criterion in the object filter Language The language of the object This metadata item has no influence on the object content but is used for classification purposes and as a search criterion in the object filter Moreover certain metadata such as the date are displayed in the selected language if they are integrated into the HTML page generated for the object by means of placeholders so called WCM tags Modification date The date with time on which the object was changed last Modified by Object category Object size in bytes The ID of the last user who changed the object Indicates whether the object has been assigned to an object category e g Invoice and if so which object category is used The size of the object content 44 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Metadata item Description Inherited OID Path
219. he list You can repeat steps 4 and 5 for all file extensions that you want to assign to the same application Note It does not make sense to use a file extension in more than one application class i e assign more than one application to the file type This would make it impossible to define which editor is to be opened when the object is checked out 6 Use the Browse button to select the desired editor program The full path to the program is displayed in the Application field 7 Click the Apply button 8 Do one of the following Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box m To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Content Client User Manual 123 Chapter 4 Editing an Application Class To edit an application class 1 Mark the tree element Application classes in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box Inthe Application class drop down list in the right window pane click the desired application class The settings of the selected application class are displayed All settings can be changed Make the desired changes Click the Apply button Do one of the following Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Delet
220. he object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to delete 3 Choose Object Delete or click the appropriate icon Ei Icon for deleting an object If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens 4 In the E mail dialog box make the desired entries and click the OK button 5 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The object is submitted to Quality Assurance for deletion Important If you delete a topic all subordinate objects will also be deleted Child objects that only exist in the Edit view major version number 0 are permanently deleted as soon as the topic is deleted 228 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Deleting an Object not yet Released Objective You want to delete an object that has never been released by Quality Assurance The object has the major version number 0 In this case the object is deleted directly in the Edit view without confirmation by Quality Assurance Prerequisites m The object has the status changed or rejected m The object has not been released by Quality Assurance yet i e it has the major version number 0 m You have the access rights Read and Delete for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to delete 3 Choose Object Delete or click t
221. he objects at the selected point in time If this includes reading the content or metadata of other WCM objects the current version of the respective WCM objects is used As a result the time view generated by the dynamic deployment may especially in connection with JSP pages not corre spond to the actual status of the website at the selected point in time 4 Do one of the following Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Using a Profile To use a saved profile 1 2 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box In the Load profile drop down list click the profile that you want to use The selected profile is loaded to the Configuration dialog box Click the OK button Content Client User Manual 127 Chapter 4 Editing a Profile To edit a saved profile 1 Choose Tools gt Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 In the Load profile drop down list click the profile that you want to edit The selected profile is loaded to the Configuration dialog box 3 Make the desired changes 4 Click the OK button Deleting a Profile To delete a stored profile 1 Choose Tools gt Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 In the Load profile drop down list click the profile that you w
222. his results in two different methods for working with a source object and converted objects m You create converted objects from a source object only once All changes and modifications required later are made to the objects generated by the converter The source object itself is not changed m You create converted objects from a source object All changes that are required subsequently are made in the source object After checking in the source object choose the Convert function This automatically generates new dependent objects Either one of these working methods prevents changes from being over written Representation of converted objects in the navigation area In the navigation area the dependent objects are shown at the same level as the source object in this case the object Products of type Word document The converted objects have been imported into the WCM system as HTML or graphic objects and have the properties of these object types You can select each of the dependent objects in the navigation area and display it in the Content client There is a separate log for each dependent object Content Client User Manual 237 Chapter 6 Topic structure Ea Internetsite we BR de 5 Bay en E3 ER Careers Bay Company Info B Ba Products a BACK a HOME1 a Products_1 Products_2 Products_3 Products_ Products_5 Products_6 Products_7 PRODUCTS1 ervices neral Templates me ews Si
223. how this dialog again lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 104 Entering comments about the relator Confirm your entries by clicking the OK button The WCM system creates the relator and shows it in the Navigation area The relator s status is changed For the relator to become visible in the published website you must submit it After this the relator must be released by Quality Assurance Adding a Livelink Folder Relator Objective You want to integrate a Livelink folder including all subfolders and subordi nate documents into the WCM system Each Livelink object is to be repre sented by a relator in the WCM system A wizard guides you through this task 346 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Starting the wizard 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the Navigation area mark the topic in which you want to integrate the Livelink objects 3 Choose Object New Relator Specifying the Livelink system There may be more than one Livelink system in your company In the first dialog box you specify the Livelink system in which the Livelink folder that you want to integrate is stored Selecting the Livelink folder In this dialog box you select a Livelink folder The subfolders and docu ments contained in this folder will be integrated in the WCM system y Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Please select a Livelink object Livelink
224. hree types of activities Edit QA and Delete Address see URL Applet Java program embedded in a website An applet is loaded by the server and executed by the client ASP Active Server Pages HTML files with specifically identified embedded JavaScript or Visual Basic Script programs that are run on the web server The result is then sent to the client in normal HTML format Asynchronous action An asynchronous action returns almost immediately after it has been called It does not wait for processing of the associated tasks to finish See also Synchronous action Attributes Special metadata that can be defined differently for each object type Attributes are grouped in attribute sets Attribute set Set of attributes Attribute sets can be combined with object types In this way all WCM objects that are created on the basis of this object type can be equipped with the attributes of the assigned attribute set Attribute sets are edited in the Admin client or in the Content client Browser A browser is primarily an application program for displaying HTML pages With the increasing spread of Internet technologies the browser is becoming a universal client and serves as an interface for all Content Client User Manual 507 Glossary information and applications based on Internet technologies In the context of Livelink WCM Server the browser serves as an interface to the Edit QA and Product
225. icon Icon for submitting an object 178 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Inserting a WCM Tag in an HTML Object For editing HTML objects the Content client provides the integrated HTML editor In addition to the familiar HTML editing features the inte grated HTML editor provides an easy to use function for conveniently inserting WCM tags in HTML objects A wizard guides you through this process WCM tags are placeholders enabling you to integrate information from the object s metadata such as the expiration date into the page generated for the object Starting the wizard To start the wizard for inserting WCM tags 1 Make sure that the Use integrated HTML editor check box in the Configuration dialog box is selected 2 In the navigation area mark the HTML object that you want to edit and check the object out The object s content is transferred to the integrated HTML editor 3 Choose Insert gt Insert WCM tag or click the appropriate icon Icon for inserting a WCM tag Selecting a metadata item In the first dialog box you specify which object information you want to integrate in the page by means of the WCM tag Content Client User Manual 179 Chapter 6 3 Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explorer Select the metadata item that you want to integrate into the page by means of the WCM tag Name Comment Data type Metadata type absolute_urls acl all_
226. idth attribute width of the window in pixels height attribute height of the window in pixels name attribute name of the metadata items to be displayed for an object Content Client User Manual 311 Chapter 9 Item in the configuration file Explanation lt buttons gt lt buttons gt lt button name new display true action CreateAssemblyMenu url images insite set2 new gif Label HCL_BUTTON_NEW_FROM_CATEGORY gt This item configures the little toolbar for object fragments name attribute new the Assembled object icon edit the Change value or Select different object icon checkin the Check out icon checkout the Check in icon goto the Go to object icon param the WCM tags icon display attribute true The icon is displayed false The icon is hidden To display the icon for specific object fragments again configure the buttons parameter for the WCM tag see section The buttons Parameter on page 460 url attribute path to the icon s image file label attribute The user interface texts of InSite Editing are stored as key value pairs in the so called properties files This attribute is the key of the icon text the associated value is the translated icon text For detailed information on translating user interface texts refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual chapter Working in the Admin Client To configure InSite Editin
227. iew is synchronized with the navi gation of the Content client The object currently selected in the navigation area is displayed in the object preview of the browser window Use Activex Allow the use of ActiveX controls For security reasons it may be recommendable to clear this check box This may slow down execution of certain functions Use Java Web Start Activate Java Web Start This is required for starting the workflow modeler automatically when checking out objects of type Workflow Additionally the check box Use Download applet must be selected Display object information in status bar Display object information of the current object in the left area of the status bar Hide disabled items in context menu Do not show disabled items in the context menu Note If you use the Mozilla browser and select this check box there may be display problems in the InSite Editing context menu However this does not restrict the functionality Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client 3 Make the desired settings 4 Do one of the following m Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box m To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left In the following sections the individual basic settings are described in more detail The Download Applet An applet is a small program th
228. ified to suit the current context Functions that you cannot use on the object currently selected in the navigation area are deactivated dimmed Editing Objects in the Content Client This section contains a short introduction to working with the Content client It is explained how to select an object see the following section m which possibilities exist to display an object see section Displaying Objects on page 88 how to send e mails when the status of an object changes see section Sending E Mails on page 92 how to find objects within the website see section Filter and Search Functions on page 96 how to track the progress of time consuming actions see section The Action List on page 101 Selecting an Object To edit an object mark it in the navigation area If the Content client is configured accordingly the object information of the marked object the so called current object is displayed in the left area of the status bar oH Events OID 32 Version 3 0 1 Expiration date Aug 4 2014 9 18 27 AM Modified by j Events OID 32 Version 3 0 1 Expiration date Aug 4 2014 9 18 27 AM Modified by jstein Modification date Aug 9 2004 2 40 44 PM Fig 25 Object information in the status bar 86 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client The following data from the object information is shown in the status bar providing you with a quick ove
229. in Livelink WCM Server and process them accordingly For example you can use the object filter to display a list of all objects that have expired or all objects that have been rejected by Quality Assurance 42 Livelink WCM Server Concepts By using WCM tags in the templates or in the HTML pages it is possible to integrate information from the metadata e g the object s expiration date in the website pages see chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags Livelink WCM Server distinguishes two types of metadata standard metadata and special attributes Standard Metadata Standard metadata are metadata items that are defined by the WCM system and are present for each WCM object The following table provides an overview of the standard metadata The Inherited column indicates which metadata settings are adopted from the parent topic when the object is added Table 3 Standard metadata with description Metadata item Description Inherited Author The user who added the object Created on The date with time on which the object was created Delayed release The date with time at which the object version is to be published in the Production view Description The description of the object content This information can be used as a search crite rion in the object filter Direct release Indicates whether the object can be released directly without having to go through Quality Assurance E mail Edit T
230. include graphics in formats other than GIF JPEG and PNG PDF document F This object type is used to integrate PDF files PHP page a This object type is used to integrate PHP pages PHP template This object type represents a PHP document that is used as a template 68 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Object type Icon Description PHP topic eee This object type represents a combination of a PHP object and a directory As with other topic types a PHP topic can contain child objects PNG image This object type is used to integrate graphics in the PNG file format PowerPoint file This object type is used to integrate Microsoft PowerPoint documents Script g This object type is used to integrate HTML like documents without head or body section Topic This object type represents a combination of Word document an HTML page and a directory A topic can be edited like any other HTML page You can insert hyperlinks and graphics on the page At the same time topics can contain child objects and can thus be used to structure the website This object type is used to integrate Microsoft Word documents Workflow This object type is used to integrate workflow definitions in XPDL format created with the Content Workflow Modeler For information on using this object type refer to chapter 8 Content Workflow XML document han x ve This ob
231. ing an Application Class To delete an application class 1 124 Mark the tree element Application classes in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box In the Application class drop down list in the right window pane click the desired application class Click the Delete application class button Do one of the following Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Configuring the Dynamic Deployment By means of the configuration for the dynamic deployment you can deter mine the object view that is displayed when you select a dynamic deploy ment system in the Content client To specify the settings for the dynamic deployment 1 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 Mark the tree element Dynamic deployment in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box The possible settings are displayed in the right window pane Dynamic deployment Deployment view Production view Template view Current template z User view Time view lt Fig 43 Configuring the dynamic deployment 3 Make the desired settings Content Client User Manual 125 Chapter 4 m Deployment view specifies whether the Edit QA or Production view o
232. ing to their occurrence in the object content following the tags for which the parameter is set Example The object contains the following WCM tags in this sequence 1 VIPATTRIBUTE_A 2 VIPATTRIBUTE_B 3 VIPATTRIBUTE_C order 2 4 VIPATTRIBUTE_D order 1 Content Client User Manual 459 Chapter 15 In the WCM tag dialog box the tags are sorted as follows 1 Attribute _D 2 Attribute_C 3 Attribute_A 4 Attribute_B The buttons Parameter In InSite Editing each object fragment has its own little toolbar You can use the InSite Editing configuration file to permanently hide individual icons from this toolbar see section Configuring InSite Editing on page 309 By means of the buttons parameter you can display hidden icons for individual object fragments Permitted values for the parameter are m new displays the icon assembled object m edit displays the icon Change value or Select different object m checkout displays the icon Check out E m checkin displays the icon Check in A m goto displays the icon Go to object a param displays the icon WCM tags Tal To unhide multiple icons for an object fragment enter the values sepa rated by commas example VIPDATASHEET buttons checkout checkin 460 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags The add Parameter By means of the add parameter you can make additional metadata within an HTML tag such as lt a href VIPLINK gt o
233. ink WCM Server If an object of this type is added in the Content client a file must be specified as content Topic Objects that have child objects Topic ASP topic etc Web document HTML pages JSP pages PHP pages JavaScript and ASP pages Content Client User Manual 471 Chapter 16 472 Object data type WCM objects Workflow XML document XML template Objects in which a workflow is saved All types of XML documents e g XMath This object data type is also used for XSLT documents Template for XML documents XSLT template Template for XSLT documents Click one of the available object data types in the drop down list You cannot change this entry later MIME type The MIME type defines how the generated pages are displayed in the browser The following table shows a number of MIME types The five basic types are supple text files mented by subtypes such as text plain for simple Table 48 MIME types and WCM objects MIME type Sub type and respective WCM objects text image plain simple text files asp ASP pages html HTML pages jsp JSP pages php PHP pages gif images in GIF format jpg images in JPG format png images in PNG format audio basic audio files Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client MIME type Sub type and respective WC
234. ink system The relator is created with the settings Update Edit version automatically and Delete Livelink object together with relator You can change these settings in the Livelink metadata dialog box see section Modifying Livelink Metadata on page 355 For the relator to become visible in the published website you must submit it After this the relator must be released by Quality Assurance Editing Relators Relators do not only enable you to publish Livelink objects on a website They also make it possible to edit Livelink objects via the Content client In this section the following procedures are introduced editing the content of a relator see the following section editing the Livelink metadata see section Modifying Livelink Meta data on page 355 m integrating the Livelink metadata in a web page see section Inte grating Livelink Metadata in a Page on page 358 manually synchronizing the relator when the Livelink object has been changed see section Updating a Relator Manually on page 361 Content Client User Manual 353 Chapter 11 Modifying the Content of a Relator Objective Relators refer to objects in the Livelink system You can use the Content client to modify the content of Livelink objects Prerequisites The relator has the status changed rejected released or delayed release The radio button Update Edit version automatically is selected f
235. inked structure cannot be represented in the WCM system The start file of the linked structure must be located at the highest levelin the hierarchy The start file is the file that the WCM system starts from when parsing the linked files 154 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Required rights and functional areas You need the following rights and functional areas to add objects by means of the wizard the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which the object is to be added the functional area Import and the functional area linked with the object type of the new object To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info The following sections describe how to proceed when importing linked objects by means of the wizard Starting the Wizard To start the wizard 1 2 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the topic in which you want to integrate the objects Choose Object Import gt linked objects The wizard starts Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the import process Content Client User Manual 155 Chapter 5 Specifying Title and Object Type Selecting a File In this dialog box you specify the title and object type of the new object Moreover you select the file that is the basis for the new objects Z Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer Please enter a title for the object
236. instance If no OID is stored in the special attribute Statify page the deployment system generates the unchanged content of the form instance in the form of XML code The special attribute Absolute URL When a deployment system is added in the Admin client you determine how the references in the WCM objects are converted into URLs The following options exist absolute Absolute paths are used in the links Example lt a href http Awww company example products NewProducts htm gt relative Relative paths are used in the links Example lt a href NewProducts htm gt m server relative Relative references without specification of protocol and base URL are used in the links Example lt a href products NewProducts htm gt In the Metadata dialog box you can overwrite the setting of the Admin client by means of the special attribute Absolute URL The following table describes several sample configurations for the setting in the Admin client and the value of the special attribute Absolute URL Content Client User Manual 419 Chapter 14 Table 34 Sample configuration for the special attribute Absolute URL server relative SERVER_RELATIVE Option in the Possible value of the special Converted Admin client attribute Absolute URL references absolute not set or attribute does not exist absolute SERVER_RELATIVE any string e g on relative not set or at
237. ion Prerequisites m The object has the status deleted m You have the access rights Read and Release for the object Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the object submitted for deletion 2 Choose Object Reject or click the appropriate icon Icon for rejecting an object If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can reject the deletion of the object and send an explanation to the responsible person s 3 Click the OK button The object has the status rejected and can be checked out and edited Content Client User Manual 231 Chapter 6 Removing a Page from the Production View Objective You found a serious error in the object version that has already been published in the Production view You want to remove the faulty page from the Production view without deleting the WCM object itself Requirement You have the access rights Read and Release for the object Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the object whose released version you want to remove from the Production view 2 Choose Object Remove page 3 To check the action choose View name of the Production deployment system If the deletion was successful you get the error The page cannot be found The current version of the object in the Production view has been removed Notes A page that has been deleted from the Pr
238. ion Setting Access Rights for All Users starting on page 223 configure access for the Production view see section Setting Access Rights for the Production View starting on page 225 Content Client User Manual 215 Chapter 6 m undo access settings you made at object level see section Reset ting All Object Specific Access Settings starting on page 226 You can only change the access settings of an object if you have the access rights Read Change rights and Change metadata for the object Changes to access rights like all object changes are subject to the normal staging i e the change must be submitted to Quality Assur ance to be checked and released If Quality Assurance rejects the changes to the access rights the previous access rights settings are restored Notes on changing access rights There must be at least one principal user group role or the entry World in the access control list The last remaining principal cannot be deleted There must be at least one principal with the access right Change rights in the access control list If this right is assigned to only one principal it cannot be withdrawn and the respective principal cannot be deleted Adding a Principal to the Access Control List Objective You want to add a user or another entry to the access control list Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected
239. ion view CGI Common Gateway Interface A web server interface used to run scripts or programs that generate user responses on HTML forms CGI programs are usually located in a special directory on the HTTP server Special URLs call such a CGI program which in turn generates an HTML response to the request and sends it to the client Check in Staging action of Livelink WCM Server An object that has been checked out and edited is returned to the WCM system by the action Check in This makes the changes visible in the Edit view The object is combined with the template again and is available for further editing Check out Staging action of Livelink WCM Server The content of a WCM object can only be edited after the object has been checked out A checked out object is locked for access by other users The changes to the object do not become available in the Edit view until the object has been checked in Client Process program or computer for requesting a service from a server The browser for example is a client program used to request HTML pages from a web server Cookie Information sent by a web server to the browser The browser saves the information in a text file In this way statuses can be saved and the user will see his her familiar environment when accessing the Internet page again When the user visits the page again the browser sends a copy of the cookie to the web server For security reasons the in
240. ioning of the software IXOS SOFTWARE AG hereby declares that this information reflects no statistics of nor has any validity for any existing company This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org and software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Trademarks IXOS IXOS SOFTWARE AG SAP R 3 and SAP ArchiveLink are registered trademarks of SAP AG Microsoft Microsoft Windows NT and the names of further Microsoft products are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions Siebel isa registered trademark by Siebel Systems Inc Other product names are used only to identify the products and they may be registered trademarks of the relevant manufacturers Copyright 2006 Gauss Interprise AG Hamburg Gauss Interprise Inc Irvine California All rights reserved worldwide This document and the related software are property of Gauss Interprise AG or its suppliers and protected by copyright and other laws They are distributed under licenses restricting their use copying distribution and decompilation Neither receipt nor possession of this document confers or transfers any right to reproduce or disclose any part of the contents
241. ions without activating the transi tion mode In this case you must keep the SHIFT key pressed during the entire process of adding the transition Moving Transitions It is not possible to move a transition as a whole The positions of the tran sition s ends must be changed separately To move a transition 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon to deactivate the transition mode 2 Mark the desired transition with the left mouse button The transition is highlighted in green 3 Place the mouse pointer on the end of the transition that you want to move The mouse pointer changes to a cross 4 While holding the left mouse button down move the end of the tran sition to the desired location at an activity a starting point or an end point When the mouse button is moved over a location to which the end of the transition may be moved a small square is displayed or the respective starting point or end point is highlighted by a frame Content Client User Manual 269 Chapter 8 5 Release the mouse button 6 If necessary repeat steps 3 to 5 for the other end of the transition Deleting Workflow Elements Note When an activity starting point or end point is deleted all related transitions are removed too To delete an activity a starting point or an end point 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon ki
242. is an HTML page that describes the layout of the pages Special placeholders are used in templates to inte grate the content items and optionally metadata of those objects that use a template The content of the WCM objects is automatically merged with the template used JavaScript JPEG image es This object type is used to integrate JavaScript files This object type is used to integrate graphics in the JPEG file format Content Client User Manual 67 Chapter 2 Object type Icon Description JSP page This object type may contain at least one script that can be executed on a web server Such scripts can be used to dynamically compose or compute web content items and then display them JSP template In addition to page layout description this object type makes it possible to reuse routines that have been programmed once for the individual creation of web content without difficulty in other objects JSP topic This object type represents a combination of a JSP object and a directory As with other topic types a JSP topic can contain child objects Livelink folder relator This object type is used to integrate folders from a Livelink system Livelink relator This object type is used to integrate docu ments from a Livelink system Other This object type is used to integrate docu ments that do not belong to any of the other object types Examples
243. it WCM tag on the context menu The wizard for editing WCM tags starts 3 For Enable InSite Editing click the on radio button 4 For Default value click the on radio button 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for all WCM tags for which you want to set default values 328 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects 6 Enter the desired default values on the Properties tab of the Meta data dialog box In the object preview the template with the default values looks as follows Partnertem plate The company name of the partner A short slogan for the partner A short introduction for the partner Contact Enter a detailed description of the partner s work strengths Addresses and phone experiences etc numbers Fig 95 The template Partnertemplate in the object preview Step 4 Add partner objects On the basis of the Partnertemplate template add WCM objects of type Assembled object Enter the respective information on the partner as values for the properties The following figure shows the properties of the partner Kryptonite Power GmbH as an example Content Client User Manual 329 Chapter 10 General Properties Attributes E mail Info WCM tags contact Mondweg 132 22299 Hamburg Tel 49 04 1234 400 Fax 49 04 1234 402 introduction logo fimages KryptonitePowerpsd GIF image OID 24 Q RI partnerdescription Aenean varius pede vel enim In
244. it it Afterwards you submit the object to Quality Assurance again 6 If the object is released by Quality Assurance it acquires the status released The relevant icon is a green square After release the new version of the object is available to the end users in the Production view of the website 34 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Both in the staging and in the workflow of Livelink WCM Server the object always has a defined status This status specifies which actions you can perform on the object For example only submitted objects can be released by Quality Assurance The function Release cannot be applied to other objects If a workflow is assigned to the object the functions you can perform on the object also depend on the current workflow step of the object For example if the workflow defines a two stage quality assurance and the object is in the first stage of quality assurance it cannot be released despite having the status submitted It can only be released in the second stage of quality assurance The following table provides an overview of the main features of the various object statuses Table 1 Object statuses with description Object Staging Workflow Description status icon icon changed E The object has been changed New objects also have this status checked out Eal wet The object has been checked out for editing and is thus barred for write access by other user
245. ite Editing It will not be highlighted in the website off InSite Editing is not enabled for this metadata item default setting Default value for template objects only By means of this parameter you can specify a default value for the integrated metadata item Users who edit the objects based on this template can use this default value as a hint regarding the information they are expected to enter in this field m on Users are able to specify a default value for this metadata item in the Metadata dialog box off Users cannot specify a default value for this metadata item Position in the Metadata dialog Use this parameter to specify the position of the WCM tag in the WCM tag dialog box of InSite Editing This enables you to position the input fields for essential information on top of the dialog box You can only enter integers To insert the WCM tag click the OK button Editing Object Content Again Objective You want to open an object you have already checked out in the editor in order to make further changes 184 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Prerequisites m The object has the status checked out m You checked out the object yourself Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the checked out object 3 The next step depends on how you configured the Content client Ifyou have selected the Use Download applet check box in the Configura
246. ith Templates Head element In the head element of the cascading template or to be more precise in the combined generated template file the settings from the head element of the master template and the dependent template are combined First all entries from the master template are adopted Then the entries of the dependent template are inserted In this way different layout settings can be realized in the dependent template as the respec tive entries of the master template are overwritten lt head gt lt Settings from the master template gt lt title gt VIPTITLE lt title gt lt Settings from the dependent template gt lt head gt Note When designing a template cascade make sure the same attribute e g lt title gt lt title gt is not defined in the head element of several templates This might cause repeated entries in the head element of the generated template when the head elements from the templates are combined In this case you cannot control which attribute content is displayed in the browser Body element The body element of the cascading template is as for other objects formed by inserting the complete body element of the dependent template in the body element of the master template instead of the WCM tag VIPCONTENT Content Client User Manual 403 Chapter 13 Master template lt body gt lt table width 100 height 100 gt lt tr height 10 v
247. ject type 161 start wizard 159 import linked objects 154 select file 156 start wizard 155 InSite Editing application example 304 call functions 296 configuration file 309 configure 309 edit object content 297 edit object fragments 298 enable for metadata item 183 for assembled objects 332 functions 296 in general 293 start 295 switch off for individual pages 314 WCM tag dialog box 299 install workflow modeler 261 integer data type 437 integrated HTML editor 114 add reference 206 configure 114 insert WCM tag 179 invalid references 203 J Java Web Start activate 112 Workflow modeler 263 JavaScript object type 67 JPEG image object type 67 JSP page object type 68 JSP template object type 68 JSP topic object type 68 Livelink WCM Server K keywords metadata item 44 WCM tag 429 L language metadata item 44 WCM tag 429 language code WCM tag 429 large integer data type 437 later release set for an object 198 licenses 77 link add in Content client 204 add in editor 209 add in integrated HTML editor 206 delete 214 in general 46 maintain 201 list data type 437 Livelink functional area 63 Livelink document add with relator 350 Livelink folder relator 339 add 346 object type 68 Livelink ID 344 data type 437 Livelink metadata edit 355 integrate in page 358 WCM tags 358 WCM tags for standard metadata 358 WCM tags for user defined metadata 359 Content Client User Manual Index Liv
248. ject type is used to integrate docu ments in the format Extensible Markup Language XML For information on using this object type refer to appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML Content Client User Manual 69 Chapter 2 Object type Icon Description XML schema Fi This object type is used to integrate XML schema objects XML template This object type represents an XML docu ment that is used as a template By means of an XML template it is for example possible to provide a uniform framework at the data level for data that is stored in XML format For information on using this object type refer to appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML XSLT document ffs This object type is used to integrate docu ments with information on XSL transformations These transformations describe how to convert an XML document into for example an XHTML document The conversion is not restricted to XHTML docu ments Free text based formats are also possible For information on using this object type refer to appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML XSLT template 70 This object type represents an XSLT docu ment that is used as a template An XSLT template contains transformation rules These rules are applied to the XML docu ments that have been assigned the XSLT template The transformation is performed on the server side For information on usi
249. ject types and to functions and views in the Content client For some Content client messages the internal names of the functional areas are used For this reason they are also listed in the table Content Client User Manual 61 Chapter 2 Table 6 Functional areas and object types Functional area Internal Name Default assignment to object type View or function in the Content client Basic Compound object Excel Add check out and document GIF image check in objects VIP HTML page JPEG based on these image Other PDF docu object types ment PNG image PowerPoint file Topic Word document XML document Advanced Frame Frame topic ADVANCED HTML template XML template Dynamic Assembled object ASP DYNAMIC page ASP template ASP topic CGI script Form template JavaScript JSP page JSP template JSP topic PHP page PHP template PHP topic XSLT document XSLT template Form Form instance FORM Workflow Workflow Assign workflows to WORKFLOW objects remove workflow assignments 62 Livelink WCM Server Intelligent templates ITF Direct release DIRECT_RELEASE References dialog REFERENCES Access rights dialog ACCESS _ RIGHTS Log dialog LOG Livelink LIVELINK Filter standard FILTER_STANDARD none Concepts Not used by default required for compati bility with VIP 5e Work with the Direct release
250. jected delayed release released or m You have the access rights Read Change rights and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object whose access control list you want to edit 3 Choose View Access rights 4 Mark the principal entry that you want to remove 5 Click the right mouse button Remove principal The principal is removed from the access control list 222 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects 6 Click the Save button 7 Submit the object with the changed access control list to Quality Assurance To do so choose Object Submit or click the appro priate icon Icon for submitting an object Setting Access Rights for All Users Objective You want control the access to an object e g the right Change object for all users Note The principal World is a group containing all users Thus when it comes to interpreting access rights the usual priority rules apply to World see section Priority Rules on page 57 If you explicitly deny certain rights to the principal World this prohibition can only be over ruled by an individual permission An explicit group specific or role specific permission however does not overrule the prohibition Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or
251. jects String Returns the entry itself Time stamp Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object the date and time in the following form 04 09 2003 15 59 23 German Sep 4 2003 3 59 23 PM English The properties of the sample object category PressRelease could have the following data types Table 21 Properties of the object category PressRelease TitleArticle String Introduction Text MainText Formatted text Image Object URL Date Date For detailed information on adding object categories and properties refer to section Managing Object Categories on page 485 Content Client User Manual 321 Chapter 10 Step 2 Create a template responsible web designer The next step is to define the layout for the assembled object Create a template and assign the object category created in step 1 to this template Use WCM tags to integrate the object category s properties and thus the information of the assembled object in the template Arrange the WCM tags in the template as you want them to be displayed in the gener ated page The following figure illustrates the structure of the press release template TitleArticle gt gt VIPTITLEARTICLE Introduction gt gt VIPINTRODUCTION IMAGE gt gt VIPIMAGE Date gt gt VIPDATE Fig 93 Structure of the PressRelease template MainText gt gt VIPMAINTEXT By me
252. k the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Editing Metadata For general information on the metadata see section Metadata starting on page 42 In this section the following procedures are introduced editing the metadata of one object see the following section simultaneously editing the metadata of several objects see section Editing Metadata of Several Objects starting on page 196 time controlled publication of an object see section Setting the Delayed Release Option for an Object starting on page 198 changing the type of an object see section Changing the Object Type starting on page 199 integrating metadata in a page see section Integrating Metadata in a Page on page 200 Editing an Object s Metadata Objective You want to edit an object s metadata For editing the metadata of an indi vidual object the Metadata dialog box is available Prerequisites o 6 The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object Content Client User Manual 193 Chapter 6 Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object whose metadata you want to edit 3 Choose View gt Metadata In the right window pane the metadata is displayed on various
253. ke effect all servers must be restarted Table 9 Activating links for e mails in the mail conf xml file lt type name DynamicWithLinks gt Activates the insertion of links in the e mails lt mailurl name Master_Content gt The name of the Content server sending the e mails lt cms_url gt http wcmserver company example cmsclient index jsp lt cms_url gt The URL to the Content client lt cms_display_name gt Content Server Chicago lt cms_display_name gt Freely definable display name for the server in the e mail Ina distributed WCM system you may for example specify the loca tion of the server Content Client User Manual 95 Chapter 3 Filter and Search Functions The Content client provides extensive filter and search functions which help you find objects quickly Note The filter and search functions displayed in your Content client may be different from the following description They depend on your functional areas The Object filter view Choose View Object filter to open the object filter This filter helps you find and list objects on the basis of specific criteria including user defined criteria On the filtered objects you can perform actions such as Submit or Release This way you can edit several objects simultaneously The filter result is displayed in an object list For each object the object type OID title path to the root object and st
254. kflow transition Entering a remark for a new object Selecting embedded objects when adding an object Specifying title and template when adding objects on the basis of a template Template selection with thumbnails Specifying type and basic properties when adding objects on the basis of a template Content Client User Manual 97 98 99 99 100 100 102 103 104 108 110 115 116 119 122 123 125 136 138 140 143 144 145 146 147 150 151 152 Fig 55 Specifying title file and object type when importing linked objects 156 Fig 56 Specifying a ZIP file for import 159 Fig 57 Specifying title and type when importing from a ZIP file 161 Fig 58 Security warning when working with the Download applet for the first time 170 Fig 59 Saving a file manually 171 Fig 60 The integrated HTML editor 172 Fig 61 Selecting embedded objects when checking in an object 175 Fig 62 Selecting a WCM tag 180 Fig 63 Specifying parameters for a WCM tag 182 Fig 64 Specifying additional parameters for a WCM tag 183 Fig 65 Dialog box for replacing an object 191 Fig 66 Selecting embedded objects when replacing an object 192 Fig 67 The Metadata dialog box 194 Fig 68 The References dialog box 202 Fig 69 Topic structure when adding references 205 Fig 70 Topic structure when adding references 207 Fig 71 The Access rights dialog box 217 Fig 72 Adding a principal
255. l access by assigning rights to these groups If neces sary specific access rights can be given to individual users this should however be the exception A role like a group is also a collection of users Roles however are defined in terms of tasks whereas groups are generally tied to organiza tional structures such as departments or projects Depending on the tasks the roles in an organization may be defined in different ways Some typical user roles that may be involved in editing a website are editors graphics specialists project managers and QA staff Content Client User Manual 51 Chapter 2 Specific access rights for objects can be defined for a role just as they can for a group Since roles are usually defined on the basis of tasks it may be even easier to assign access rights to a role than to a group since editors for example need specific access rights such as Create and Change object Groups by contrast are often based on organizational units e g sales marketing production or administration The principal World In Livelink WCM Server there is the special principal World This prin cipal is a group and represents all users of the WCM system Thus the access settings for this principal are valid for all logged in users The access rights of the group World are evaluated on the basis of the usual priority rules see section Priority Rules on page 57
256. l addresses as soon as the object has been submitted to Quality Assurance m E mail Release Enter the e mail addresses to which a message can be sent if the Content client is configured accordingly when the object is released Description Keywords Target group Enter additional information on the object You can use this information like the other object infor mation as a search criterion in the object filter Content Client User Manual 141 Chapter 5 Notes In the Keywords field commas are by default interpreted as separa tors between the individual entries Double leading and trailing white spaces such as spaces and tabs are removed If an expression contains a comma that you do not want to be inter preted as a separator enclose the expression in quotation marks Example Paris France French Revolution 18th century Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object Entering Attribute Values In this dialog box you specify the values for the attributes of the object The attributes of the object result from its association with an object type 142 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects attributes from attribute set Microsoft Internet Explorer Oo xj Please enter values for the att
257. le in the Admin client for example However if you installed Admin clients on computers where no WCM server exists the changes are not available there Deleting an Object Type Notes You can only delete an object type if no current versions of objects exist in the Edit QA or Production view that use this object type Older versions of the objects may however exist If an object version is restored that uses the deleted object type the object type will also be restored You can use the utility Database clean up to irretrievably remove a deleted object type This presup poses that there are no older versions of objects using this type For more information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual 476 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client To delete an object type 1 Choose Tools Website administration Object types The Object types dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired object type in the left window pane 3 Choose Delete object type on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon a Icon for deleting an object type 4 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button Managing Attribute Sets For general information on attribute sets refer to section Attributes from the attribute set on page 409 and to the Livelink WCM Server Adminis trator Manual Some of the object types generated during creation of the website are by default assigned to a
258. led object 152 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects based on this category If an object category is assigned to the template selected in the previous step this category is automatically selected here m Language Specify the language for the object This item has no influence on the object content but is used for classification purposes and as a search criterion in the object filter Moreover certain metadata such as the date are displayed in the selected language if they are integrated into the page generated for the object by means of placeholders so called WCM tags m Expiration date Specify the expiration date with time for the object The expiration date defines how long the object remains valid The expiration date of the parent topic is used as the default setting Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the desired date The time can be set manually When the object reaches the expiration date in the Edit view a message is automatically sent to the address specified in the E mail Edit field m Delayed release Specify the publication date with time for the object This determines when the object after having been released by Quality Assurance will be available for the end users in the Production view Click the arrow icon to open a calendar for selecting the date The time can be set manually Suggested file name Enter a name for the page which is generated from the WCM object In man
259. lete the parent template Isolating the template to be deleted You can use the Metadata dialog box to change the assignment of a template to another template In order to delete a template from the template cascade you must isolate it from the cascade Example The template Department is based on the template Depart mentStore which is based on the template Company In order to isolate the template DepartmentStore assign the template Company to the template Department in the Metadata dialog box Once the change to the metadata of the template Department has been released by Quality 406 Livelink WCM Server Working with Templates Assurance the template DepartmentStore is isolated from the template cascade There is no template that is dependent on the template Depart mentStore You can now delete this template see the following figure Templat e Company based on Company Template Change in metadata based on Department og See based on Depar tment Template Department Fig 125 Deleting a template from a cascade Content Client User Manual 407 408 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 14 Working with Special Attributes In addition to the standard metadata further information can be managed for each object This object information is saved in the so called special attributes S
260. lient User Manual 399 Chapter 13 3 Choose Object New or click the appropriate icon E Icon for adding an object The wizard for adding objects opens 4 Make the necessary entries in the fields To create a template select a template object type such as HTML template The remaining fields and the use of the wizard are described in section Adding Objects on the Basis of an Object Type starting on page 134 5 Click the OK button The new object is created by the system and displayed in the status bar with the status changed It can be selected in the wizard for adding objects in the Template field Note The new template should be submitted to Quality Assurance and released before it is assigned to an object Editing and Deleting Templates Templates are also subject to the predefined staging steps A template like any other object is edited in the Edit view The changed template must be submitted to Quality Assurance where it is released or rejected and sent to the person responsible for correction 400 Livelink WCM Server Working with Templates Note Changing a template affects all objects using this template When a change is released by Quality Assurance all objects based on that template are changed automatically This process may be very time consuming You cannot delete a template that is used by other objects If you want to delete a template you must make sur
261. lient There is a separate log for each dependent object 244 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Compound object in the object filter The compound object and the dependent objects may be included in a filter s hitlist You should not perform any actions such as Submit or Release on these objects as this may lead to errors in the Content client Content Client User Manual 245 246 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 7 Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects The staging concept of Livelink WCM Server requires an object to be checked and released by Quality Assurance before it is published in the Production view This chapter explains how to submit new and modified objects to Quality Assurance see the following section m release objects for the Production view see sections Releasing an Object on page 251 and Releasing an Object Directly on page 253 m reject objects that do not meet the quality standards see section Rejecting an Object on page 255 Submitting an Object An object must be submitted so that Quality Assurance can check whether it meets the quality standard of the company and can be released It is possible to undo submitting an object Content Client User Manual 247 Chapter 7 Submitting an Object to Quality Assurance Note When submitting an object make sure that you submit the topic first then the graphics and finally the HTML pages You can only submi
262. lient a converter was configured that supports the format of your source file Procedure 1 2 3 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object that you want to convert Choose Object Convert The converter generates HTML pages that are linked via hyperlinks Content Client User Manual 239 Chapter 6 Editing the Source Object Objective You want to make changes to a source object Afterwards you want to reconvert the source object to generate up to date HTML pages Prerequisites The source object and all of its dependent objects have the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Create Change object Change metadata and Delete for the source object Procedure Proceed exactly as for editing a normal object see section Editing Objects starting on page 177 The only point to be considered is that new dependent objects are created when the changed source object is recon verted Thus all changes made to the dependent objects are discarded automatically Notes A source object for which the Direct release check box is selected shows a specific behavior after the source object has been released by Quality Assurance once it can be released directly by the responsible editor This also releases all dependent objects with the major version number 0 The
263. low Type see Object type URL Uniform Resource Locator A unique address in the World Wide Web WCM server In a WCM system there are several WCM servers working in parallel server processes The exact tasks of a server depend on the server type and server category WCM tag Special element for integrating WCM specific data in an HTML page WCM tags are used in particular when creating templates 512 Livelink WCM Server Glossary Web browser see browser WebDAV The WebDAV Web based Distributed Authoring and Versioning protocol supports Internet and group based working on the basis of standard Internet technologies Thanks to WebDAV users do not need a special client for creating WCM objects jointly editing them and managing them by means of WevDAV capable tools Web repository The name given to the area where the WCM system stores and manages all the objects belonging to a website Web server Program for processing the requests from a browser A web server corresponds to an HTTP server that offers additional web services such as those of a JSP engine Web technology Client server technology based on TCP IP The advantage lies in the open standard which permits the creation of heterogeneous systems Workflow definition Description of a workflow A workflow definition consists of starting points end points activities and transitions Workflow definitions are saved in XPDL format a
264. ly a particular user group to work in a topic area it is not necessary to deny access to the objects in this area to all other groups Simply assign the relevant access right to the respective group For all others the following rule applies what is not explicitly permitted is forbidden 54 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Inheritance of Access Rights The access settings for a topic are automatically transmitted to the pages topics and other objects added to this topic This transmission of access right settings to child objects is known as inheritance Thus the access settings of a topic are inherited by all objects below that topic The access settings for the topic are inherited Ea me by child objects Company Info Fig 10 Inheritance of access rights The inheritance of access right settings by subordinate objects enables you to set the access rights for a website without great efforts You can grant different user groups access to the topics and objects in the website in accordance with their individual tasks Every new object inherits the access rights of the topic to which it belongs Thus if you have granted certain groups roles or users access to a topic they will have the same access rights for any new pages or topics added to the parent topic The access rights inherited from the topic can be changed at any time Such changes to access rights can however only be made by users who have the access right Chan
265. m are known as external references References to objects in another website managed with Livelink WCM Server are also regarded as external references Note When objects are changed external references are not adjusted automatically by Livelink WCM Server i e they are not subject to the reference check Content Client User Manual 47 Chapter 2 Referenced objects Referencing objects InternetSite TnternetSite ieie Wdcome References to References to Careers the object other objects Company informatio News 7 Products InternetSite SiteMap Support peda InternetSi te NewProducts ProductOverview Product overview Companyintranet InternetSite NewProducts External references Company Intranet Company B Companyntranet welcome htm Www companyB example Fig 7 References of a WCM object Absolute and Relative References When creating hyperlinks in an HTML page a distinction is made between absolute and relative references An absolute reference contains the complete address of the destination object A relative reference by contrast only specifies that part of the address that differs from the address of the source page 48 Livelink WCM Server Concepts http www company example products index htm Absolute sy a Y Relative reference i reference http www company example products ProductOverview htm Fig 8 Absolute and relative
266. m Java String oid VIPOID ID of the object m JavaScript var oid VIPOID ID of the object Special case CSS document There are different ways of specifying URLs in CSS documents To enable the WCM system to identify a URL as a reference you can precede the URL with the expression VIPURL Please note that the URL must be separated from the right bracket bya single quote double quote or a space Examples This reference will not be recognized BODY background url VIPURL blue gif Content Client User Manual 213 Chapter 6 The following references will be recognized BODY background url VIPURL blue gif BODY background url VIPURL blue gif BODY background url VIPURL blue gif Deleting References Objective You want to delete references of an object Note In the References dialog box you can only delete references that are marked as NEW All other references are already entered in the object content and can only be deleted by making the necessary changes in the content see section Editing Object Content starting on page 178 Prerequisites m The reference is labeled NEW m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read Change object and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 I
267. mation 431 integrate metadata 428 integrate object content 428 integrate special attributes 433 integrate standard metadata 428 integrate workflow information 432 label parameter 453 locale parameter 449 oid parameter 457 option_id parameter 454 Livelink WCM Server option_mode parameter 455 order parameter 459 parameters 440 required parameter 453 separator parameter 448 target parameter 461 thumbnails parameter 452 type parameter 450 WCM tag insert enable InSite Editing parameter 183 format parameter 182 label parameter 182 locale parameter 182 OID parameter 182 position in the Metadata dialog parameter 184 required parameter 182 select metadata item 179 specify parameters 181 183 starting wizard 179 type parameter 182 WCM tag dialog box 299 web document object data type 471 website manage 465 wizard for adding a relator 341 for adding an object based ona template 148 for adding objects based on object type 134 for editing metadata of several objects 196 Word document object type 69 workflow 257 application example 287 assign 282 create 272 delete 280 display information 92 Content Client User Manual Index edit 278 edit object 285 functional area 62 introduction 30 object data type 472 object type 69 remove assignment 284 workflow assignment create 282 remove 284 workflow definition create 272 delete 280 edit 278 structure 258 workflow elements
268. mbled object 462 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Content Client User Manual 463 464 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 16 Managing Websites in the Content Client The entire management of your WCM system is performed via the Admin client Certain website administration functions are also available in the Content client These include adding editing and deleting object types see the following section m adding editing and deleting attribute sets see section Managing Attribute Sets on page 477 m adding editing and deleting object categories see section Managing Object Categories on page 485 Note For managing websites via the Content client you require the administration right Website administration Administration rights are assigned in the Admin client Please refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual for additional information Content Client User Manual 465 Chapter 16 Managing Object Types For general information on object types refer to section Object Types on page 65 Object types are managed separately for each website After a website has been created the default object types are available To view the object types of the current website choose Tools gt Website administration gt Object types The Object types dialog box opens The object types are displayed in a list in the left window pane To view the settings
269. more websites can be managed A website can be published for Internet intranet or extranet access The website objects that you manage with Livelink WCM Server HTML pages images JSP scripts etc are referred to as WCM objects They are stored in a data base Content Client User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Website objects in Livelink WCM Server go through clearly defined stages of editing quality assurance and publication for productive operation This process is called staging and applies to all objects managed with Livelink WCM Server Depending on the processing status there are different views of the WCM objects For example there may be changes to an object that have not yet been submitted to QA and of course not yet released for productive operation The different views of the WCM objects are provided by the so called deployment systems which are managed by means of the Admin client Deployment systems generate pages for the WCM objects stored in the database These pages can be displayed in a browser In addition to the staging Livelink WCM Server enables you to assigna workflow to the objects in order to define several steps of editing and quality assurance The Staging and Workflow of Livelink WCM Server All objects of the websites that you manage with Livelink WCM Server pass through fixed stages editing quality assurance and publication for productive operation Editing and quality assurance of the objects is car
270. mount J payment_deadline lt Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 48 Specifying the property values for a new object The fields of this dialog box are determined by the object category that is assigned to the object The example shows the properties from the object category Invoice which has been added via Tools Website administration Object categories or via the Admin client To add the object click the OK button 144 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Selecting a Workflow Transition Note This dialog box is only displayed if you have assigned a workflow to the object in one of the previous steps and if this workflow has more than one starting point or the starting point has more than one transition In this dialog box you determine the first activity which is to be performed on the new object Select one of the available transitions Z Select transition Microsoft Internet Explorer E ol x Please select the transition to be used For starting the workflow For the new object Transition Add graphic Start gt Create graphic Revise Text Start gt Write text lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 49 Selecting a workflow transition To add the object click the OK button Content Client User Manual 145 Chapter 5 Entering a Remark In the Remark field of this dialog box you can enter information that is written to the log
271. must not be more than 255 characters long Also you should adapt the length of the title in such a way that the resulting file name meets the requirements of your operating system Under Windows the absolute path to a topic and a generated page may not be longer than 240 and 260 characters respectively Content Client User Manual 161 Chapter 5 m Object type Select the object s type from the list e g Frame topic Topic Compound object The available object types depend on the entries you made in the previous dialog box Note If the start file for the import is a frame object and you select the object type Topic the object type will automatically be changed to Frame topic during the import Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object The other steps correspond to the procedure for adding objects by means of the function New from object type See m Specifying Basic Properties on page 137 m Defining Object Responsibilities on page 140 m Entering a Remark on page 146 Copying an Object Objective You want to add a copy of the current object at a different location in the object tree 162 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Prerequisites 6
272. n top gt lt table width 100 border 0 cellspacing 1 cellpadding 1 gt lt tr gt lt td class lightgrey valign top gt lt table width 100 border 0 cellspacing 1 cellpadding 5 gt lt tr gt lt td bgcolor FFFFFF gt Contact lt p gt VIPCONTACT edit on default on lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt td gt Content Client User Manual 327 Chapter 10 lt tr gt lt table gt lt p gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt center gt lt div gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt No VIPCONTENT tag is required for the template As the entire data of the partner is contained in the properties from the object category there is no explicit content Steps 3 Determine default values You have the possibility to define default values for the individual proper ties in the template In this way you can point the editor responsible for the partner object to the information the editor is to enter in the individual fields The default values from the template are adopted by the objects based on the template if the respective field of these objects is empty The default values are not shown in the Metadata dialog box of the objects they are only used for generating the corresponding pages To determine default values 1 Open the Partnertemplate template in the integrated HTML editor 2 Inthe Design mode select a WCM tag such as VIPPARTNERNAME and choose Ed
273. n Text Corporation Corporate Headquarters 275 Frank Tompa Drive Waterloo Ontario Canada N2L 0A1 519 888 7111 If you subscribe to our Customer Assistance Program or would like more information about the support program write to Open Text Corporation s Customer Support at support opentext com or telephone 800 540 7292 or 519 888 9933 Our support hours are Monday through Friday 8 30 a m to 8 p m EST If you have comments or suggestions regarding this documentation write to the Open Text Corporation Publications Group at documentation opentext com For more information about Open Text Corporation s products and services visit our home page at http www opentext com 2006 IXOS SOFTWARE AG Werner v Siemens Ring 20 85630 Grasbrunn Germany Tel 49 89 4629 0 Fax 49 89 4629 1199 eMail office ixos de Internet http www ixos com All rights reserved including those regarding reproduction copying or other use or communication of the contents of this document or parts thereof No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted to third parties processed using electronic retrieval systems copied distributed or used for public demonstration in any form without the written consent of IXOS SOFTWARE AG We reserve the right to update or modify the contents Any and all information that appears within illustrations of screenshots is provided coincidentally to better demonstrate the funct
274. n avoid manual downloading and uploading of the file by selecting the Use Download applet check box For the exact procedures refer to sections Checking out with Download applet on page 169 and Checking in with Download applet on page 174 Important Do not change the working directory or the setting of the Use Download applet check box while working with the Content client Otherwise problems may occur as the system cannot calculate the file name and file path for automatic upload and download The Integrated HTML Editor The Configuration dialog box provides especially for editing HTML files the check box Use integrated HTML editor The integrated HTML editor is an applet and thus runs within the browser When you start the integrated HTML editor for the first time a security warning is displayed You are asked to accept the certificate for the editor 114 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Warning Security E xj Do you want to trust the signed applet distributed by Ephox Pty Ltd Publisher authenticity verified by Thawte Consulting cc amp The security certificate was issued by a company that is trusted Gy The security certificate has not expired and is still valid Caution Ephox Pty Ltd asserts that this content is safe You should only accept this content if you trust Ephox Pty Ltd to make that assertion More Details yes No Aways Fig 38 Secu
275. n info dialog box 80 Fig 20 The user interface of the Content client 81 Fig 21 The Topic structure view 83 Fig 22 The Template structure view 83 Fig 23 The Object list view 84 Fig 24 The Favorites list 85 Fig 25 Object information in the status bar 86 Fig 26 Sending an e mail 94 8 Livelink WCM Server Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 The Object filter view The My objects view Filters in the My worklist view The My worklist view The Search view Result of a search The action list The Log dialog box Display version function in the Log dialog box The Configuration dialog box Configuring the basic settings of a profile Security warning when starting the integrated HTML editor Configuring the toolbar Configuring the action list Adding an application class Entering the file extension for an application class Configuring the dynamic deployment Specifying title type and workflow of a new object Specifying the basic properties of a new object Specifying the responsibilities for a new object Specifying the attribute values for a new object Specifying the property values for a new object Selecting a wor
276. n specify settings in multiple configura tion sections To make further settings select the appropriate configuration item in the tree on the left Content Client User Manual 109 Chapter 4 Configuring the Basic Settings To specify the basic settings of the profile 1 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 In the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box mark the topmost node of the tree structure This is the name of the profile The basic settings are displayed in the right window pane Basic settings Profile name Default profile Language Engish USA X Working directory JV Use Download applet T Use integrated HTML editor JV Regenerate page with released template 7 Suppress e mail dialogs Suppress remark dialogs IV Synchronize object preview IV Use Activex JV Use Java Web Start 7 Display object information in status bar 7 Hide disabled items in context menu Fig 37 Configuring the basic settings of a profile 110 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client The following table gives an overview of the individual configuration options Table 10 Basic settings of a profile Basic settings Effect if selected Profile name Name of the current profile You cannot change the name of the default profile Regenerate page with released template Language Language of the graphical user
277. n the WCM system with an external file that is stored on your local hard disk or in your network Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to replace 3 Choose Edit Replace The Select file dialog box opens 190 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Select file Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 loj x Please select a file From file Browse OK Cancel Help Fig 65 Dialog box for replacing an object 4 Click the Browse button The dialog box for selecting files opens 5 Navigate to the file that is to replace the object and click the Open button Note Make sure that the file you selected has a file type that matches the object type of the object to be replaced For example if you want to replace an object of type GIF image you must select a file of the file type GIF Otherwise an error message appears This error can only be remedied by selecting Edit gt Undo The file you selected appears in the Select file dialog box 6 Click the OK button If you are working with the Download applet the system checks whether the selected file contains embedded objects If there are embedded objects an accordi
278. n the context menu or click the corre sponding icon E Icon for adding an object type Content Client User Manual 467 Chapter 16 3 Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the process Specifying General Information for the Object Type In the first dialog box you specify general information for the object type Aj New object type Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 loj x Please specify a name for the new object type You can also select a symbol for displaying and add a comment OO En Browse Comment lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 131 Specifying general information for the object type Name Enter a name for the new object type The name must be unique within a website and cannot be changed later The name must not be more than 17 characters long The following characters are permitted m a z and A Z no umlauts and special characters 0 9 the first character must always be a letter m _ underline 468 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Note The following names are reserved and may not be used admin acl ats att cda con dyn lat lin obj oty par pri pro pty rli sta tta tto The name of the new object type is used to generate an internal name Among other things this internal name is used to access WCM objects of a given type via the WCM Java API Note If you want the name of the object type to be
279. n where you saved it and edit the file with your preferred editor Content Client User Manual 171 Chapter 6 Checking out with integrated HTML editor 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to check out 3 Choose Edit Check out or click the appropriate icon ay Icon for checking out an object The integrated HTML editor starts in a separate window The content of the checked out object is transferred to the applet 2 InternetSite Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Fie Edt View Insert Format Tools Table His r E o FLIELI eee Norma gt favia v z B Z y a E Fig 60 The integrated HTML editor 4 Edit the object directly in this window You can use the modes Design object preview similar to browser display and Code editing the HTML source code for editing the object 172 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Undoing Check Out Objective An object was checked out by another user and has not yet been changed The object s status is checked out You want to edit the object yourself and thus undo the Check out action Prerequisites m The object has the status checked out m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the checked out object 3 Choose Edit Undo or click the appropriate icon
280. n you copy a topic the child objects of that topic are copied too However only those child objects for which you have at least the access right Read are copied The copies of the topic and the subordinate objects have the major version number 0 the status changed and you are their author 164 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Content Client User Manual 165 166 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 6 Editing Objects In this chapter the object editing functions are introduced and explained Object editing includes editing the object content see section Editing Objects on page 177 maintaining object information see section Editing Metadata on page 193 maintaining the links between the objects see section Maintaining References on page 201 setting the access rights see section Editing Access Rights on page 215 m deleting objects see section Deleting Objects on page 227 First the two basic work steps Check out and Check in are described see the following section At the end of this chapter you will find informa tion on converting objects see section Converting Objects starting on page 233 Content Client User Manual 167 Chapter 6 Checking Objects Out and In In order to edit an object s content and references in the Content client you have to know the functions Check out and Check in This section introduces the followin
281. nails activate 422 time data type 439 time stamp data type 439 time consuming actions 101 timeout special attribute 415 title metadata item 46 WCM tag 430 title bar 81 toolbar configure 116 Content client 81 workflow modeler 265 topic object data type 471 object type 69 topic structure 82 transition add 268 527 Index delete 270 move 269 type metadata item 46 WCM tag 430 U undo changes 186 check out 173 submit 250 update relator manually 361 update an object 189 Update Edit version automatically folder relator 349 relator 345 URL WCM tag 431 URL of the statified page WCM tag 431 URL of the surrogate page WCM tag 431 user add to access control list 216 set access rights 220 withdraw access rights 222 user interface 81 V variable in filter 382 version 87 metadata item 46 restore 186 WCM tag 431 view Edit 29 my objects 97 my worklist 98 528 object list 84 Production 29 QA 29 search 100 select 77 template structure 83 topic structure 82 W WCM object 27 access rights 50 content 39 metadata 42 references 46 status 32 structure 38 template 41 type 65 version 87 WCM tag add parameter 461 buttons parameter 460 default parameter 452 edit parameter 458 encoding parameter 450 filter parameter 451 for Livelink standard metadata 358 for user defined Livelink metadata 359 format parameter 441 in general 427 insert in HTML editor 179 integrate global infor
282. namic deployment configure 125 object preview 90 dynamic deployment system 90 E edit application class 124 assembled object 324 attribute set 480 cascading template 405 checked out object 184 compound object 240 content of a relator 354 filter 383 Livelink metadata 355 metadata of several objects 196 object category 487 object content 178 object type 475 profile 128 several objects 365 source object 240 special attributes 411 template 400 workflow definition 278 Edit view 29 editor 37 configure for file types 121 editor program for file types 121 e mail send 92 with link to Content client 94 E mail Edit add object 141 Livelink WCM Server metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 E mail QA add object 141 metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 E mail Release add object 141 metadata item 43 WCM tag 429 embedded object 146 end point change size 268 delete 270 move 267 examples for filter expressions 393 Excel document object type 66 expiration date add object 139 WCM tag 429 external references 47 203 external URL data type 436 F favorites list 85 file extension WCM tag 429 file types configure editor program 121 filter add 377 delete 385 edit 383 use variables 382 filter editor 376 add filter 377 filter expression language 385 combination operators 390 comparators 385 comparison values 388 Content Client User Manual Index examples 393 nested filters 392 search for principals 391 search
283. nd can be edited graphically by means of the Content Workflow Modeler WWW World Wide Web In the WWW HTML documents are linked with each other by means of URLs It is one of the most frequently used Internet services WYSIWYG What you see is what you get A buzzword for the property of files that enables you to see on the display screen almost exactly what will appear when the document is printed XML Extensible Markup Language A standard for defining the formal structure of documents XSL Extensible Stylesheet Language A standard for commands used for converting XML documents to other formats XSL is often used for converting XML to HTML Content Client User Manual 513 514 Livelink WCM Server Index A absolute references 48 Absolute URL special attribute 416 access control list add principal 216 remove principal 222 access rights add principal 216 and actions 50 default settings for 54 edit 215 for the Production view 225 in general 50 inheritance 55 interpret 54 priority rules 57 remove principal 222 reset all 226 set 220 set for all users 223 Access rights dialog box 215 action list available functions 102 configure 119 in general 101 Activex 112 activity change size 268 delete 270 move 267 add application class 122 attribute 480 attribute set 479 attribute to attribute set 483 cascading template 405 Content Client User Manual folder relator 346 Livelink object as WCM obj
284. nformation of the assembled object is managed in the Metadata dialog box and can be edited as usual Application Examples For a better understanding the following two application examples show how to work with assembled objects Note The examples described below are based on the example website HeroLeasing which is supplied with Livelink WCM Server and can be imported into the WCM system The website is located in the directory WCM installation directory import HeroLeasing archive For further information on importing websites refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual 324 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Content Assembly with the Content Client This example describes a typical scenario for using the functions of Content Assembly and demonstrates how to proceed when adding assembled objects via the Content client Scenario For realizing special tasks and on site projects your company cooperates with several partner companies On the website of your company these partners are presented with their areas of expertise experiences and contact data The layout of these partner profiles should be consistent For each partner the following information should be displayed name m slogan m short introduction URL of the website detailed description m contact person and address m logo Prerequisites m You have the access rights Read and Create for the topics t
285. ng dialog box is displayed Content Client User Manual 191 Chapter 6 192 Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Exple Select the embedded objects that you want to import Use the context menu to select a storage location for these objects By default the embedded objects are added to the same topic as the HTML page InternetSite_138_admin 03 1_filesfimagl select topic Remove topic Cancel Help Fig 66 Selecting embedded objects when replacing an object In this dialog box you determine which embedded objects are to be imported into the WCM system together with the selected file You can deselect individual or all objects These objects will not be imported If an object with the same name and object type already exists in your website the O D column shows the OID of this object Deselect existing objects to prevent adding multiple objects containing the same file e g the same image By default the embedded objects are added to the topic containing the referencing object To specify a different storage location for indi vidual objects choose Select topic on the context menu and mark the desired topic in the selection dialog box The Topic column will show the OID of the storage location Select the desired objects and click the OK button Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object Submit or clic
286. ng this object type refer to appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML Livelink WCM Server Concepts Content Client User Manual 71 72 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 3 Working with the Content Client The Content client is used to create edit check and publish the content of a website This chapter shows you the first steps in working with the Content client and introduces you to the user interface and the log A detailed description of the functions of Livelink WCM Server can be found in the following chapters In order to work with the Content client and make editorial changes toa website you do not need to install anything on your workstation All you need is a browser Configure the browser in such a way that JavaScript is activated non persistent cookies are accepted To be able to make use of profiles your browser must also accept persistent cookies encoding is set to Auto Select or to the encoding of the Content server which you access with the Content client e g Unicode UTF 8 it allows additional browser windows so called popup windows to open Note If you work with the operating system Windows XP please switch off ClearType font smoothing Right click on the desktop and choose Properties Select the Appearance tab and click the Effects button Mark the check box next to Use the following method to smooth edges of screen fonts and click Standard Content Client
287. ng with WCM Tags 410 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes Special Attributes in the Metadata Dialog Box The special attributes of an object are managed on the Properties and Attributes tabs in the Metadata dialog box Each attribute or property corresponds to a field in which you can store special object type specific or object category specific information about the object For information on how to use the Metadata dialog box refer to section Editing Metadata starting on page 193 Example Via Tools gt Website administration gt Object categories or in the Admin client the object category Invoice has been added with the prop erties invoice_recipient invoice_amount and payment_deadline If you assign this object category to your object the Properties tab of the Metadata dialog box will look as follows General Properties Attributes E mail Info WCM tags invoice_recipient O aT payment_amount OO payment_deadline X Save Reset Help Fig 126 The object category Invoice in the Metadata dialog box Here you can for example save the information on the deadline for paying the invoice In the field of the property payment_deadline enter the respective date Content Client User Manual 411 Chapter 14 Special Attributes in the Object Filter By means of the filter editor you can search for special attributes The
288. nk WCM Server Adding Objects Note Please choose only files that have a file extension After you have selected a file the selection of object types will be restricted Only those object types that match the file extension of the selected file are displayed m Workflow If you want to assign a workflow to the new object click the desired workflow in the drop down list Object type Select the object type from the list e g HTML page HTML template Topic Specifying an object type is mandatory For some object types it is possible to change the type subsequently Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object Specifying Basic Properties In this dialog box you specify the basic properties of the object Content Client User Manual 137 Chapter 5 e Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer f Paniki Please specify standard metadata The entry is optional Heading Template templates Herotemplate Herotemplate OID zal al g Object category INo category Language German Germany Expiration date 08 15 2013 05 30 12 PM z Delayed release lt Suggested file name PP Direct release Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 45 S
289. ns The users cannot enter free text in the attribute field You can localize the attribute values i e define sepa rate values for different languages 454 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags To use the option_id parameter 1 Define the values for the attribute in an XML file based on the following DTD lt DOCTYPE optionset lt ELEMENT optionset option gt lt ELEMENT option value gt lt ATTLIST option name CDATA REQUIRED gt lt ELEMENT value PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST value locale CDATA REQUIRED gt 2 On the basis of this XML file add an object of type XML document to the website 3 Add the attribute s WCM tag to a website object and specify the option_id parameter for this tag As the parameter value enter the OID of the XML document By means of the option_mode parameter you can determine whether the users are allowed to select only one or multiple values Permitted values for the option_mode parameter are m single The user may select exactly one value This is the default setting if the option_mode parameter is not set m multiple Multiple values may be selected Example You want to ensure that systematic keywords are entered in the Metadata dialog box in order to describe the customer invoices In this way you want to facilitate quick searches for the invoices in the Content client Depending on the invoice s language the keywords are to be in English and German re
290. ns the expression products Within this filter expression the stan dard filter released is used 392 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Examples for Filter Expressions Table 31 Examples for Filter Expressions Filter expression Description oty_name HTML Finds objects of type HTML page sta_name checked_out Finds objects with the status checked out title like WCM title contains ignorecase auto Finds objects whose title begins with WCM Finds objects whose title contains the character string auto Uppercase and lowercase letters are ignored price lt 1000 Finds objects with the special attribute price of type Integer with a value less than 1000 date_expire lt now Finds objects that have exceeded their expiration date date_expire gt 2005 05 01 childof 500 Finds objects expiring after May 1 2005 Finds objects subordinate to the topic with the OID 500 oty_name HTML or oty_name TOPIC Finds objects of type HTML page or Topic created_by jstein and sta_name edited Content Client User Manual Finds objects created by jstein with the status changed 393 Chapter 12 Notes on Filtering m You can directly release an object if the Direct release check box is selected for the object
291. nt without the lt xml tag is inserted at the location marked by VIPCONTENT XML template The lt xml tag is adopted from the html or that has been assigned template The content of the XML jsp an HTML template or a document without the lt xml tag JSP template is inserted in the XML template at the location marked by VIPCONTENT Then this content is inserted in the HTML or JSP template at the location marked by VIPCONTENT XSLT template For all WCM tags recognized the html that has been assigned respective values are inserted inthe jsp or an HTML template or XML document and in the XSLT xml Content Client User Manual 499 Appendix A Application Examples On the basis of two application examples the interaction of the XML object types is described in this section Transformation of XML Data on the Client Side This example explains how to display product information stored in an XML file in a clearly structured way on an HTML page by means of an XSL file The transformation of the XML data to HTML is performed on the client side i e in your browser Step 1 Create the XML document Your product information is saved in the file product xml Use the Content client to add an XML document based on this file Code of the file product xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt product gt lt name gt software package lt name gt lt order_no gt 123456789 lt order_no
292. nt an XML template in Livelink WCM Server This is for example useful if you manage many XML documents with a similar structure Code segments contained in all XML documents can be offloaded into an XML template 494 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML During page generation the content of the XML document is mixed with the content of the XML template The following must be considered for XML if the lt xml tag is located in the first line of the XML document it is not integrated in the content of the generated page In this case Livelink WCM Server assumes that such a tag already exists in the XML template Sample code for an XML template lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt product gt lt name gt product template lt name gt lt order_no gt VIPORDER_NO lt order_no gt lt price gt VIPPRICE lt price gt VIPCONTENT lt product gt The Object Type XSLT document An object of type XSLT document is used to define transformation rules that are applied to XML documents This way you can easily format the content of an XML document Sample code for an XSLT document lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl stylesheet version 1 0 xmins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt lt xsl output method htm1l version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 indent yes gt lt xsl template match product gt lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt lt xsl value of select
293. nt Assembly can be used in both the Content client and InSite Editing In this chapter you get information on the following topics how to work with Content Assembly see the following section m editing assembled objects see section Editing Assembled Objects on page 324 Content Client User Manual 317 Chapter 10 two examples of using the Content Assembly functions see section Application Examples on page 324 Note The functions of Content Assembly are not limited to assem bled objects They can also be used in connection with other objects For an application example refer to section Application Example The HeroLeasing Website starting on page 304 General Procedure Before you can use Content Assembly you must perform the following steps Step 1 Add an object category responsible web designer First you determine which information the assembled object will be composed of For this purpose you create an object category Each infor mation of the assembled object is represented by a property of this object category If you want to use Content Assembly for creating press releases for example you require an object category named PressRelease which contains the properties Title Introduction MainText Date and Image The property s data type controls the format of the information on the generated page The following table lists the most important d
294. nt Client User Manual 319 Chapter 10 Data type Format used Object content Returns the generated content of the referenced object Only the content of the body element is returned WCM tags are replaced by the metadata of the refer enced object Object source Returns the generated content of the referenced object Only the content of the body element is returned WCM tags are replaced by the metadata of the current object Note When integrating WCM objects by means of special attributes of type Object content or Object source it may happen that a user sees the content of an object without having read rights for the object Example The content of object A is integrated in object B by means of a WCM tag The user only has read rights for object B However via the respec tive page the user can also see the content of object A Object URL Returns depending on the settings of the deployment system the URL of the referenced object as a relative absolute or server relative reference OID Returns the OID as a string Text Returns the text itself Time Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object the time in the following form 15 59 23 German 3 59 23 PM English Boolean value Returns depending on the language setting of the WCM object true or false or wahr or falsch 320 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Ob
295. ntent client absolute_urls VIPABSOLUTE_ Absolute URL String URLS See section Statifi cation on page 413 applet VIPAPPLET Applet String att_version VIPATT_ Revision String VERSION bits_per_pixel VIPBITS_PER_ Bits per pixel Large PIXEL integer Content Client User Manual 433 Chapter 15 Attribute WCM tag Attribute name in Datatype the Content client code VIPCODE Code String converter VIPCONVERTER Converters String copyright VIPCOPYRIGHT Copyright String editor VIPEDITOR Editor String generate_static VIPGENERATE_ Statify page String STATIC See section Statifi cation on page 413 height VIPHEIGHT Height Large integer object_size VIPOBJECT_ Object size Large SIZE integer resolution VIPRESOLUTION Resolution Large integer robots VIPROBOTS Robots String source VIPSOURCE Source String thumbnail VIPTHUMBNAIL Thumbnail OID See section Acti vating Thumbnails for Objects on page 422 434 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Attribute WCM tag Attribute name in Data type the Content client timeout VIPTIMEOUT Timeout Large See section Statifi Nteger cation on page 413 width VIPWIDTH Width Large integer In the column Data type you can see which data type has been assigned to the attribute This data type controls the format that the object information integrated by me
296. nthe navigation area mark the object from which you want to delete a reference 3 Choose View References to open the References dialog box 214 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects 4 On the Referenced objects tab mark the reference that you want to delete 5 Choose Remove reference on the context menu The reference is deleted in the WCM system Since the reference has not yet been entered in the content of the referencing object this completes the deletion process Editing Access Rights Note For viewing the Access rights dialog box you require the func tional area Access rights dialog To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info For general information on the access rights see section Access Rights starting on page 50 In this section the various basic functions for setting the access rights for an object are described It is explained how to m adda principal to the access control list of an object thus granting the principal access to the object see the following section configure access to an object for a principal see section Setting the Access Rights of a Principal starting on page 220 m remove a principal from the access control list of an object thus denying the principal access to the object see section Removing a Principal from the Access Control List starting on page 222 configure access to an object for all users of the website see sect
297. o relative URL of the statified page VIP_STATIC_URL Note The metadata item URL of the statified page only has a value in the case of form based statification see section Statification of Form Instances on page 418 URL of surrogate page VIPSURROGATE_URL Version VIPVERSION Notes Each metadata item is assigned a certain data type that has a special format This data type controls the format that the object information integrated by means of WCM tags has in the generated page For an overview of the data types of the standard metadata and the formats used by Livelink WCM Server refer to table Comparison values in the filter editor on page 388 For information on integrating special attributes refer to section Inte grating special attributes in a page on page 433 Integrating global information in a page The following table lists the WCM tags for integrating global information Content Client User Manual 431 Chapter 15 Table 36 WCM tags for global information Information WCM tag Installation directory of the server VIPSERVERPATH VIPP port VIPINTRANET_PORT HTTP port VIPHTTP_PORT Host name of the server VIPHOST Website containing the object VIPSITE VIPWEBSITE Name of the server on which the deploy ment system is running VIPSERVER Name of the deployment system VIPDEPLOY
298. o which you want to add the template for the partner objects and the partner objects themselves m You are assigned the functional areas Dynamic and Advanced or the functional areas your WCM administrator has provided for adding templates and assembled objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info m You have the administration right Website administration Content Client User Manual 325 Chapter 10 Procedure Step 1 Create the object category Partner Add the object category Partner with the respective properties The following table shows the properties used in this example with their data types and the corresponding WCM tags Table 22 Properties of the object category Partner Property Data type WCM tag partnername String VIPPARTNERNAME slogan String VIPSLOGAN introduction Text VIPINTRODUCTION partnerurl External URL VIPPARTNERURL partnerdescription Formatted text VIPPARTNERDESCRIPTION contact Text VIPCONTACT logo Object URL VIPLOGO Step 2 Create the template Define the layout for the partner profiles by means of a template For this purpose add a template of type HTML template and assign the object category Partner to this template In our example this template has the title Partnertemplate Check out the template and edit it according to your guidelines Integrate the properties d
299. o J Title U Template Without template ox al R Workflow lt none gt lt lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 52 Specifying title and template when adding objects on the basis of a template m Title Enter a name for the object The title is used to identify the object and is displayed both in the header and in the navigation area Entering a title is mandatory Note Titles must not be more than 255 characters long Also you should adapt the length of the title in such a way that the resulting file name meets the requirements of your operating system Under Windows the absolute path to a topic and a generated page may not be longer than 240 and 260 characters respectively Template Assign a template to the object By assigning a template you define the layout of the page 150 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Specifying a template is mandatory Click the icon to open a window with the template structure If configured see section Activating Thumbnails for Objects on page 422 thumbnails for the individual templates will be displayed Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft internen Thumbnail Type OID Title Version Status 56 Herotemplate 1 0 0 Herotemplate horizontal Maintemplate Partnertemplate Ok Clear Cancel Help Fig 53 Template selection with thumbnails Select the desired template and confirm by clicking the O
300. o edit The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame 4 Choose Change value on the context menu or click the icon An excerpt from the Metadata dialog box opens The input element s type depends on the data type see table Data types with formats used on page 436 300 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Men in Yellow Partner Men in Yellow Men Just another well done project in yellow H Men in Yellow s core competencies are the design Contact development and implementation of complex privenel exirenet end Intemet projects Schwarzallee 1 22299 Hamburg 4 Metadata Microsoft Internet Explorer loj xj Aenean wel pede tellus introduction Donec sit ecb Men in Yellow s core competencies are the design development and liquam sz implementation of complex intranet extranet and Internet projects elementum tellus Duis gravida or E Phasellus t Save Reset Cancel Help Fig 87 Editing an object fragment via InSite Editing 5 Make the desired changes 6 Click the Save button Using the default value from the template The default value is the value that a metadata item has in the template For using the default value from the template the default parameter must be set for the WCM tag used for integrating the fragment see section The default Parameter on page 452 To adopt the default value from the template 1 Start InSite Editing 2 Navigate to the o
301. oduction view by means of the function Remove page cannot be restored by means of the function Regenerate page You have to release the current version of the object once again for the version to become available in the Production view A page that has been removed from the Production view cannot be found by means of the filter functions of the Content client Neither is this information saved in the WCM object Thus we recommend that you edit such objects directly after performing the Remove page function 232 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Converting Objects In addition to the familiar method of working where the focus is on indi vidual documents or files it may be necessary to manage more complex document structures These structures may consist of a large number of files e g in cases where a conversion program converter is used to generate numerous HTML files from a single word processor document The users want to view these complex structures as a single document since from their point of view they are a logically coherent object Although a converter generates many individual HTML pages they all belong together from a topic point of view For this reason the logical connection between the individual HTML pages must not be lost when the object is integrated in the WCM system In this section the following aspects of converting are described m process of automatic conversion by means of a conve
302. om the XML object looks as follows 504 Livelink WCM Server Livelink WCM Server and XML lt html gt lt head gt lt head gt lt body gt lt table width 40 gt lt tr gt lt th colspan 2 align left gt software package lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt order no lt td gt lt td gt 123456789 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt price lt td gt lt td gt 1250 euro lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td colspan 2 gt lt em gt The all in one package for developers Out now lt em gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt In the Production view the HTML page looks as follows software package order no 123456789 price 1250 euro The all in one package for devel Out now Fig 138 Result of the transformation on the server side As transformation is performed on the server side the source code has the format HTML Content Client User Manual 505 506 Livelink WCM Server Glossary Access control list For each WCM object users groups roles and group roles that have access to this object can be specified The individual access rights are specified separately for each principal authorized to access the object Also called ACL ACL Access Control List Activity Workflow step to which a principal user group or role is assigned An activity step represents the tasks of the assigned principal There are t
303. ompany Info io Be 18 Services fen Company Info oO Be 14 Site Map fen A Ba 15 Support fen Ba 16 Workflows jen n Ba 7 en oO Fig 112 Filter hitlist For each object the object type OID title path to the root object and status are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the hitlist by the criterion in this column For example clicking on the Title column sorts the list by title in ascending alphabetical order To reverse the sort order click the header row again This way you can clearly arrange long lists You can determine the maximum number of objects to be displayed in the filter hitlist If the number of objects found exceeds the value specified the hitlist is displayed on several pages By means of a number bar below the hitlist you can browse through the individual pages To apply the filter again click the Apply filter again icon in the navigation area Content Client User Manual 371 Chapter 12 Ed Icon for applying a filter again To repeat the search for a topic located higher in the object hierarchy click the icon above the drop down list or the respective entry in the path By double clicking a topic in the hitlist you repeat the search in this topic Selecting Objects for Editing You can mark one or more objects in the list in order to edit them If you want to edit all objects found in the object filter select the check box Apply action to all objects Editing Select
304. on to an end point the assignment between object and work flow is removed Application Example For a better understanding the following example shows the procedure of forwarding an object through a workflow Note The directory WCM installation directory examples workflows contains further example workflows in XPDL format Scenario The group Marketing is among other things responsible for creating product data sheets Within the group there are the roles Editor Designer QA 1 and QA 2 which have different access rights according to their tasks The following table shows the roles within the group Marketing with the assigned users and access rights as well as the respective tasks Table 18 The group Marketing Role User Access rights Task Editor kblume Read Create Create product pdeville Change object descriptions Delete Designer mmoreno Read Change object Create graphics for hshepard product descriptions QA 1 dcarson Read Release Check text and graphics eschmiat QA 2 mrossi Read Release Finally check text and abianchi graphics Content Client User Manual 287 Chapter 8 A workflow for editing data sheets already exists In the WCM system this workflow is available as workflow object with the title DataSheet The following figure shows this workfl
305. onal areas and object types Object types with description Staging steps and e mail notification Activating links for e mails in the mail conf xml file Basic settings of a profile Navigation settings of a profile Settings for the object attributes in a profile Expressions for identifying references Object statuses and possible initial activity Possible transitions in the workflow and required access rights Commands in the menu bar of the workflow modeler Graphical representation of workflow elements The group Marketing Configuration items of InSite Editing Important data types with formats used Properties of the object category PressRelease Properties of the object category Partner WCM tags for the most common Livelink metadata Standard filters in the object filter Standard filters in the My objects view Comparators in the filter editor Content Client User Manual 35 40 43 50 54 62 66 93 95 111 118 121 211 259 260 265 271 287 310 319 321 326 358 368 369 386 13 Table 27 Comparison values in the filter editor 388 Table 28 Examples of the spelling of comparators 389 Table 29 Combination operators in the filter editor 390 Table 30 Principal operators in the filter editor 391 Table 31 Examples for Filter Expressions 393 Table 32 Body tag when combining object and template 398 Table 33 Sample configuration for the special attribute St
306. ons m Yes Click this button to confirm the security prompt This is neces sary for working with the Download applet If you also select the Always trust content from Gauss Interprise AG check box you accept the certificate Afterwards this security prompt will no longer appear when you are working with the Down load applet m No lf you do not confirm the prompt you cannot work with the Down load applet More Info Click this button to request more information about the certificate 170 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Checking out without Download applet 1 2 3 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object that you want to check out Choose Edit Check out or click the appropriate icon f Icon for checking out an object A window opens that contains a link to the respective file in the export directory of the WCM system Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 x The checked out object is available on the server in file InternetSite_18_EMail htm Please use the browser functions to save the object in a directory on your hard disk Save ox Fig 59 Saving a file manually Use the browser functions to save the specified file in a directory of your choice in Internet Explorer click the right mouse button gt Save Target As Close the dialog box by clicking the OK button Open the file from the locatio
307. ontent client the object is opened in the integrated HTML editor or in the associated editor Edit the object in the editor When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system To do so choose Check in on the context menu or click the icon es in the upper right corner of the frame The object has the status changed To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Submit on the context menu or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Editing Object Fragments via InSite Editing InSite Editing can also be used for editing information integrated in the page by means of WCM tags directly in the website This is for example especially convenient if the current page contains the content of another WCM object In this case you do not have to navigate to the referenced object You can edit it directly 298 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing Information that can be edited separately via InSite Editing without checking out the object is called Object fragments Each fragment in InSite Editing is represented by a metadata item and can thus be changed via the Metadata dialog box Additionally InSite Editing provides a special dialog box displaying only the information integrated by means of WCM tags To open the WCM tag dialog box click the following icon L4 WCM tags The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for editing object fragments via InSi
308. opying an Object Editing Objects Checking Objects Out and In Editing Objects Editing Metadata Maintaining References Editing Access Rights Deleting Objects Converting Objects Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects Submitting an Object Releasing or Rejecting an Object Content Workflow Structure of a Workflow Definition Installing the Workflow Modeler Working with the Workflow Modeler Creating and Editing Workflow Definitions WCM Objects in the Workflow Content Client User Manual 133 134 148 154 158 162 167 168 177 193 201 215 227 233 247 247 251 257 258 261 262 272 281 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 InSite Editing Working with InSite Editing Application Example The HeroLeasing Website Configuring InSite Editing Working with Assembled Objects General Procedure Editing Assembled Objects Application Examples Livelink Contents in the Content Client Adding Relators Editing Relators Deleting a Relator Finding Objects and Editing Them Together The Standard Filters The Filter Editor Working with Templates Adding Templates Editing and Deleting Templates Cascading Templates Working with Special Attributes Special Attributes in the Metadata Dialog Box Special Attributes in the Object Filter Statification Activating Thumbnails for Objects 293 294 304 309 317 318 324 324 339 340 353 362 365 366 37
309. or include lt toolbar display true type bottom conf ig resource config insite_toolbar xml gt This item configures the toolbar of InSite Editing display attribute true shows the toolbar false hides the toolbar type attribute none No text is shown on the icons bottom The text is shown below the icon right The text is shown to the right of the icon config attribute Path to the file in which you specified the icons to be displayed in the toolbar 310 Livelink WCM Server InSite Editing lt menus gt lt menu name main display true config resource config deploymentmenu xml gt lt menus gt This item configures the context menus of InSite Editing name attribute main context menu for normal WCM objects metadata context menu for simple object fragments object context menu for object fragments containing an object reference display attribute true The context menu is available false The context menu is not available config attribute Path to the file in which you specified the func tions to be available on the context menu lt summary display false width 200 height 200 gt lt attribute name title gt lt summary gt Use this item to determine whether the object information window is displayed for the current object display attribute true displays the object information window false hides the object information window w
310. or role membership m The object has its own access control list it does not inherit the access control list from the parent topic Table 30 Principal operators in the filter editor Operator Expression User in access control list user inacl Group in access control list group inacl Role in access control list role inacl The filter expression must correspond to the following pattern principal ID operator Example Use the filter expression jstein user inacl to search for objects whose access control list contain the user jstein Content Client User Manual 391 Chapter 12 Searching for Objects with Workflow Assignment By means of the operator hasworkflow you can filter for objects to which a workflow is assigned Nested Filters The operator filter makes it possible to use a filter from the drop down list in another filter The filter expression must correspond to the following pattern filter name of the filter If you want to use one of the standard filters within another filter specify the internal name of the standard filter The standardfilter xml file in the directory WCM installation directory website cmsclient resource config contains the intemal names Example Use the filter expression filter filter state released and title contains products to search for objects that are in the status released and whose title contai
311. or the relator You have the access rights Read and Change object for the relator You have the permission Reserve for the Livelink object Procedure 1 2 354 Change to the Edit view of the website In the Navigation area mark the relator whose associated Livelink object you want to edit Choose Edit Check out or click the appropriate icon a Icon for checking out an object The relator is barred for write access by other users the Livelink object will be marked as reserved in the Livelink system Depending on the configuration of the Content client the content of the Livelink object opens in the integrated HTML editor or in the associated editor program Edit the Livelink object in the respective editor Save your changes and close the editor Livelink WCM Server 6 Livelink Contents in the Content Client To return the modified relator to the WCM system and unreserve the Livelink object choose Edit Check in or click the appropriate icon Ey Icon for checking in an object The relator has the status changed A new version is added to the Livelink object For the changes to become visible in the published website you must submit the changed relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance Modifying Livelink Metadata Objective Each Livelink object has a number of metadata That means that relators have Livelink metadata in addition to the WCM metad
312. ortals Fig 88 Replacing the referenced object via InSite Editing 5 Select the desired object 6 Click the OK button Replacing the referenced object with a new object You can also create a new object and replace the referenced object with this new object To replace the referenced object with a new object 1 Start InSite Editing 2 Navigate to the object with the fragment that you want to edit 3 Place the mouse pointer on the toolbar of the fragment that you want to edit The selected fragment is highlighted by a red frame 4 Click the assembled object icon 5 Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the process For detailed information refer to the online help of InSite Editing The new object is automatically entered in the fragment s reference Content Client User Manual 303 Chapter 9 Application Example The HeroLeasing Website The HeroLeasing website is a good example for demonstrating the func tions of InSite Editing and the process of editing object fragments The HeroLeasing website is supplied with Livelink WCM Server It is located in the directory WCM installation directory import HeroLeasing archive and can be imported into the WCM system For further informa tion on importing websites refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual Scenario For the HeroLeasing website the object types Heropage and Herotem plate were created
313. ou can also enter the description keywords and the target group of the object Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer loj x Please specify standard metadata The entry is optional E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release Description Keywords Target group Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 46 Specifying the responsibilities for a new object 140 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Notes If you do not make any entries in the E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release and Target group fields the settings of the parent topic are adopted automatically Use a comma as separator between two e mail addresses If you want to enter the name of the user in addition to the e mail address write the name in quotation marks before the address and enclose the address in angle brackets Example Joshua Stein lt joshua stein company example gt Shepard Helen lt helen shepard company example gt a E mail Edit Enter the e mail addresses of the people responsible for editing the object If the Content client is configured accordingly a message can be sent to these e mail addresses as soon as the object has expired in the Edit view or has been rejected or destroyed by Quality Assurance m E mail QA Enter the e mail addresses of the people responsible for quality assurance If the Content client is configured accordingly a message can be sent to these e mai
314. out of the new object already when adding the object Thumbnails of the templates facilitate the search for the desired template Note You cannot use this wizard if you want to add an object based on an existing file 148 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects Required rights and functional areas You need the following rights and functional areas to add an object by means of the wizard the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which the object is to be added the functional area linked with the object type of the new object To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info The following sections describe how to add an object on the basis of a template Starting the Wizard To start the wizard 1 2 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the topic to which you want to add the object Choose Object New from template The wizard starts Follow the instructions of the wizard that guides you through the process of adding the object Content Client User Manual 149 Chapter 5 Specifying Title Template and Workflow In the first dialog box you determine the title of the new object and select a template You can also assign a workflow to the object Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer Specify a title for the object and select the desired template You may also lt j assign a workflow to the object K
315. ow a Write text a Create graphic o Revise text Role Editor x Role Designer J Jf Reject deletion No graphic Revise graphic Reject graphic required Revise text Submit f NS if Delete Reject text J Q NA Check data sheet Role QA 1 Check deletion Role QA 2 Check finally Check again Role QA 2 Confirm deletion Release j Fig 84 Example workflow for editing data sheets Procedure 1 Product management gives the editor kblume the task to revise the data sheet ProductFeatures Kblume assigns the workflow DataSheet to the existing and released WCM object The WCM object s status remains released The transition to the first activity Write text to which the role Editor is assigned is performed automatically 2 By mistake the editor pdeville thinks that the data sheet is no longer required Thus he selects the transition Delete In the E mail dialog box he enters a reason 288 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow The object ProductFeatures is forwarded to the activity Check deletion to which the role QA 2 is assigned and gets the status deleted 3 The QA member abianchi checks the reason given by pdeville Because the data sheet is still required she selects the transition Reject deletion The WCM object gets back to the activity Write text and has
316. ox by right clicking the Access rights dialog box The context menu offers commands for the different principal types users group group role role or World 5 Choose the appropriate command here Add user The Add principals dialog box opens 4 Add principals Microsoft Internet Explorer _ O1 x Filter l Search IV display only users directly assigned to website Name abianchi cerdmann claurent dcarson eschmidt hshepard jgomez kblume mrossi msanchez pdeville smarchetti solivier Apply Cancel Help Fig 72 Adding a principal to the access control list 6 In the selection list mark the principal you want to add to the access control list You can only select individual principals 218 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects 7 Click the Apply button The principal is inserted in the access control list This activates the default object rights that are set for this principal in the Admin client You can change this setting Click the Save button in the Access rights dialog box Submit the object with the extended access control list to Quality Assurance To do so choose Object Submit or click the appro priate icon Icon for submitting an object Searching for principals It is possible to search for principals This is especially useful if the selec tion list is long or if you want to add a user to the access control list who is assigned to the websit
317. pany Info Products Continue Cancel Help Fig 78 Selecting dependent objects when releasing an object 3 Select the dependent objects which are to be released together with the object and click the Next button If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can release the object and send a message to the e mail address saved in the metadata item E mail Release 4 Click the OK button The object now has the status released or delayed release Upon reaching the release date the released version of the object becomes available in the Production view 252 Livelink WCM Server Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects Releasing an Object Directly Objective You want to release an object directly without submitting it to Quality Assurance Prerequisites m The object has the status changed In the Metadata dialog box of the object the Direct release check box is selected This setting has already been released once by Quality Assurance m You have the access rights Read Change object and or Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to release directly If the Direct release check box has been selected for the object and the release is possible in the current object status the Direct release function is active in the menu and the tool
318. parators Comparison value Spelling The document Products The document Products The directory CompanyInfo Products Content Client User Manual The directory CompanylInfo Products 389 Chapter 12 Note If you precede an metadata item of the data type string set or list with the operator ignorecase then the comparison will not be case sensitive Combination Operators The following table shows the operators that can be used to forma complex filter expression Table 29 Combination operators in the filter editor and and As commonly used A combination with and takes priority over or Obs a combination with or This can be changed by enclosing the expressions in brackets not not Negates the filter expression The filter expressions must correspond to the following pattern m for and and or expression 1 combination operator expression 2 for not not expression 390 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Searching for Principals in Access Control Lists The following table contains operators you can use to find objects whose access control list contains a certain principal For an object to be found the following requirements must be met m The principal is explicitly assigned to the object i e not only via the principal s group
319. pecial attributes supplement the metadata of an object You can edit special attributes just like standard metadata Livelink WCM Server distinguishes the following two types of special attributes Attributes from the attribute set Attribute sets contain attributes that describe special features of object types Attributes may for example be the resolution of graphics the asso ciated editor or a copyright notice When adding a WCM object you asso ciate the object with an object type As a result the new object automatically acquires the attributes that this object type possesses Like all metadata attributes can be integrated in a website by means of WCM tags The object types and attribute sets themselves are managed via Tools gt Website administration or in the Admin client object types and attribute sets may be added or deleted there Thus attribute sets can be modified and are not rigidly defined by the system For further information on using attribute sets refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual For an overview of the supplied attributes refer to table WCM tags for the supplied special attributes on page 433 Content Client User Manual 409 Chapter 14 Properties from the object category By means of object categories you can categorize WCM objects according to their content Examples can be object categories named Invoice or Article_description Object categories are defined
320. pecifying the basic properties of a new object Note If you do not make any entries in the Template and Expiration date fields the settings of the parent topic are adopted automatically m Heading Enter a heading for the object Template Assign a template to the object By assigning a template you define the layout of the page Click the icon eal to open a window with the template structure Select the desired template in that window If you know the OID of the template you can enter it directly in the Template field Click the icon Q to view the selected template in the object preview The icon takes you directly to the selected template 138 Livelink WCM Server Adding Objects m Object category Use the drop down list to assign an object category to the object This enables you to categorize the object on the basis of its content m Language Specify the language for the object This item has no influence on the object content but is used for classification purposes and as a search criterion in the object filter Moreover certain metadata such as the date are displayed in the selected language if they are integrated into the page generated for the object by means of placeholders so called WCM tags m Expiration date Specify the expiration date with time for the object The expiration date defines how long the object remains valid The expiration date of the parent topic is used as the default setting
321. plates produce usable results if the following requirements are met Only assign XSLT templates to objects of type XML document Do not use XSLT templates in cascading XML templates The transformation rules defined in the XSLT template are applied to those XML documents that have been assigned the template In contrast to the XSLT document transformation is performed on the server side using special cache mechanisms Note If they do not contain WCM tags XSLT templates are saved in the cache If the template references a style sheet by means of xsl include or xsl import and this style sheet changes the template is not automatically removed from the cache In this case regenerate the XSLT template The code of an XSLT template does not differ from the code of an XSLT document that is based on the same file Thus sample code is not included here Assign an HTML template JSP template or XML template to the XSLT template This gives the transformation a framework In this way the result of the transformation is integrated in a defined page structure and has the desired file extension If you do not assign a template to the XSLT template the result of the transformation has the file extension xsl When calling an XSL file the browser expects an XML style sheet However the result of the transformation contains HTML code Thus the browser cannot display the content Content Client
322. play P 266 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Command Icon Function Help menu gt Help topics Opens the online help of the workflow modeler in a separate window Note You can also open the online help by pressing the F1 key About Displays information about the WCM system used Using Mouse and Keyboard The following operations in the workflow modeler can only be executed via the mouse or keyboard m moving activities starting points and end points see the following section m changing the size of activities starting points and end points see section Changing the Size of Activities Starting Points and End Points on page 268 adding transitions see section Adding Transitions on page 268 m moving transitions see section Moving Transitions on page 269 m deleting workflow elements see section Deleting Workflow Elements on page 270 Moving Activities Starting Points and End Points To move an activity a starting point or an end point 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon to deactivate the transition mode Content Client User Manual 267 Chapter 8 2 Mark the element to be moved with the left mouse button The element is highlighted by an additional frame 3 While holding the left mouse button down move the element to the desired location Changing the Size of Activities Starting Points and En
323. pression From the list of available comparators corresponds to pattern equal to greater than greater than equal to is null less than less than equal to not equal to I Negate operator lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 115 Determining a comparator The selection list contains only those comparators that are applicable for the metadata item specified in the second step By means of the Negate operator check box you can reverse the meaning of the operator Example if you select the Negate operator check box for contains this corresponds to does not contain The individual operators are described in section Comparators on page 385 Select a comparator from the list and click the Next button Content Client User Manual 379 Chapter 12 Specifying a Comparison Value If in the third step you have selected a comparator e g not equal to that requires a comparison value specify the value here 3 Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explo For the selected metadata item enter a value you want to search Yalue products lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 116 Specifying a comparison value For more information on comparison values see section Comparison Values on page 388 Click the Next button Confirming the Filter Expression The filter expression is constructed from your entries 380 Livelink WCM Server
324. provides several tabs for viewing and editing metadata General Livelink data tab Most entries on this tab are controlled by the Livelink system and can only be viewed here In the fields Description and Version description you may enter basic information on the relator and on this special version of the relator In the Version area you determine whether the relator is to be updated automatically when the associated Livelink object changes Update Edit version automatically radio button or is to reference a specific version of the Livelink object Fixed version radio button Select the Delete Livelink object together with relator check box to determine that the referenced Livelink object will be destroyed together with the relator Tabs for object categories For each object category assigned to the object in the Livelink system a separate tab with the cate gory s name is shown in the figure Training Materials You can modify the Livelink object s attributes on the tabs 4 Make the desired changes on the tabs 5 Click the Save button The metadata are changed in the Livelink system The relator now has the status changed For the changes to become visible in the published website you must submit the changed relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance Content Client User Manual 357 Chapter 11 Integrating Livelink Metadata in a Page Just like WCM metadata you can integrate Livelink met
325. r Filter Description submitted Finds objects that have been submitted to Quality Assurance without filter Searches all objects in the marked topic and below Table 25 Standard filters in the My objects view Filter Description Show me all objects that can destroy Finds objects with the status deleted for which you have the access right Release can edit content Finds objects with the status released changed or rejected for which you have the access right Change object l can edit metadata Finds objects with the status released changed or rejected for which you have the access right Change metadata can release directly Finds objects with the status changed for which you have the right Change object and for which the Direct release check box has been selected in the Metadata dialog box This setting must have been released by Quality Assurance can release Finds objects with the status submitted for which you have the access right Release have changed Finds objects with the status changed that have been edited last by you the value of the metadata item Modified by is your user ID or that have recently been created by you Content Client User Manual 369 Chapter 12 Filter Description hav
326. r accessing the WCM system at regular intervals To change your password 1 Choose Tools Change password This opens the Change password dialog box Change password Microsoft Interne Old password p New password p Confirm new password Pires Cancel Help Fig 17 Change password 2 Enter your old password once and the new password twice Note Please note that passwords are case sensitive For the WCM system password and Password are two different passwords 3 Click the Change button 78 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Taking over as Substitute The substitute of a user may perform all functions for which the user is authorized To be able to edit objects as a substitute for a user you have to be assigned as a substitute to this user in the Admin client To take over as substitute 1 Choose Tools Take over as substitute This opens the Take over as substitute dialog box Take over as substitute Microsoft Take over as substitute for hshepard Cancel Help Fig 18 Taking over as a substitute 2 In the drop down list click the ID of the user for whom you want to act as substitute 3 Confirm by clicking the OK button The status bar displays the name and ID of the user for whom you took over as substitute Notes As a substitute you cannot take over as another substitute Example The user jst
327. r object type 68 P page merge template and object 398 remove from Production view 232 parameter for WCM tags add 461 buttons 460 default 452 edit 458 encoding 450 filter 451 format 441 label 453 locale 449 oid 457 option_id 454 option_mode 455 order 459 required 453 separator 448 target 461 thumbnails 452 type 450 parameterized WCM tags 440 parent topic WCM tag 430 path metadata item 45 PDF document object type 68 PHP page object type 68 PHP template object type 68 Livelink WCM Server PHP topic object type 69 PNG image object type 69 PowerPoint file object type 69 preview in browser 89 in editor 92 principal 37 add to access control list 216 group 51 group role 52 role 51 set access rights 220 withdraw access rights 222 World 52 priority rules access rights 57 Production view 29 profile 107 action list 119 add 109 application class 121 basic settings 110 delete 128 Download applet 113 dynamic deployment 125 edit 128 name 109 navigation 117 object attributes 120 toolbar 116 use 127 property create 487 delete 489 publication date set for an object 198 Q QA staff member 37 QA view 29 Content Client User Manual Index R reference absolute 48 add in Content client 204 add in editor 209 add in integrated HTML editor 206 delete 214 dependent objects 236 external 47 in general 46 maintain 201 relative 48 referenced objects References dialog box
328. r Manual 175 Chapter 6 Checking in without Download applet 1 Save your changes and close the editor 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you edited 3 Choose Edit Check in or click the appropriate icon a Icon for checking in an object 4 The Select file dialog box opens 5 Click the Browse button and navigate to the edited file If instead of the file originally saved you accidentally or deliberately select a different file this is equivalent to replacing the object Livelink WCM Server is not able to verify whether the file is identical to the file you previously saved 6 To enter a remark for the log click the Next button 7 Enter the remark in the Log dialog box 8 Click the OK button Checking in with integrated HTML editor 1 Choose File gt Save in the integrated HTML editor or click the appropriate icon Icon for saving 2 Close the integrated HTML editor 176 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Choose Edit gt Check in or click the appropriate icon a Icon for checking in an object During the check in the changed content is transferred to the server Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button Editing Objects In this section you learn which functions are required for editing object content The following procedures are introduced editing the object content of an existing object see the following section editing an object you already check
329. r lt img src VIPLINK gt editable in InSite Editing The value of the add parameter corresponds to the name of the respective metadata item The add parameter must be inserted directly after the edit begin param eter In InSite Editing an icon for editing the medadata item is displayed for each metadata item in the add parameter For example a reference to a graphic object can be made editable within an external link as follows VIPEXTERNAL_URL edit begin add image lt a href VIPEXTERNAL_URL gt lt img src VIPIMAGE gt lt a gt VIPEXTERNAL_URL edit end Parameters for Content Assembly By means of the target parameter you can determine whether the infor mation of the referenced object fragment or the information of the assem bled object is displayed in the generated page when working with Content Assembly The target parameter can be used for attributes with the data types Object content and Object source permitted parameter values are self and outer The following table illustrates the relation between data type and value of the target parameter Content Client User Manual 461 Chapter 15 Table 46 Data types and target parameter Object content not specified of the object fragment Value self of the object fragment Value outer of the assembled object Object source not specified of the assembled object Value self of the object fragment Value outer of the asse
330. r programs to the different file types it may be useful to create a personalized profile for each working environment The profile you used last is saved in a cookie in the browser If your browser accepts persistent cookies the profile saved in the cookie is used automatically the next time you log in to the WCM system The entire configuration of the Content client and the administration of the profiles are performed in the Configuration dialog box Choose Tools gt Configuration to open this dialog box Content Client User Manual 107 Chapter 4 Configuration Microsoft Internet Explorer Load profile Defaut profile Basic settings Defaut profile bad Toolbar Profile name eFaurt profile Navigation D Fiter Language Fngish USA Search Action ket tory al Object attributes Working directory Fttemp Content WYSIWYG Content source 7 Use Download applet Application classes Dynamic deployment IT Use integrated HTML editor IV Regenerate page with released template IT Suppress e mail dialogs I Suppress remark dialogs IV Synchronize object preview 7 Use Activex IV Use Java Web Start I Display object information in status bar T Hide disabled tems in context menu OK New profile elte Close Help Fig 36 The Configuration dialog box The topmost node of the tree structure in the left window pane is the current profile The subordinate elements ar
331. r templates we recommend you draw a rough sketch of the page layout by means of a graphic program instead of the screenshot Step 2 Save screenshot in the WCM system Add an object on the basis of the graphic file created in step 1 Step 3 Set attribute Thumbnail 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 Navigate to the object for which a thumbnail is to be displayed 3 Choose View Metadata Attributes tab 4 In the Thumbnail field enter the OID of the object added in step 2 If you do not know the OID click the icon ml A window with the topic structure opens Content Client User Manual 423 Chapter 14 Qj Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft ai Topic structure Ea HeroLeasing Inc a Bi download H Ba Fragments w Ea html s Ea images armstrong baumwall dr evil hero ibm banner _v02 sm heroleasing logo hero SAP Banner_v05 sm hero story hero t info Banner_v02 sm la ipg a KryptonitePowerpsd mA 5 Fn 8 Ok Cancel Help Fig 128 Selecting an image for a thumbnail 5 Select the desired object Click the icon Q to view the selected object in the object preview The icon R takes you directly to the selected object 6 Click the Save button The thumbnail is now activated for the current object 424 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes Content Client User Manual 425 426 Livelink W
332. re end points repeat steps 2 to 5 Step 6 Define transitions 1 Add a transition 2 Double click the transition 3 In the Edit transition dialog box enter the name and a description for the transition 4 Click the OK button 5 To define more transitions repeat steps 1 to 3 Step 7 Define workflow properties 1 For this purpose choose File gt Properties The Edit workflow properties dialog box opens 2 Enter a name and a description for the workflow definition 3 Click the OK button 276 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Step 8 Complete workflow definition Save the workflow definition and close the workflow modeler The work flow object now passes through the normal staging steps of Livelink WCM Server i e it must be submitted to Quality Assurance which either releases or rejects it After the workflow object has been released it can be assigned to other WCM objects Creating a Workflow Definition Without the Content Client Step 1 Start workflow modeler Start the workflow modeler by double clicking the file VIPWorkflowModeler bat which is located in the workflow modeler installation directory Step 2 Create workflow definition Choose File gt New or click the appropriate icon A Icon for creating a workflow definition Step 3 Edit workflow definition The following steps correspond to steps 3 to 7 when creating a workflow definition via the Content client Step
333. references Assume you have created an HTML page with the name index htm and want to insert a reference to another page within the same directory e g ProductOverview htm For the address of the referenced page you can specify the complete address absolute reference http www company example products ProductOverview htm or you can specify the file name without path information relative refer ence if the file is located in the same directory as the referencing page ProductOverview htm By means of relative references you can also address files in subdirecto ries Assume that you have a page NewPriceList htm that is located in the subdirectory prices To enter a reference from the page ProductOverview htm to this page enter the relative sub path prices NewPriceList htm Content Client User Manual 49 Chapter 2 Access Rights The object properties define which users groups or roles are allowed to access an object You can set the access rights separately for each object In this way it is not only possible to generally allow or forbid access you can also set separate access rights for the individual users groups and roles This function of Livelink WCM Server is known as access control Every WCM object has an access control list which spec ifies the users groups and roles that have access to that object Actions and Access Rights The access rights determine the way in which users can access the object
334. ributes from the attribute set The entry is optional Absolute URL Applet Code Copyright Object size Robots Thumbnail LISIA al R Cancel lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 47 Specifying the attribute values for a new object The fields of this dialog box are determined by the attribute set that is assigned to the object type This assignment is variable and can be changed via Tools gt Website administration gt Attribute sets or via the Admin client As an example the attributes from the attribute set html are shown By default this attribute set is linked with the object type HTML page Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button m Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object Content Client User Manual 143 Chapter 5 Entering Properties Values Note This dialog box is only displayed if you have assigned an object category to the object In this dialog box you specify the values for the properties of the object The properties of the object result from its assignment to an object cate gory Properties from object category Microsoft Internet Explorer jol xj Please enter values for the properties from the object category The entry is optional invoice_recipient J payment_a
335. ried out in the Content client Releasing publishes the objects in the website Passing through these stages is called staging In addition to the staging you can assign a workflow to certain objects e g for successive editing by several editors or for multi stage quality assurance 28 Livelink WCM Server Concepts Staging According to the processing status of a WCM object there are different views of the object the Edit view the QA view and the Production view Edit view In the Edit view WCM objects such as HTML pages are added and edited by editors and graphics specialists These users need corre sponding access rights for the objects After they have been edited the objects are submitted to Quality Assurance This makes the changes to the objects visible in the QA view QA view The QA view shows the WCM objects with all changes that have been submitted to Quality Assurance Quality Assurance staff can check the changes with regard to content and formal aspects After checking an object they decide whether it is to be returned or released For release the respective access right is required The release transmits the quality assured version of the object to the Production view and thus makes it available to the end user in the published website Production view The Production view makes the released pages of a website available to the website visitors By means of a web server these pages can be access
336. rity warning when starting the integrated HTML editor You have the following options m Yes Click this button to confirm the security prompt This is neces sary for working with the integrated HTML editor No lf you do not confirm the prompt you cannot work with the inte grated HTML editor m Always Click this button to confirm the security prompt After that this security prompt no longer appears when you are working with the integrated HTML editor More Details Click this button to request more information about the certificate For information on the exact procedure when using the editor refer to sections Checking out with integrated HTML editor on page 172 and Checking in with integrated HTML editor on page 176 Content Client User Manual 115 Chapter 4 Configuring the Toolbar To specify the settings for the toolbar 1 Choose Tools Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 Mark the tree element Toolbar in the left window pane of the Configu ration dialog box The possible settings are displayed in the right window pane Toolbar Text in toolbar without f New Edit content Show content Check out Check in Actions in toolbar Undo Delete Destroy Submit Release E Ei 2 E CY FP i E a 2 A J Hide disabled icons Direct release nd Fig 39 Configuring the toolbar 3 Make the desired settings a Text in toolbar
337. rm Instances on page 418 For each XML object the following files are generated m the unstatified page m the statified page m if required the surrogate page with a link to the XML document Note When a form template is used the content of the unstatified page is distributed as HTML code file extension html because the form template is taken into account This means that the JSP page responsible for statification cannot directly evaluate the XML code of the XML object For this reason it is not recommendable to assign a form instance to an XML object The special attribute Statify page of the XML object does not have a numeric value No form template is assigned to the XML object At least one of the templates assigned to the XML object is a JSP template In this case the template directly assigned to the XML object should be an XSLT template For more information on using XML and XSLT refer to appendix A Livelink WCM Server and XML Content Client User Manual 421 Chapter 14 Statification is performed in the same way as for JSP objects see section Statification of JSP Objects on page 416 For each XML object the following files are generated m the statified page m if required the surrogate page with a link to the XML document Activating Thumbnails for Objects The special attribute Thumbnail was introduced to enable thumbnails for objects By default the attribute Thumbn
338. rmat Parameter on page 441 on Alternative name see section The Label Parameter on page 453 m on Required see section The required Parameter on page 453 m on Tag type see section The type Parameter on page 450 m on OID see section Referencing Objects on page 457 182 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Specify the desired values for the parameters and do one of the following To insert the WCM tag click the OK button To add more parameters to the WCM tag click the Next button Specifying the InSite Editing parameters In this dialog box you specify if and how the integrated metadata item can be edited with InSite Editing Here you can specify parameters for the WCM tag Enable InSite Editing Default value Position in the Metadata dialog l lt Back Next gt OK Help Fig 64 Specifying additional parameters for a WCM tag m Enable InSite Editing Use these radio buttons to control InSite Editing for the integrated metadata item Enabling InSite Editing does not make sense for metadata items of type Read only Possible values for the parameter are Content Client User Manual 183 Chapter 6 m on The metadata item is equipped with a toolbar and highlighted by ared frame You can edit the information directly in the website or in the WCM tag dialog box of InSite Editing m param You can edit the metadata item in the WCM tag dialog box of InS
339. rmed on the object Choose View Log to open the Log dialog box Log Date User Description Remark Version 7 ug 5 2004 1 56 29 PM Pierre Deville pdeville Checked out 1 0 0 6 Jun 10 2004 4 44 59PM Manuel Moreno mmoreno Released 0 1 0 5 Jun 10 2004 2 43 20 PM Joshua Stein jstein Submitted to QA Updated list 0 0 4 4 Jun 10 2004 2 43 05PM Joshua Stein jstein Checked in 0 0 3 3 Jun 10 2004 2 22 55PM__ Joshua Stein jstein Checked out 0 0 2 2 Jun 10 2004 10 02 28 AM Manuel Moreno mmoreno Rejected List is not up to date Please check 0 1 0 1 Jun 2004 4 41 43 PM Joshua Stein jstein Submitted to QA 0 0 1 O Jun 9 2004 4 41 38 PM Joshua Stein jstein Created Fig 34 The Log dialog box For each action the date with time responsible user description version and if existing a remark are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the log entries according to the crite rion in the column For example clicking on Version sorts the list in ascending chronological order To reverse the sort order click the header row again This way you can clearly arrange long lists Content Client User Manual 103 Chapter 3 Available functions The functions in the Log dialog box are called via the context menu The following functions are available if you mark a log entry and right click it m Display version opens a new window in which the content and some metadata of
340. rop down list For detailed information on the individual types refer to table Data types with formats used on page 436 Maximum length For the types External URL List Set Set of e mail addresses and String you must determine the maximum length Select a high value because for example in the Oracle RDBMS some special characters are represented by 2 bytes instead of 1 byte The maximum length of character strings is determined by the RDBMS used Oracle 4000 characters Precision only for the type Floating point number determines the number of digits to be considered Scale only for the type Floating point number determines the number of digits after the decimal point i e where the point is inserted in the numeric string The value range for the type Floating point number is defined as follows from 10 10 to 10 _10 S with p precision and s scale Example A precision of 5 with a scale of 3 results in a value range of 99 999 to 99 999 5 Click the OK button The new property is added to the object category 6 Click the Apply button Deleting Properties To delete properties of an object category 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration gt Object categories The Object categories dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired object category in the left window pane Content Client User Manual 489 Chapter 16 3 Mark
341. rter see the following section m differences between converted objects and normal objects see section Special Properties of Source Objects and Dependent Objects on page 235 working with converted objects see section Working with Source Objects and Converted Objects on page 238 m differences between compound objects and normal objects see section Special Properties of Compound Objects on page 242 Automatic Conversion By means of a converter you can generate complex document structures That is why the process of automatically converting documents from a word processor or another application into HTML documents is described first The following diagram illustrates the process Content Client User Manual 233 Chapter 6 HTML Hyperlink Start page Products htm HTML Products_1 htm Sa WORD Products doc gt Converter gt I HL The start page e Products _2 htm generated by the i HTML converter provides Products_3 htm access to the other A rt generated pages converter generates a set of 7 The source HTML files from the document for the source document These wenetaied entire processisa e the Word file pages ar contents of the source document converted to HTML Fig 74 Converting a Word file into HTML The starting point for the conversion is a source document e g a Word or PowerPoin
342. rview of the most important properties of the current object object type as icon here HTML page object status as icon here changed E object title here Events OID here 32 version number here 3 0 1 The three digit version number consists of the numbers for major version minor version and micro version m The major version here 3 is incremented by 1 whenever the object is released The minor version here 0 always has the value 1 if the object has the status submitted Otherwise the value is 0 The micro version here 1 changes with every action in the Edit view e g Check out Check in Thus an object with the version number 3 0 1 has passed through all staging steps three times and has been released in the Production view The object was edited but the changes have neither been submitted to QA nor published in the Production view date and time until which the object remains valid here 04 08 2014 09 18 27 Expired objects are marked by red letters in the status bar the ID of the last user who changed the object here jstein date and time of the last change to the object here 09 08 2004 14 40 44 Content Client User Manual 87 Chapter 3 Selecting several objects To select several objects for editing in the Object list view or in a filter hitlist m Mark the objects to be edited with the left mouse button while at the same time pressing the CTRL key
343. s delayed CA Fa The object has been checked release g and released by Quality Assur ance However the release date specified for the object has not yet been reached The current version is thus not yet available to the end users in the Production view Content Client User Manual 35 Chapter 2 Object Staging Workflow Description status icon icon deleted gt 4 yi The object has been deleted In the case of objects that have already been released this process must be confirmed by Quality Assurance rejected D E The object has been checked and rejected by Quality Assur ance It can be checked out for further editing and changed Afterwards the object must be submitted to Quality Assurance again released The object has been checked and released by Quality Assur ance The current version is thus available to the end users in the website s Production view The object can be checked out and edited again Note After an object has passed through a workflow and has been released the assign ment between the object and the workflow is removed The object gets the status released staging icon If a workflow is assigned to a released object this is marked by the respective workflow icon submitted The object has been submitted to Quality Assurance and its current version is available in the QA view An object with this status cannot be checked out
344. s back to the activity Create graphic and has the status rejected 8 The graphics specialist mmoreno makes the desired changes The object ProductFeatures now has the status changed mmoreno forwards the object to the first stage of quality assurance The object gets the status submitted and is in the activity Check data sheet 9 The first stage of quality assurance approves of the data sheet By selecting the transition Check again eschmidt forwards the WCM object to the second stage of quality assurance In the second stage of quality assurance mrossi checks the data sheet and is satisfied with the result Thus he releases the WCM object by selecting the transition Release The object acquires the status released and the workflow assign ment is automatically removed 290 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Content Client User Manual 291 292 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 9 InSite Editing InSite Editing makes it possible to change or add content directly ina website A simple click with the mouse during surfing in the Edit or QA view and according to the WCM rights context menus with the avail able edit functions are displayed This makes it considerably easier to edit content InSite Editing is also subject to the staging steps of editing quality assurance and publication Before you can use InSite Editing you must perform
345. s from Code quotations lt head gt program code or lt title gt heading configuration files lt title gt lt head gt Variables i e variable WCM installation placeholders for directory specific elements Important information and warnings are enclosed in gray boxes Make sure to read such information to avoid losing data or making errors when using and managing WCM systems 24 Livelink WCM Server Content Client User Manual Introduction 25 26 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 2 Concepts This chapter gives you a basic knowledge of the architecture of a Web Content Management System WCM system and of the way Livelink WCM Server works This knowledge is required for using Livelink WCM Server System Architecture Livelink WCM Server is based on client server technology This tech nology refers to a system architecture in which the processing of an appli cation is split into two separate parts One part runs on the server high performance computer or process the other on a client workstation or program The two parts are joined by networks to form a system The client sends a request to the server to process data and uses the services of the server Applied to Livelink WCM Server this means that manage ment of the website data and users takes place on the server By contrast editing of data by editors or graphics specialists is done via the Content client In a WCM system one or
346. s of the current object Refer ences realized by means of special attributes are also displayed here m Referencing objects objects containing references to the current object the object is the target of the reference m Referenced objects objects referenced by the current object the object is the source of the reference 202 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects m External references to objects and pages located outside the website m Invalid references that no longer work e g references to deleted objects Note The Reference dialog box does not display references from an assigned template and references outside the body element that are overwritten by template code The Referencing objects and Referenced objects tabs display the refer ences in an object list For each object the object type OID title path to the root object version and status are displayed By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the crite rion in this column To reverse the sort order click the header row again This way you can clearly arrange long lists You can navigate to the relevant object by double clicking on an entry in the object list If you select an entry on the External references tab the referenced page will open in a separate browser window References realized by means of special attributes are marked by the icon A If you move the mouse over the icon the name of the at
347. s to the attribute sets Please refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual for additional information 478 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Adding an Attribute Set To add an attribute set 1 Choose Tools Website administration gt Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens Choose New attribute set on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon a Icon for adding an attribute set The New attribute set dialog box opens Enter a name for the new attribute set The name of the attribute set must be unique within the website and must not be more than 17 characters long The following characters are permitted ma a z and A Z no umlauts and special characters 0 9 the first character must always be a letter m _ underline Note The following names are reserved and may not be used admin acl ats att cda con dyn lat lin obj oty par pri pro pty rli sta tta tto You cannot change the name subsequently Add the attribute set by clicking the OK button Determine the attributes for the new attribute set see the following section Content Client User Manual 479 Chapter 16 Editing an Attribute Set Note When attribute sets are changed the pages of the WCM objects whose object type is assigned the attribute set are not automatically regenerated In this case it may happen that the values of attributes
348. s to your website The Content client offers you different possibilities of adding an object the function New from object type see the following section the function New assembled object the function New from template see section Adding Objects on the Basis of a Template on page 148 the function New Relator see section Adding Relators on page 340 the function Import linked objects see section Importing Linked Objects starting on page 154 the function Import from ZIP file see section Importing Objects from a ZIP File starting on page 158 the function Copy see section Copying an Object starting on page 162 Content Client User Manual 133 Chapter 5 Adding Objects on the Basis of an Object Type Supported actions The wizard for adding objects on the basis of an object type helps you perform the following actions m add an object that does not yet exist as a file You can add an object that neither exists as a file on your local hard disk nor in the network This is the case for example if you want to add an object of type Topic as an additional structural element in your website Or you may want to add an empty page that will initially serve as a placeholder and will not be filled with content until later m add an object from an existing file You can add a WCM object based on a file e g an HTML page or a graphi
349. se can be properties from the assigned object category or attributes from the attribute set assigned to the object type The following example explains how to filter for objects with the payment deadline Nov 30 2003 The payment deadline is saved in the property payment_deadline from the object category Invoice To filter for the payment deadline Nov 30 2003 1 Choose View gt Object filter to open the object filter 2 Click the Filter editor icon in the navigation area 2 Icon for opening the filter editor 3 Click the button w 4 In the text field of the following dialog box enter the special attribute payment_deadline 5 In the following two dialogs boxes enter the operator equal to and the date you want to search for This results in the following filter expression 412 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explore You have selected the following filter expression payment_deadline 2004 11 30 00 00 00 Cancel lt Back Next OK Help Fig 127 Filtering for the payment deadline Nov 30 2004 6 Click the OK button Statification In order to speed up access to dynamic content it might be useful to convert the code of the dynamic page into static code The term statification refers to the representation of dynamic content on static pages When statification is performed the cod
350. sed by Quality Assurance via the Metadata dialog box m You can change or delete the publication date of an object that has the status delayed release via the Metadata dialog box This change must be submitted to Quality Assurance and released Thus the original publication date becomes invalid As soon as the publication date of an object is reached the respec tive entry in the Metadata dialog box is deleted by the system and the object version is published in the Production view Changing the publication date would only affect the next object version The object version already published remains visible Changing the Object Type Objective You want to change an object s type Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object m You are assigned the functional area that is linked with the desired object type To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Content Client User Manual 199 Chapter 6 Notes The custom object types created by the administrator in the Admin client cannot be converted into other object types Changing the object type is only possible for some of the default object types For an overview of the changes possible from a tech nical point of view refer to the Type dialog box of the Metadata dialog box Procedure 1 2
351. setting is c temp however you can change this setting in the Configuration dialog box If you have assigned an application to the file type the checked out object is opened in the preset editor and can be edited there If no application has been specified for the file type yet the Define application dialog box opens 1 Assign the desired application to the file type 2 Click the OK button The object is transferred to the configured editor and can be edited Working with the Download applet for the first time A security warning is displayed if you work with the Download applet for the first time You are asked to accept the certificate of Gauss Interprise AG The security warning for Internet Explorer is shown here as an example Content Client User Manual 169 Chapter 6 Security Warning P x Do you want to install and run Gauss Interprise AG s VeriSign Inc ID signed on 7 15 2004 2 20 PM and distributed by Gauss Interprise AG Publisher authenticity verified by VeriSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Gauss Interprise AG asserts that this content is safe You should only install view this content if you trust Gauss Interprise AG to make that assertion SIGNED WITH PERMISSIONS Full Permissions I Always trust content from Gauss Interprise AG H More Info Fig 58 Security warning when working with the Download applet for the first time Yes You have the following opti
352. spectively Content Client User Manual 455 Chapter 15 The following code sample shows the contents of the XML document defining the attribute values The OID of the XML document is 123 lt DOCTYPE optionset lt ELEMENT optionset option gt lt ELEMENT option value gt lt ATTLIST option name CDATA REQUIRED gt lt ELEMENT value PCDATA gt lt ATTLIST value locale CDATA REQUIRED gt gt lt optionset gt lt option name Accounting gt lt value Locale de_DE gt Buchhaltung lt value gt lt value locale en_US gt accounting lt value gt lt option gt lt option name Invoice gt lt value lLocale de_DE gt Rechnung lt value gt lt value Locale en_US gt invoice lt value gt lt option gt lt option name Company A gt lt option name Company B gt lt option name Company C gt lt optionset gt The WCM tag VIPKEYWORDLIST option_id 123 has the effect that users clicking the Keywords field in the Metadata dialog box of an English invoice see the following selection dialog box 456 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Qj Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsef Jb Company Company B Company C accounting invoice OK Clear Cancel Help Fig 129 Selection dialog box for the VIPKEYWORDLIST attribute In this dialog box the users can select exactly one entry In order to enable multiple selections the WCM tag mus
353. ss program or computer for handling the requests from a client and for providing services that can be used by a client Content Client User Manual 511 Glossary Starting point Initial point of a workflow When a workflow is assigned to a WCM object the object is automatically forwarded to the first activity Statification During statification the dynamic components of for example a JSP page are converted into static components The result is pure HTML without Java code Submit Staging action of Livelink WCM Server before a newly created or changed object can be published it must be submitted to Quality Assurance for checking This makes the changes to the object visible in the QA view Synchronous action A synchronous action does not return until all the tasks involved are completed See also Asynchronous action Template File that provides the framework for other objects The HTML pages for the Production view are created by bringing together the template and the content Any HTML components may be integrated in a template Topic Combination of an HTML page for direct display of information and a list for accommodating subordinate objects The topics are shown as nodes in the object tree and thus help structure the website Transition Connection between two activities or a starting end point and an activity ina workflow By means of the transitions the WCM objects are forwarded within the workf
354. sts you in defining custom filters Thus it is not necessary to know the filter expression language in order to define filters Starting the Wizard 1 Choose View Object filter to open the object filter 2 Click the Filter editor icon in the navigation area F Icon for opening the filter editor 3 Click the button _ Content Client User Manual 377 Chapter 12 Specifying the Filter Criterion Here you specify the metadata item that you want to use as the filter crite rion E Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explo Enter a metadata item or select an entry you want to search from the list m Robots Source Statify page Status Target group Template rechnungsbetrag rechnungsempfaenger zahlungsziel z lt Back Next gt Ok Help Fig 114 Specifying the Filter Criterion The drop down list in this dialog box contains the standard metadata Select a metadata item from the list To filter for special attributes enter the name of the special attribute in the text field above the list Click the Next button 378 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Determining a Comparator Here you determine a comparator The comparator combines the meta data item defined in the second step with the value specified in the fourth step E Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Internet Explor Select a comparator for your ex
355. t 5 Click the Save button For the changes to become visible in the published website you must submit the changed relator which then must be released by Quality Assurance Content Client User Manual 361 Chapter 11 Deleting a Relator Notes m You can delete relators like all other normal WCM objects For detailed information on deleting WCM objects refer to section Objekt l schen starting on page 216 Delete Livelink object together with the relator In order to destroy the Livelink object you require the Livelink permission Delete If you do not have this permission the relator will be deleted in the WCM However the object in the Livelink system will not be removed Livelink relators are always deleted when the referenced objects are deleted in Livelink Relators that have the status submitted are automatically rejected and deleted afterwards If a relator has already been released once it is marked as deleted and must be destroyed manually Livelink folder relators for which the Update Edit version automatically option is selected are automatically deleted including all subordinate objects when the referenced Livelink folder is deleted If you want to add further WCM objects below the Livelink folder relator you should click the Fixed version radio button for the folder relator Folders with this settings will not be removed when the refer enced Livelink folder is deleted
356. t Submit or click the appropriate icon Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Icon for submitting an object Updating an Expired Object Objective The WCM system has notified you that an object has passed its expiration date You now want to update the object Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to update You can also use the object filter to find expired objects 3 Update the object content see section Editing Object Content on page 178 Once you have updated the content you need to change the expira tion date This is done in the Metadata dialog box 4 Choose View Metadata 5 In the Expiration date field on the General tab specify how long the updated object is to remain valid Click the arrow icon to opena calendar for selecting the desired date The time can be set manually 6 Click the OK button Content Client User Manual 189 Chapter 6 7 To submit the updated object with the new release date to Quality Assurance choose Object Submit or click the appropriate icon a Icon for submitting an object Replacing the Content of an Object Objective You want to replace an object that already exists i
357. t change this entry Description In this field you can enter additional information on the starting point 5 Click the OK button 6 To add additional starting points repeat steps 2 to 5 Step 4 Add activities 1 Make sure that the transition mode is switched off If necessary click the icon to deactivate the transition mode Lo Content Client User Manual 273 Chapter 8 2 Choose Edit Add activity or click the appropriate icon Icon for adding an activity The New activity dialog box opens z Name Activity type Edit O QA Delete Principal World Role Group User Principal name Description Fig 81 Dialog box when adding an activity You can make the following settings m Name Enter the name for the activity m Activity type Select the type of the activity m Principal Specify the type of the principal to be assigned to the activity 274 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Principal name Enter the ID of the user or the name of the group or role that you want to assign to the activity If you have clicked the radio button World under Principal no entry is required here Notes If the user data of your WCM system is managed by means of the LDAP directory service Microsoft Active Directory enter the user name instead of the user ID For further information consult your WCM administrator Note that the assigned prin
358. t file The respective WCM object that is based on this docu ment is called source object In our example we choose a word processor file with the name Products doc Based on predefined layout rules the converter converts this document into HTML pages files By means of the converter rules you define where a new HTML page is to be started within the document Note Converters are not supplied with Livelink WCM Server They are integrated in the WCM system via the Admin client There your WCM administrator can assign different converters to the different source formats e g doc ppt xls During the conversion a set of HTML pages is generated the so called dependent objects of a source object The start page is the starting point for navigation within the pages generated by the converter It has the same name as the source document but has the file extension htm or html Thus in our example the name of the start page is Products htm The remaining converted HTML pages are named auto matically by the converter 234 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Special Properties of Source Objects and Dependent Objects The dependent objects of a source object that are generated during conversion basically behave like normal WCM objects However the logical connection between the source object and its dependent objects requires some special handling Staging actions Staging actions such as Submit Release
359. t for the website that is to be searched For information on collections refer to the online help of the Admin client To perform a search 1 Choose View Search In the navigation area the Search dialog box opens Enter a search term InternetSite_prod B Fig 31 The Search view 2 Enter your search term in the field 3 Click the Search icon El Icon for starting the search The search result is displayed in an object list Enter a search term Internet Score Type O1D Title Path Status 158 3 New Products Products Fig 32 Result of asearch 100 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client For each object the score object type OID title and status are displayed The score indicates the significance of the hit A docu ment containing the search term in the title gets a higher score than a document in which the search term was found in the text By clicking on the header row of a column you can sort the object list according to the criterion in the column Another click reverses the sort order You can mark one or more objects in the list in order to edit them The Action List Time consuming operations import move and copy delete topics edit objects by means of the object filter are performed asynchronously Directly after starting such an operation you can continue with your work while the operation is being performed in the
360. t is reached the WCM object is released If a delayed release date is set for the object the object gets the status delayed release Stop When this end point is reached the assignment between work flow object and WCM object is removed The status of the WCM object does not change Destroy When this end point is reached the WCM object is irretriev ably deleted A workflow definition may contain any number of activities and transitions Each activity is assigned to a principal user group or role who may edit the object and forward it in the workflow The three types of activities Edit QA and Delete represent the task of the assigned principal By means of the transitions the WCM object is forwarded from one activity to the next The necessary staging transitions are automatically performed in the background 258 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow When a workflow is assigned to a WCM object a transition from the starting point to an activity must additionally be selected The target activity of this transition is called initial activity The possible transitions depend on the status of the WCM object at the moment the workflow is assigned The following table provides an overview of the object statuses and the corresponding possible initial activity Table 14 Object statuses and possible initial activity Object status Possible activity rejected Edit checked out non
361. t look as follows VIPKEYWORDLIST option_id 123 option_mode multiple Referencing Objects By means of the oid parameter you can integrate the metadata of another WCM object in the HTML page of the current object Example VIPTITLE oid 7 generates the title of the WCM object with the OID 7 Note If the oid parameter is set it is not possible to make the value of the respective WCM tag editable in InSite Editing see section The edit Parameter on page 458 Content Client User Manual 457 Chapter 15 Parameters for InSite Editing For working with InSite Editing the following parameters are available m edit see the following section m order see section The order Parameter on page 459 buttons see section The buttons Parameter on page 460 m add see section The add Parameter on page 461 The edit Parameter Notes The edit parameter can be used for all special attributes and for the following standard metadata Heading Direct release Delayed release Keywords Description Target group E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release Furthermore you can use it for the WCM tag VIPCONTENT in templates Thus you enable InSite Editing for the content of the objects using these templates By means of the edit parameter you can activate InSite Editing for the information integrated into the page via WCM tags Permitted values
362. t objects The wizard starts Here you can change basic metadata e g the template the object type and the publication date m change the object responsibilities and descriptions 196 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects m change the attributes that the objects possess due to their asso ciation with an object type For detailed information on the individual entries refer to the online help of the Content client 5 Make the desired changes and save them Notes If a field is left empty the individual settings of the objects will remain unchanged This dialog box for modifying the attributes is only displayed if you have explicitly selected an object type in the first dialog box of the wizard The system checks whether the individual objects have the required status changed rejected released or delayed release Moreover the system checks whether you have the required access rights Objects that do not meet both requirements are removed from the selection The metadata of all objects that meet both requirements are changed The objects acquire the status changed To submit the objects to Quality Assurance choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Note If an error occurs while the metadata are changed the entire action is aborted The changes performed so far are undone In this case you receive an error message
363. t objects whose parent topic has already been submitted once If a template is assigned to the object the template must also have been submitted once Objective You have added an object or edited an existing object The object is complete and is to be checked by Quality Assurance You therefore want to submit the object to Quality Assurance Prerequisites The object has the status changed rejected or released m You have the access rights Read Change object and or Change metadata for the object Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to submit 3 Choose Object Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object The system checks whether there are dependent objects that can be submitted together with the object Dependent objects are objects that cannot be displayed correctly without the object to be submitted e g images embedded in an HTML page If there are dependent objects an according dialog box is displayed 248 Livelink WCM Server Submitting Releasing and Rejecting Objects Select the objects that you want to submit or release The list contains the selected object and all dependent objects ages fen Company Info Products Continue Cancel Help Fig 77 Selecting dependent objects when submitting an object 4 Select the dependent objects which are to b
364. t to submit all objects that you have changed in the topic Prod ucts to Quality Assurance Prerequisites m The objects have the status changed m You have the access rights Read and Change object for the objects m You are assigned the functional area View My objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the topic Products Content Client User Manual 373 Chapter 12 3 Choose View My objects to open the My objects view 4 In the drop down list click the filter have changed The hitlist displays all objects that you have changed in the topic Products 5 As you want to submit all objects that you have changed mark all objects in the hitlist 6 Choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting objects If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can submit the objects and send a message to the e mail address saved in the metadata item E mail 7 Click the OK button The system checks whether all marked objects meet the require ments Objects for which the action Submit cannot be performed are removed from the selection The other objects acquire the status submitted and can be checked by Quality Assurance Example Releasing Objects Objective Yo
365. t to which you want to assign the workflow Choose Object Assign workflow or click the appropriate icon E Icon for assigning a workflow The Assign workflow dialog box opens This dialog box lists all avail able workflows Assign workflow Microsoft Internet Expla Workflow Data Sheet Object title Data Sheet OID 41 Press Release Object title Press Release os 60 Product Info Object title Product Info OID 61 Cancel Help Fig 82 Dialog box for assigning a workflow 3 Select the desired workflow and click the OK button Content Client User Manual 283 Chapter 8 If the assigned workflow has several starting points or the starting point has several transitions the Forward dialog box opens Forward Microsoft Internet Explorer Oj x Transition Add graphic Start gt Create graphic k Revise text Start gt Write text Cancel Help Fig 83 Dialog box for selecting a transition 4 Select the desired transition and click the OK button The selected workflow is assigned to the current WCM object Removing a Workflow Assignment If the WCM object reaches an end point in the workflow the assignment between workflow and object is automatically removed However it is possible that an object cannot be forwarded in the workflow e g because the principal assigned to the current activity does not have the required access rights In this case you must remo
366. te Editing m The information is integrated in the page by means of WCM tags see chapter 15 Working with WCM Tags m For these WCM tags the parameter edit must be set see section The edit Parameter on page 458 If you move the mouse over a fragment that can be edited with InSite Editing the fragment is highlighted by a red frame The fragments are only highlighted if they can be edited This depends on the object status and the access rights of the logged in user For each fragment different functions are available via the context menu and a small toolbar You open the context menu by right clicking one of the icons in the small toolbar The available functions depend on whether the fragment is a simple fragment or a fragment with an object reference Object references refer to information from other objects which is inte grated by means of special attributes of the data type Object content Object source or OID Content Client User Manual 299 Chapter 9 The following describes how to edit simple fragments see the following section m edit object references see section Editing Fragments with Object References on page 302 Editing Simple Fragments Changing the value of a fragment To change the value of a fragment 1 Start InSite Editing 2 Navigate to the object with the fragment that you want to edit 3 Place the mouse pointer on the toolbar of the fragment that you want t
367. te Map Support workflows SJE 2 2 2 B ie Ol G H N T E e Je je Js Je Je Js Je la le ls lele le lele la aE Je e Je Je Js Fig 75 Converted objects in the navigation area Working with Source Objects and Converted Objects This section explains how to work with converted objects in the Content client It provides information on the following topics m converting a WCM object see the following section m editing the source object see section Editing the Source Object on page 240 m submitting the source object see section Submitting the Source Object on page 241 238 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects deleting the source object see section Deleting the Source Object on page 241 Converting an Object Objective You want to convert an object into HTML documents Prerequisites You have the access rights Read Create Delete Change object and Change Metadata for the topic in which the source object is located You have the access right Read for the source object D6 o The source object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release You are assigned the functional area Basic or the functional area your WCM administrator has provided for adding objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info In the Admin c
368. tes The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release Content Client User Manual 187 Chapter 6 When a topic is moved its subordinate objects are also moved For this reason the subordinate objects must also have the status changed rejected released or delayed release You have the access rights Read Move and copy and Change metadata for the object You have the access rights Read and Create for the topic in which you want to insert the object Procedure 1 2 188 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object that you want to move source object Choose Edit Cut In the navigation area mark the topic to which you want to move the object target topic Choose Edit Paste If the Content client is configured accordingly a Remark dialog box opens Enter a remark for the log and click the OK button The object is moved to the target topic Not only the content but also the metadata and references of the source object are copied The references are updated to reflect the new location The status of the moved object is changed After a topic has been moved it also has the status changed The action does not change the status of the subordinate objects To submit the moved object to Quality Assurance again choose Object g
369. that were removed from the attribute set are still displayed on the gener ated pages The following functions are available for editing attribute sets m creating attributes see the following section m adding existing attributes see section Adding Attributes on page 483 removing attributes from an attribute set see section Removing Attributes from an Attribute Set on page 483 Creating Attributes Notes You cannot modify existing attributes You cannot delete attributes from the WCM system Attributes that have been removed from an attribute set remain in the database and can be assigned again To create an attribute for an attribute set 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired attribute set in the left window pane 3 Choose New attribute on the context menu or click the corresponding icon 480 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client rh Icon for creating an attribute The New attribute dialog box opens Z New attribute Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 x Name Type Maximum length Precision Scale Ok Cancel Help Fig 135 Dialog box when creating an attribute 4 Make the following settings Name The name must be unique within the entire website Moreover the name of the attribute must not be identical to the name of a property that belongs
370. that you want to assign to the new WCM object The workflow object has been released at least once by Quality Assurance i e it has a major version number of at least 1 m You have the access rights Read and Create for the topic to which you want to add the WCM object m You are assigned the functional area Workflow and the respective functional area for adding or the functional area your WCM administrator has provided for this purpose To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure In the first dialog box displayed when adding an object click the workflow that you want to assign to the new object in the Workflow drop down list Assigning a Workflow to an Existing Object Prerequisites m You have the access right Read for the workflow object that you want to assign to the WCM object m You are assigned the functional area Workflow To check your func tional areas choose Tools Login info 282 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow The workflow object has been released at least once by Quality Assurance i e it has a major version number of at least 1 You have the access right Read for the WCM object to which you want to assign the workflow The status of the WCM object allows one of the transitions of the starting point see table Object statuses and possible initial activity on page 259 Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the objec
371. the desired settings Automatic deletion min In this field you can enter after how many minutes completed actions are to be deleted from the action list Automatic refreshing sec In this field you can enter after how many seconds the action list is to be refreshed automatically If you enter 0 the action list is not updated automatically m Always show action list When this check box is selected the action list window opens automatically when an asynchronous operation is started Content Client User Manual 119 Chapter 4 If you clear the check box the action list is not displayed auto matically when an asynchronous action is started By choosing Tools Action list you can open the action list manually at any time Delete completed actions automatically lf you select this check box entries for finished asynchronous actions will be deleted automatically from the action list 4 Do one of the following Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Configuring Object Attributes To specify the settings for the object attributes 1 Choose Tools gt Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 Mark the tree element Object attributes or one of its sub elements in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box The possible se
372. the marked object version are displayed 3 Display version Microsoft Internet Explorer ol x Yersion Title 1 0 0 Phone Phonelist Bianchi Antonella Blume Klaus Carson David Deville Pierre Erdmann Christian G mez Juan Laurent Catherine Moreno Manuel Olivier St phane Rossi Mario S nchez Maria Schmidt Elke Shepard Helen Stein Joshua No category 12 34 5678 91011 12 34 5678 91011 12 34 5678 91011 12 34 5678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 12 345678 91011 Aug 4 2014 9 18 27 AM Heading Template Object category Expiration date Object size 3 81 KB If you need additional phone numbers and or addresses please visit the locations page Restore Zoom in Original size Zoom out Close Help Fig 35 Display version function in the Log dialog box Compare versions This function is only active if two log entries are marked opens a new window in which the two marked versions of the object are displayed one below the other This makes it easy to compare the two object versions 104 Livelink WCM Server Working with the Content Client Compare with current version opens a new window in which the current version and the marked version of the object are displayed one below the other This makes it easy to compare
373. the middle of the comparison value contains contains Finds character sub strings Character strings is subordi childof Finds subordinate objects Metadata item nate object of This operator does not require a comparison value OID 386 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together is null isnull Finds objects for which this All metadata metadata item is not set This operator does not require a comparison value Notes For metadata with the data type set or list you can only use the comparators corresponds to pattern contains and is null For finding a version the operator version is available This operator is combined with a comparator This results in the following filter expres sion version number version comparator For example to find objects with a version number less than 1 0 2 use the expression 1 0 2 version lt The resulting filter expressions must correspond to the following pattern for operators requiring a comparison value metadata item comparator value m for the operator is subordinate object of childof OID Content Client User Manual 387 Chapter 12 m for the operator is null metadata item isnull for searching for a version version number version comparator Comparison Values Each WCM metadata item is assigned a certain data type t
374. the properties to be deleted in the right window pane 4 Choose Delete property on the context menu or click the corre sponding icon re Icon for deleting a property 5 Click the Apply button Deleting an Object Category Note You can only delete object categories that are not used by any object in the relevant website To delete an object category 1 Choose Tools gt Website administration gt Object categories The Object categories dialog box opens 2 Mark the desired object category in the left window pane 3 Choose Delete object category on the context menu or click the corresponding icon a Icon for deleting an object category 4 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button 490 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Content Client User Manual 491 492 Livelink WCM Server APPENDIX A Livelink WCM Server and XML XML is especially suitable for exchanging platform independent data between different systems or for separating content and layout For this reason XML is often used in content management environments Livelink WCM Server provides four object types for integrating and editing XML data structures in a WCM managed website This appendix describes how to use these XML object types For this chapter a sound knowledge of XML and Livelink WCM Server is required Note For the XML object types to work correctly you may have to create a MIME type for XSL doc
375. the two object versions Restore old version replaces the current version of the object with the marked version m Add new remark opens a dialog box in which you can enter informa tion on the marked object version Help on the Content client When working in the Content client you are assisted by wizards and online help Wizards A wizard starts automatically when you choose a function such as adding an object and guides you through the process step by step Online help The online help of the Content client is implemented as a context sensi tive web help The help window for the relevant topic is opened depending on the dialog box you are currently working in You can call the help by clicking the Help button or when using Internet Explorer by pressing the F1 key When you choose Help topics on the Help menu the start page of the help opens regardless of the current context Content Client User Manual 105 106 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 4 Configuring the Content Client Livelink WCM Server offers you several possibilities to configure the layout of the Content client and the procedures for editing objects In this way you can tailor the client to suit your needs The settings you make are saved as a so called profile and can be activated at any time By means of the Content client you can create several user defined profiles For example if you work at different work stations and have assigned edito
376. the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object whose access control list you want to edit 3 Choose View Access rights 4 Mark the principal entry whose access rights you want to edit 5 Click the right mouse button Edit access rights The Edit access rights dialog box opens 220 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Read Change object Delete Create Release Change metadata Change rights Move and copy Read Production Apply Cancel Help Fig 73 Editing access rights 6 Click the desired radio button for the individual rights m Yes The right is explicitely allowed No The right is explicitely forbidden Not set The right is not determined Note Access rights are also dependent on group specific and or role specific entries see section Priority Rules on page 57 7 To apply the changes to the Access rights dialog box click the Apply button Content Client User Manual 221 Chapter 6 8 Click the Save button in the Access rights dialog box 9 Submit the object with the edited access control list to Quality Assur ance To do so choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon Icon for submitting an object Removing a Principal from the Access Control List Objective You want to remove a user or other entry from the access control list Prerequisites m The object has the status changed re
377. this application if you trust Gauss Interprise 4G to make this assertion Sar aa To Fig 80 Security warning when starting the workflow modeler You have the following options m Start Click this button to confirm the security prompt This is neces sary for working with the workflow modeler Details Click this button to request more information about the certificate Exit lf you do not confirm the prompt you cannot work with the workflow modeler Via an application class If you do not want to use Java Web Start you can define the start script VIPWorkflowModeler bat which is located in the workflow modeler installation directory as the application for XPDL files in the Configuration dialog box This presupposes that the workflow modeler is installed on your computer The workflow modeler will start automatically when an object of type Workflow is checked out 264 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Menu Bar and Toolbar The menu bar of the workflow modeler provides functions for editing work flow definitions Additionally a toolbar offers access to the most important functions The following table gives you an overview of the commands in the menu bar and the corresponding icons Table 16 Commands in the menu bar of the workflow modeler Command Icon Function File menu gt New Opens a new empty workflow definition An L already open work
378. tion dialog box choose Edit Edit content or click the appropriate icon _ amp Icon for editing the content of an object The object will open in the application you assigned m Ifyou have cleared the Use Download applet check box simply open the file again from its local storage location make the changes and save the file 4 When you have finished editing the object check the object back in to the WCM system The object has the status changed 5 To submit the object to Quality Assurance choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon g Icon for submitting an object Content Client User Manual 185 Chapter 6 Undoing Changes Objective You want to undo changes made to an object i e you want to restore an earlier version of the object Prerequisites The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release You have the access rights Read Change object and Change metadata for the object You are assigned the functional area Log dialog To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 2 186 Change to the Edit view of the website In the navigation area mark the object for which you want to restore an earlier version Choose View gt Log The log dialog box opens This dialog box lists all available object versions In the Log dialog box select the version that you
379. to an object category in this website The name must not be more than 20 characters long Uppercase letters may not be used they are automatically mapped to lower case letters Otherwise the same conditions as for names of attribute sets apply Content Client User Manual 481 Chapter 16 Note If you want the name of the attribute to be displayed in the language of the user you can translate it For more infor mation refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual m Type Click a type in the drop down list For detailed information on the individual types refer to table Data types with formats used on page 436 Maximum length For the types External URL List Set Set of e mail addresses and String you must determine the maximum length Select a high value because for example in the Oracle RDBMS some special characters are represented by 2 bytes instead of 1 byte When UTF 8 is used a character may be encoded with up to 4 bytes The maximum length of character strings is determined by the RDBMS used Oracle 4000 characters Precision only for the type Floating point number determines the number of digits to be considered Scale only for the type Floating point number determines the number of digits after the decimal point i e where the point is inserted in the numeric string The value range for the type Floating point number is de
380. to edit HTML documents even without separate applications The Content client allows authors to edit website content no matter where they may be access to the server on which a website is hosted is possible via the LAN WAN or Internet Thanks to its extensive access control functions and communication encryption Livelink WCM Server guarantees protection for sensitive data Defined Creation and Approval Process All objects of the websites that you manage with Livelink WCM Server pass through fixed stages editing quality assurance and publication for productive operation Every editor must submit new or modified objects to Quality Assurance Here the object is checked and either released for publication in the intranet or Internet or rejected and returned to the responsible editor for correction This structured creation and approval process helps you ensure compli ance with quality standards 18 Livelink WCM Server Introduction Simultaneous Editing by Different Users With Livelink WCM Server several users can edit website objects at the same time Whether a user can edit a specific object depends in particular on the current status of the object and on the user s access rights If an editor checks out an object for editing this object is locked for write access by other users For each object there is a log telling you among other things which user has checked out the object When the object is checked in again th
381. to the access control list 218 Fig 73 Editing access rights 221 Fig 74 Converting a Word file into HTML 234 Fig 75 Converted objects in the navigation area 238 Fig 76 The compound object in the navigation area 244 Fig 77 Selecting dependent objects when submitting an object 249 Fig 78 Selecting dependent objects when releasing an object 252 Fig 79 Selecting dependent objects when releasing an object directly 254 Fig 80 Security warning when starting the workflow modeler 264 Fig 81 Dialog box when adding an activity 274 Fig 82 Dialog box for assigning a workflow 283 10 Livelink WCM Server Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Dialog box for selecting a transition Example workflow for editing data sheets Logging in to InSite Editing InSite Editing Editing an object fragment via InSite Editing Replacing the referenced object via InSite Editing 284 288 295 296 301 303 The template Herotemplate in the Content WYSIWYG view 305 Teasers on the website HeroLeasing Replacing a teaser in the template Herotemplate Configuring the VipHCLApplication Structure of the PressRelease template The Properties
382. tribute does not exist relative server relative any string e g on not set or attribute does not exist absolute server relative SERVER_RELATIVE server relative absolute any string e g on Deployment systems created with the option relative calculate the refer ences that the JSP page contains relative to the path of the JSP page When the JSP page is executed for statifying a form instance the relative URLs are written to the static code of the form instance where they are no longer adapted This causes problems if the form instance is not located in the same directory as the JSP page used for statification In this case the relative URLs are wrong To avoid this problem set the attribute Absolute URL for the JSP page to on or to any value other than SERVER_RELATIVE This generates absolute URLs on the executed JSP page When the form instance is statified these URLs are converted into relative URLs relative to the newly generated form instance 420 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes Statification of XML Objects XML objects can be statified Two cases are differentiated for statifying XML objects The XML object is assigned a form template or the special attribute Statify page of the XML object has a purely numeric value Statification is performed in the same way as for form instances i e by means of a JSP page see section Statification of Fo
383. tribute is displayed as a tooltip Adding References There are different ways of adding references to an object m by means of the function Add reference in the Content client by means of the function Add reference to a WCM object in the integrated HTML editor directly in the editor Content Client User Manual 203 Chapter 6 Adding References in the Content Client Objective You want to add a reference to a WCM object which points to another object within the same website Prerequisites m The object has the status changed rejected released or delayed release m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the object m You are assigned the functional area References dialog To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the navigation area mark the object to which you want to add a reference 3 Choose Edit Add reference A dialog box with the topic structure of the website opens 204 Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects Livelink WCM Server Content Client Micros Topic structure EQ Internetsite HER de Ba en i ER Careers 5 Egy Company Info S Ba Products S Ba Services Ea General Templates CEA a Ba News a Bay Site Map a EQ Support te Bay Workflows Fs Fr Ok Cancel Help Fig 69 Topic structure when addin
384. trictly speaking it is possible to create an object without any content When you add an object without specifying a file this object initially has no content The first time the object is checked out and then checked in again it is given an empty content component Objects of type Assembled object which never have a content component are the only exception Template Separation of layout and content is an important property of WCM objects You can define the layout of a WCM object in a template The template is a freely designable page It contains design elements such as graphics background images background colors text and link colors as well as font formats Additionally the page contains placeholders for the actual content of the objects based on this template Moreover the metadata associated with the object can be referenced in the template When adding an object in the Content client you specify whether the object is to use a template or not It is also possible to assign a template to the object later or to change the assignment If you decide to use a template its layout will automatically be applied to the new object Layout and content are separated as illustrated in the following diagram IntemetSite IntemetSite ABC ABC The template defines The content is created in Livelink WCM Server the page layout the object The template is automatically creates an
385. ttings are displayed in the right window pane The following table describes the object attributes you can make settings for For detailed information refer to the online help of the Content client 120 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Table 12 Settings for the object attributes in a profile Item Possible settings Object attributes Maximum number of entries to be displayed in the References dialog box Maximum number of entries to be displayed in the Log dialog box Maximum number of objects that can be displayed in the right window pane of the Content client via View gt Subordinate objects Content WYSIWYG Specifies the object types that can be displayed in the right window pane of the Content client via View Content WYSIWYG Content source Specifies the object types that can be displayed in the right window pane of the Content client via View Content source 3 Make the desired settings 4 Do one of the following m Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left Configuring Application Classes If you use the Download applet for editing objects the object you check out is automatically opened in the associated editor For this purpose you must assign the editors so called applications to the di
386. ttribute sets You can change this assignment for existing object types When adding an object type you can optionally assign an attribute set To view the available attribute sets of the current website choose Tools gt Website administration Attribute sets The Attribute sets dialog box opens The attribute sets are displayed in a list in the left window pane To view the attributes of an attribute set select the attribute set in the list The attribute sets for the default object types are created automatically o 5 during installation compound dynamic html image and other Content Client User Manual 477 Chapter 16 Attribute sets Name compound dynamic html image other Fig 134 Default attribute sets The following functions are available to you m adding an attribute set see the following section m adding attributes to an existing attribute set or removing them see section Editing an Attribute Set on page 480 deleting attribute sets from the website settings see section Deleting an Attribute Set on page 484 Note If the proxy Content servers assigned to the respective website use separate data storages changes to attribute sets must also be saved there For this reason the system checks whether these proxy Content servers are available and whether the JDBC pools assigned can be used If this is not the case you cannot save the change
387. tudin eu mattis id pede Donec sit amet erat Phasellus a enim non purus scelerisque lacinia Integer turpis Maecenas vitae libero Aliquam sapien velit egestas condimentum interdum et elementum quis arcu Etiam lacus Cras porttitor rutrum tellus Duis bibendum tempor elit Curabitur ut tellus Sed gravida orci eu nibh In hac habitasse platea dictumst Phasellus ut purus Fig 97 Partner profile in the object preview You can modify the partner profiles on the Properties tab of the Metadata dialog box at any time Content Assembly with InSite Editing This example describes how to use the functions of InSite Editing in order to edit assembled objects directly in the website Scenario Your company has several partner companies which are introduced on the website You want to edit these partner profiles directly in the website without starting the Content client When changing the logo a selection list of all available logos located below a certain topic should be displayed Content Client User Manual 331 Chapter 10 Prerequisites InSite Editing is configured for your website For more information refer to chapter 9 InSite Editing m You have the access rights Read and Change metadata for the partner objects you want to edit m You have the access rights Read Change object and Change metadata for the template the partner objects are based on m You are assigned the f
388. ty standards or needs to be revised If the object meets the quality standards it can be released This transfers the current version of the object to the Production view Otherwise the object is rejected and sent back to the responsible editor for correction Releasing an Object Objective You have completed the quality assurance process for an object and come to a positive conclusion You now want to transfer the current version of the object to the Production view and make it available to the public Prerequisites m The object has the status submitted m You have the access rights Read and Release for the object Procedure 1 In the navigation area mark the object that you want to release 2 Choose Object Release or click the appropriate icon 7 Icon for releasing an object Content Client User Manual 251 Chapter 7 The system checks whether there are dependent objects that can be released together with the object Dependent objects are objects that cannot be displayed correctly without the object to be released e g images embedded in an HTML page If there are dependent objects an according dialog box is displayed E Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microsoft Select the objects that you want to submit or release The list contains the selected object and all dependent objects Type OID Title fen Company SE Gane Info Products Images D 20 Product Overview fen Com
389. type Each object type belongs to a specific object data type The following object data types may be used for new object types 470 Livelink WCM Server Managing Websites in the Content Client Table 47 Object data types and WCM objects Object data type WCM objects Assembled object Compound object Objects that do not have a content component All data of the object is saved in the metadata This way the content of other objects can be integrated in the object Logically related objects e g HTML pages generated by means of a conversion program from a word processor document that are to be treated as a single document Frame Pages designed with frames you can use this object data type for example to define PHP or JSP frames Frame topic Objects that have subordinate frame objects HTML template Template for HTML documents Livelink relator WCM objects referencing a Livelink object Surrogate This object data type can be used to administer WCM objects that are not typical web documents These include graphics PDF documents Microsoft Office files etc Hyperlinks from these documents to other objects are not managed by the automatic reference check in Livelink WCM Server This means that the references are not analyzed when such objects are imported However hyperlinks from other WCM objects to objects of the object data type Surrogate are auto matically administered by Livel
390. types Set Set of e mail addresses and List You can use the format parameter to specify a different separator For example VIPKEYWORDLIST returns Vermont Maine Connecticut whereas VIPKEYWORDLIST format amp nbsp amp nbsp returns Vermont Maine Connecticut You can also use WCM tags to integrate attributes from a Livelink cate gory see section Integrating Livelink Metadata in a Page on page 358 As Livelink attributes may have more than one value all Livelink attributes have set types Use the format parameter to format integrated object information in the usual way e g in order to determine how time stamps are displayed In order to simultaneously specify a separator for multiple attribute values use the separator parameter Example You have a Livelink category name Training which among others contains the attribute Dates The dates of the next three trainings are saved as value of the Dates attribute The WCM tag VIPLL category Training attribute Dates format amp nbsp amp nbsp outputs Mon Nov 29 00 00 00 CET 2004 Mon Jan 10 00 00 00 CET 2005 Mon Mar 07 00 00 00 CET 2005 To format the dates in a more attractive way use the WCM tag VIPLL category Training attribute Dates format yyyy MM dd separator amp nbsp amp nbsp This WCM tag outputs 2004 11 29 2005 01 10 2005 03 07 448 Livelink WCM Server Working
391. u want to release all submitted objects Prerequisites m The objects have the status submitted m You have the access rights Read and Release for the objects m You are assigned the functional area Filter standard To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info 374 Livelink WCM Server Finding Objects and Editing Them Together Procedure 1 2 Choose View Object filter to open the object filter In the drop down list click the filter submitted The hitlist displays all objects that have been submitted Inthe hit list select the objects individually and check their quality To view the submitted objects in the right window pane choose View gt Content WYSIWYG In the hitlist mark the objects that you want to release Choose Object gt Release or click the appropriate icon 7 Icon for releasing objects If the Content client is configured accordingly an E mail dialog box opens In this dialog box you can release the objects and send a message to the e mail address saved in the metadata item E mail Release Click the OK button The system checks whether all marked objects meet the require ments Objects for which the action Release cannot be performed are removed from the selection without a message being displayed The other objects acquire the status released This makes the released version of the objects available in the Production vi
392. uld adapt the length of the title in such a way that the resulting file name meets the requirements of your operating system Under Windows the absolute path to a topic and a generated page may not be longer than 240 and 260 characters respectively m File Specify the document to be added to the Livelink system Click the Browse button to select the file Specifying a file is mandatory Note Please choose only files that have a file extension a Workflow If you want to assign a workflow to the new object click the desired workflow in the drop down list Object type Select the object type Livelink relator Confirm by clicking the Next button Specifying the Livelink system There may be more than one Livelink system in your company In the following dialog box you select the Livelink system to which the document will be added Confirm by clicking the Next button Specifying location in Livelink In the following dialog box you select the Livelink folder for the new docu ment 352 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Confirm by clicking the Next button Entering a remark In the following dialog box you may enter information for the relator s log Confirm your entries by clicking the OK button The WCM system creates the relator and shows it in the Navigation area The relator s status is changed Additionally the document will be stored at the specified location in the Livel
393. uments in the application server If this is necessary contact your WCM system administrator The XML Object Types Livelink WCM Server provides four object types that you can use to add XML objects to your website m XML document m XML template m XSLT document m XSLT template These object types are introduced in the following sections Content Client User Manual 493 Appendix A Note In theory you can add the object type XML topic via the Admin client or the Content client However Livelink WCM Server does not support such an object type at present The Object Type XML document The object type XML document is used to add XML data structures as WCM objects For the Edit and QA views of XML documents the WCM system generates a so called surrogate page which contains a link to the XML document In the Production view however the content of the XML document is visible Sample code for an XML document lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt product gt lt name gt software package lt name gt lt order_no gt 123456789 lt order_no gt lt price gt 1250 euro lt price gt lt description gt The all in one package for developers Out now lt description gt lt product gt The Object Type XML template An object of type XML template is used as a template and has all the properties of an XML document Thus you can assign an XML docume
394. unctional areas Dynamic and Advanced or the functional areas your WCM administrator has provided for editing templates and assembled objects To check your functional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure Step 1 Modify partner template First you must enable InSite Editing for the individual fields of the partner objects Proceed as follows 1 Open the Partnertemplate template in the integrated HTML editor 2 In the Design mode select a WCM tag and choose Edit WCM tag on the context menu The wizard for editing WCM tags starts 3 For Enable InSite Editing click the on radio button 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all desired WCM tags 332 Livelink WCM Server Working with Assembled Objects Step 2 Configure selection and thumbnails for logo When a partner logo is changed the entire topic structure opens by default You can restrict the selection by defining a filter in the WCM tag VIPLOGO For example the statement filter topic 4 and oty_name GIF only shows objects of type GIF image below the topic with the OID 4 Notes The filter expression may already contain double quotes example oty_name GIF In this case enclose the value of the filter param eter in single quotes example filter oty_name GIF For further information on creating filters refer to section The Filter Editor on page 376 For notes on using the filter parameter refer to section
395. unctions are to be displayed as icons in the toolbar whether text is to be shown for these icons and where this text is to be positioned Moreover you can hide deacti vated icons see section Configuring the Toolbar on page 116 Context menu You can hide deactivated items from the context menu see section Configuring the Basic Settings on page 110 m Navigation You can choose from five different icons for the nodes in the object tree see section Configuring the Navigation on page 117 130 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client m Filter selection You can determine which filters are to be available in the Object filter and My filter views This way you can restrict the selection to the filters that are most frequently used see section Configuring the Navigation on page 117 m Remark and e mail dialog boxes The Content client can be config ured in such a way that E mail and Remark dialog boxes are never displayed see section Configuring the Basic Settings on page 110 Application classes You can assign editors to the various file types which will start automatically when an object of this type is checked out This enables you to use your familiar authoring environment see section Configuring Application Classes on page 121 Content Client User Manual 131 132 Livelink WCM Server CHAPTER 5 Adding Objects This chapter explains how to add object
396. value 452 Livelink WCM Server Working with WCM Tags Notes The default parameter can be used for all special attributes and for the following standard metadata Heading Direct release Keywords Description Target group E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release If the reference to a metadata item is distributed over several WCM tags the default parameter must be placed in the tag that adopts the value from the template Example VIPIMAGEURL edit begin lt img src VIPIMAGEURL default on gt VIPIMAGEURL edit end Example The WCM object Partner does not have an entry for the Partnername property The template contains the entry Enter the name of the partner for this property VIPPARTNERNAME default o0n writes the entry from the template to the generated page of the WCM object Partner This way the user editing the WCM object knows immediately what to enter into this field The required Parameter Use the required parameter to determine that the field of the corre sponding metadata item in the WCM tag dialog box must be filled in example VIPSUBTITLE required true If the parameter is not set the WCM system does not check whether the field is filled in The label Parameter By means of the Label parameter you can define alternative names for special attributes The alternative names are displayed for the respective object in the
397. ve the workflow manually Objective You want to remove the assignment between a workflow and a WCM object 284 Livelink WCM Server Content Workflow Prerequisites m You have the access rights Read and Change rights for the WCM object from which you want to remove the workflow If you assigned the workflow to the WCM object and the object has not yet been forwarded in the workflow the right Read is sufficient m You are assigned the functional area Workflow To check your func tional areas choose Tools Login info Procedure 1 Inthe navigation area mark the WCM object from which you want to remove the workflow 2 Choose Object gt Remove workflow assignment 3 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The assignment between WCM object and workflow is removed WCM Objects in the Workflow It is not possible to perform normal staging actions on a WCM object to which a workflow is assigned The object may only be edited by the prin cipal assigned to the current activity Depending on the access rights this principal may check out edit check in and move the object as well as restore an earlier object version Having edited the WCM object the user forwards the object in the work flow For this purpose the user selects a predefined transition This takes the object to the next activity If this involves a staging transition the user must have the required access rights
398. velink WCM Server Content Workflow 2 Edit the workflow definition You can add workflow elements see section Creating a Workflow Defini tion on page 272 and Adding Transitions on page 268 m delete workflow elements see section Deleting Workflow Elements on page 270 move workflow elements see sections Moving Activities Starting Points and End Points on page 267 and Moving Tran sitions on page 269 m double click a workflow element to edit its properties 3 Save your changes and close the workflow modeler Notes When a workflow is assigned to a WCM object the latest released version is always used Thus the respective workflow object must be released first before the changed workflow definition can be used The changed workflow definition does not affect WCM objects to which the workflow has already been assigned These objects pass through the old version of the workflow Via the workflow modeler as a separate application 1 Start the workflow modeler by double clicking the file VIPWorkflowModeler bat which is located in the workflow modeler installation directory 2 Open the workflow definition via File gt Open or click the appropriate icon e Icon for opening a workflow definition Content Client User Manual 279 Chapter 8 The Open workflow definition dialog box opens 3 Select the desired workflow definition and confirm by clicking the Open button
399. ver has an additional organi zational function in the object hierarchy because it can accommodate other child objects The following table provides an overview of the main features of the stan dard object types Note The choice of object types you are offered when adding an object may vary from the following table Object types are linked with func tional areas i e you can only see the object types for which you have the respective functional areas Also your WCM administrator may delete and or add object types Content Client User Manual 65 Chapter 2 Table 7 Object types with description Object type Icon Description Assembled object A This object type is used to integrate objects au that do not have a content component them selves The complete object information is saved in the metadata This way the content of other objects can be integrated in the objects For information on using this object type refer to chapter 10 Working with Assembled Objects ASP page ASP template This object type is used to integrate objects whose content includes ASP scripts In addition to page layout description this object type makes it possible to reuse routines that have been programmed once for the individual creation of web content without difficulty in other objects ASP topic This object type represents a combination of an ASP object and a directory As with other topic types an
400. w is available if the topmost topic of the website the so called root object has been submitted at least once The Production view is available if the root object has been released Of course you can change to another website while working with the Content client To do so choose Select website on the Tools menu Logging Out of the WCM System Note There are certain time consuming actions in Livelink WCM Server that are performed asynchronously i e the actions are automatically completed in the background Time consuming actions include importing objects and deleting topics In these cases just close your browser to stop working with the Content client Logging out will cancel the actions To log out of the WCM system 1 Choose Object Exit 2 Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button Licenses As soon as you have logged in successfully to the WCM system and perform a staging action in the Content client you use up a license To stop working with the Content client you should always choose Object Exit before closing the browser Otherwise you will remain internally logged in to the WCM system for a certain period of time this period is set in the Admin client The license you are using will not be released until this time has elapsed Content Client User Manual 77 Chapter 3 Changing the Password For security reasons we recommend that you change the password fo
401. want to restore By means of the right mouse button Display version check whether you have selected the right version Choose right mouse button Restore old version Confirm the security prompt by clicking the Yes button The entry Earlier version restored is written to the log The number of the restored version is entered in the Remark column Livelink WCM Server Editing Objects After the earlier version of the object has been restored the object has the status changed 8 To submit the object to Quality Assurance again choose Object gt Submit or click the appropriate icon ei Icon for submitting an object Notes In the Admin client the WCM administrator can determine the maximum number of restorable versions For detailed information refer to the Livelink WCM Server Administrator Manual The following standard metadata of an object version are restored Content Type Title Heading Suggested file name Direct release Language Keywords Description Target group E mail Edit E mail QA E mail Release Moving an Object Although easy to do moving objects is a complex process It does not merely move a file from one directory to another It also adapts all refer ences to the object If the object is a topic all references to the child objects are also adapted Objective You want to move an object to a different location in the website s topic structure Prerequisi
402. with WCM Tags Value Explanation Presentation m Minute Number S Second Number Z Time zone Text long Date Number and text Time Examples Time stamp September 20 2004 2 07 06 PM CEST September 20 2004 02 07 06 PM CEST medium Date Number Time Examples Time stamp Sep 20 2004 2 07 06 PM Sep 20 2004 2 07 06 PM short Date Number Time Examples Time stamp 9 20 04 2 07 PM 9 20 04 2 07 PM The following table provides examples for using the format parameter with dates The examples refer to the standard metadata item Release date of the data type Time stamp which has the value 9 20 04 2 07 06 PM The language of the WCM object is English Content Client User Manual 443 Chapter 15 Table 41 Examples of the format parameter for the data type Time stamp Parameterized WCM tag Output VIPDATE_RELEASED format Thu September 20 2004 E MMMM d yyyy VIPDATE_RELEASED format 02 07 HH mm VIPDATE_RELEASED format 2004 09 20 at 02 07 06 PM CEST yyyy MM dd at HH mm ss z Values of the format Parameter for Object URLs By default the format of the URL returned for the data type object URL is determined by the corresponding setting of the deployment system The format parameter enables you to control the format In this case the WCM system ignores the deployment system setting and the value of the special attribute absolute_url
403. with WCM Tags The locale Parameter By means of the Locale parameter you can localize the information inte grated via WCM tags You can set the language version for displaying the information and the country specific conventions for formatting the data If the Locale parameter is not set the system uses the WCM object s language setting The values of the locale parameter are specified in the form Language code _ country code according to ISO 639 and ISO 3166 e g en_US for English A list of the language codes according to ISO 639 is available at http Avww w3 org WAI ER IG ert iso639 htm For an overview of the country codes according to ISO 3166 refer to http Awww iso org iso en prods services iso3166ma 02iso 3166 code lists list en1 html You can use the Locale parameter for the following data types Boolean value returns wahr or falsch for the value de_DE All other values return true or false Set Set of e mail addresses determines the sort order Date Time Time stamp returns the date time the date with time in a country specific format Example VIPDATE lLocale en_US returns Sep 4 2003 VIPDATE locale de_DE returns 04 09 2003 Floating point number returns the floating point number in country specific format Note For programming JSP pages it may be required to output the internal names of object statuses object types and default values
404. y cases the WCM system considers this suggestion Direct release You can only select this check box if the functional area Direct release has been assigned to you If you select this check box the object does not have to be submitted to Quality Assurance it can be released directly by the responsible editor The object must only be submitted to Quality Assurance for initial release Content Client User Manual 153 Chapter 5 Do one of the following To confirm your entries and make further settings for the new object click the Next button Your entries might already be sufficient for adding the object In this case you can click the OK button to add the object The other steps correspond to the procedure for adding objects by means of the function New from object type See m Defining Object Responsibilities on page 140 m Entering Attribute Values on page 142 Entering Properties Values on page 144 m Selecting a Workflow Transition on page 145 m Entering a Remark on page 146 Importing Linked Objects You can integrate an existing structure that is linked via references in the WCM system In this way you can for example import entire tree struc tures that are tied to each other by links Requirements for importing linked objects For importing linked objects the following requirements must be met m The links must be relative If the references are absolute the l
405. yed in the Object list view Root object for navigation Selection whether the heading is displayed in the object tree in addition to the title Filter Search Maximum number of objects displayed in a filter hitlist Maximum number of objects found by the filter Selection of filters available in the Object filter and My filter views Maximum number of objects displayed in the hitlist of the Search view Selection of the Search server to be used for the search 3 Make the desired settings 4 Do one of the following m Click the OK button to save your settings and close the Configu ration dialog box To specify further settings for the profile select another configu ration section in the tree on the left 118 Livelink WCM Server Configuring the Content Client Configuring the Action List For general information on the action list refer to section The Action List starting on page 101 To specify the settings for the action list 1 Choose Tools gt Configuration to open the Configuration dialog box 2 Mark the tree element Action list in the left window pane of the Configuration dialog box The possible settings are displayed in the right window pane Action list Automatic deletion min lo Automatic refreshing sec lo IV Always show action list 7 Delete completed actions automatically Fig 40 Configuring the action list 3 Make
406. your func tional areas choose Tools Login info Your WCM administrator prepared the website in which you want to add the relator for using Livelink functionality For an automatic synchronization of WCM objects to Livelink objects the WCM Kernel Integration module must be installed For more information refer to the Livelink Integration Manual Adding a Livelink Relator Objective You want to integrate a single Livelink object ina WCM managed website A wizard guides you through the process of adding the relator Content Client User Manual 341 Chapter 11 Starting the wizard 1 Change to the Edit view of the website 2 In the Navigation area mark the topic to which you want to add the relator 3 Choose Object New Relator Specifying the Livelink system There may be more than one Livelink system in your company In the first dialog box you specify the Livelink system in which the Livelink object that you want to integrate is stored Z Object attributes Microsoft Internet Explorer iol x Select a Livelink system from the list Livelink_internal Fig 101 Specifying the Livelink system Confirm your entries by clicking the Next button 342 Livelink WCM Server Livelink Contents in the Content Client Selecting a Livelink object In this dialog box you select the Livelink object that is to be added as a relator in the WCM system Livelink WCM Server Content Client Microso
407. ype Only objects whose object type is assigned to the attribute set dynamic can be statified These are the following object types JSP page JSP topic and JSP template Form instance and Form template XML document XML template XSLT document and XSLT template Note Via Tools Website administration gt Object types or in the Admin client it is possible to assign an object type e g Frame the attribute set dynamic and the generated file extension jsp Such a JSP frame object can also be statified 414 Livelink WCM Server Working with Special Attributes Special Attributes The following attributes are important for statification of objects a Statify page The special attribute Statify page is used to control the object dependent statification see section Object Dependent Statification on page 416 Timeout If the code of a dynamic page is to be converted into static code the respective page is first generated as a temporary page This tempo rary page is executed via a URL connection The result of this execution is stored as a final static page When configuring the deployment system in the Admin client you set the waiting time in milliseconds for establishing the URL connection to the temporarily generated dynamic page This value can be over written by means of the special attribute Timeout

Content Client User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents